Planet CDMA User Guide

Cover Page
CDMA User Guide

version 4.4
April 2008
Copyright 2008 Mentum S.A. All rights reserved.
Notice This document contains confidential and proprietary information of Mentum S.A. and may not be copied, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or reproduced in any format or media, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Mentum S.A. Information contained in this document supersedes that found in any previous manuals, guides, specifications data sheets, or other information that may have been provided or made available to the user. This document is provided for informational purposes only, and Mentum S.A. does not warrant or guarantee the accuracy, adequacy, quality, validity, completeness or suitability for any purpose the information contained in this document. Mentum S.A. may update, improve, and enhance this document and the products to which it relates at any time without prior notice to the user. MENTUM S.A. MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN. Trademark Acknowledgement Mentum, Mentum Planet and Mentum Ellipse are registered trademarks owned by Mentum S.A. MapInfo Professional is a registered trademark of PB MapInfo Corporation. RF-vu is a trademark owned by iBwave. WaveSight is a trademark of Wavecall. This document may contain other trademarks, trade names, or service marks of other organizations, each of which is the property of its respective owner.
Contents
Contents
MENTUM PRODUCTS CONTACTING MENTUM INTRODUCTION List of products Getting technical support Send us your comments Using this documentation Online Help Documentation library Notational conventions Organization of this user guide Understanding W-CDMA networks W-CDMA features Multi-technology planning features W-CDMA analyses W-CDMA reports Scrambling code planning Workflow for W-CDMA network planning Suggested reading Understanding Mobile Technology projects Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project Gathering project information Creating a project for W-CDMA To create a project for W-CDMA Opening a project To open a project Creating a default settings file for W-CDMA To create a default settings file for W-CDMA 2 4 4 6 6 8 9 10 14 14 14 15 16 16 16 18 20 20 20 20 21 24 24 24 25
CHAPTER 1
Overview of W-CDMA
CHAPTER 2 Creating a Mobile Technology Project for WCDMA
Contents CDMA User Guide
CHAPTER 3
Defining a WCDMA Network Configuration
Understanding W-CDMA network configuration settings Workflow for defining a W-CDMA network configuration Defining network operators for W-CDMA To define network operators for W-CDMA Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA Spectrum allocation for W-CDMA W-CDMA carriers To create a new W-CDMA technology band Defining W-CDMA network settings General settings for W-CDMA Correlation model settings for W-CDMA Power control settings for W-CDMA Carrier settings for W-CDMA To define general settings for W-CDMA To define correlation model settings for W-CDMA To define power control settings for W-CDMA To define carrier settings for W-CDMA To define HSDPA network settings for W-CDMA To define HSUPA network settings for W-CDMA Understanding W-CDMA subscribers W-CDMA subscriber types and rapid planning Importing and exporting subscriber information To import pre-defined subscriber information To import or export subscriber information Workflow for creating W-CDMA subscriber types Defining clutter types for W-CDMA To define clutter types for W-CDMA To assign clutter classes to clutter types for W-CDMA Defining W-CDMA bearers W-CDMA bearers To define W-CDMA bearers To define HSDPA bearers Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA To define subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA
28 28 29 29 30 31 31 32 33 33 34 35 35 36 38 39 40 42 44 48 49 50 50 51 51 52 54 56 58 58 60 62 63 63
CHAPTER 4 Defining W-CDMA Subscribers
ii
To define subscriber equipment bands for W-CDMA Defining session types for W-CDMA To define session types for W-CDMA Defining quality types for W-CDMA To define quality types for W-CDMA Defining service types for W-CDMA To define circuit-switched service types for W-CDMA To define packet-switched service types for W-CDMA Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA To create a subscriber type for W-CDMA To define usage types for W-CDMA CHAPTER 5 Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites Understanding W-CDMA sites and sectors Considerations for multi-band networks Workflow for configuring and placing W-CDMA sites Creating W-CDMA sites To create a W-CDMA site Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors Losses and gains To calculate base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors Globally editing base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors To globally edit base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors Defining W-CDMA sector settings Hardware settings for W-CDMA Resource settings for W-CDMA Implementation settings for W-CDMA Quality settings for W-CDMA Power settings for W-CDMA To assign carriers to sectors To define hardware settings To define sector resources To define implementation settings To define quality settings To define W-CDMA power settings
64 66 67 69 69 70 71 73 77 78 81 84 84 85 85 85 87 87 89 93 93 96 97 97 97 98 99 99 99 101 103 104 105
iii
Editing sites and sectors To edit a site To globally edit W-CDMA sectors Deleting sites To delete a site Viewing W-CDMA carrier assignment and interference information To view W-CDMA frequency assignment and interference information CHAPTER 6
Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA Sectors
107 107 107 110 110 110 111 116 117 117 117 118 121 123 125 127 129 129 130 130 132 132 132 133 134 134 135 135 136 136 137 138
Understanding W-CDMA repeaters Repeaters and W-CDMA predictions Workflow for adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors To add repeaters to W-CDMA sectors To define service antenna settings for repeaters To define donor antenna settings for repeaters To define repeater prediction settings To define repeater equipment settings To define repeater carrier settings To edit repeater settings Locating repeaters in a Map window To locate repeaters in a Map window Understanding rapid planning for W-CDMA Prediction view files for W-CDMA analyses W-CDMA analysis layers Understanding data rate negotiation Data rate downgrading Analyzing the results of data rate negotiation Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings To define default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA To create a new rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node
CHAPTER 7 Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for WCDMA
iv
Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA To define rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning To choose a defined subscriber type for W-CDMA rapid planning To choose a nominal subscriber for W-CDMA rapid planning Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA To define rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA To generate a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers To view W-CDMA analysis layers Deleting analyses To delete analyses CHAPTER 8 Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for W-CDMA Monte Carlo phases Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs Understanding data rate negotiation Data rate downgrading Analyzing the results of data rate negotiation W-CDMA analysis layers CPICH analysis Downlink interference analysis Uplink interference analysis Handover analysis Other analysis Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA Optimizing W-CDMA analyses To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings Defining default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings To define default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings Defining default analysis layers for W-CDMA To define the default W-CDMA analysis layer list Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA
138 138 140 141 142 145 145 146 146 146 147 147 147 148 148 150 150 152 156 157 157 159 159 162 163 164 166 166 167 168 169 169 170 170 171
To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 171 Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA 172 To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA 172 To choose the subscriber types for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis 175 To define Simulation Area settings for W-CDMA 175 To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA 177 To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for W-CDMA 179 Defining discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA 181 To define discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA 182 Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 183 To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA 183 Adding an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node 184 To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node 184 Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA 184 To display discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA in table format 185 Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map 185 To create an unserved subscriber traffic map 186 Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis 187 To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for W-CDMA 187 Updating W-CDMA rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results 187 To update W-CDMA target values 188 Defining W-CDMA analysis layers 188 To define the W-CDMA analysis layers to use in an analysis 189 Generating W-CDMA analysis layers 190 To generate W-CDMA analysis layers 190 Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information 190 To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags 191 Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers 191 To view W-CDMA analysis layers 191 Recoloring best serving sector layers 192 To recolor best serving sector layers 192 Deleting analyses 193 To delete analyses 193
vi
Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for W-CDMA To obtain per-pixel information about a W-CDMA analysis Analyzing CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors Workflow for analyzing CPICH pollution To analyze CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors CHAPTER 9 Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers Understanding HSDPA in Mentum Planet HSDPA Monte Carlo analysis Downlink analysis Uplink analysis HSDPA analysis layers Workflow for generating HSDPA analysis layers Understanding HSUPA in Mentum Planet HSPA Rapid Planning analysis HSPA analysis Workflow for generating HSPA analysis layers Understanding scrambling code planning Workflow for scrambling code planning Creating a scrambling code plan To create a scrambling code plan Defining general scrambling code plan settings To define general settings Defining scrambling code plan exceptions To define scrambling code planning exceptions Working with scrambling code planning results To modify the scrambling code index assigned to a sector To view statistics for a plan To open a plan in Excel To save a plan To load a plan
193 194 196 198 199 204 205 206 207 208 211 211 213 213 215 218 218 218 219 220 220 222 223 224 224 225 225 225 225
CHAPTER 10
Creating Scrambling Code Plans
vii
CHAPTER 11
Generating WCDMA Reports
Understanding W-CDMA reports 228 W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data 228 W-CDMA analysis layer data 229 Using report data to help in W-CDMA network analysis 230 Predefined report designs 230 System-mobile-simple report 230 Carrier-sector-mobile report 231 Carrier-sector 231 System-mobile 231 Throughput 231 Columns in predefined reports 231 Workflow for generating W-CDMA reports 241 Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design 242 Modifying a predefined report design 242 To generate a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design 242 Designing a W-CDMA report 243 To design a W-CDMA report 243 To define the data columns for a W-CDMA report 246 To define the export settings for a W-CDMA report 247 To save the W-CDMA report design 249 To modify an existing W-CDMA report design 249 To delete a W-CDMA report design 249 Generating a W-CDMA report 249 To generate a W-CDMA report 250 Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers 250 To calculate W-CDMA layer statistics 251 To display W-CDMA layer statistics in table format 255 To add W-CDMA layer statistics to a report design 255
viii
CHAPTER 12
Overview of cdma2000
Understanding cdma2000 technology cdma2000 features Multi-technology planning features cdma2000 analyses cdma2000 reports PN offset planning Workflow for cdma2000 network planning Suggested reading Understanding Mobile Technology projects Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project Gathering project information Creating a project for cdma2000 To create a project for cdma2000 Opening a project To open a project Converting cdma2000 projects from previous versions Creating a default settings file for cdma2000 To create a default settings file for cdma2000 Understanding cdma2000 network configuration settings Workflow for defining a cdma2000 network configuration Defining network operators for cdma2000 To define network operators for cdma2000 Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 Spectrum allocation for cdma2000 cdma2000 carriers To create a new cdma2000 technology band Defining cdma2000 network settings General settings for cdma2000 Correlation model settings for cdma2000 Power control settings for cdma2000 Carrier settings for cdma2000 To define general settings for cdma2000
260 261 261 261 262 262 262 264 266 266 266 266 267 269 269 270 270 270 274 274 275 275 276 277 277 278 279 279 280 281 281 282
CHAPTER 13 Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000
CHAPTER 14 Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration
ix
To define correlation model settings for cdma2000 To define power control settings for cdma2000 To define carrier settings for cdma2000 To define EV-DO network settings for cdma2000 CHAPTER 15 Defining cdma2000 Subscribers Understanding cdma2000 subscribers cdma2000 subscriber types and rapid planning Importing and exporting subscriber information To import pre-defined subscriber information To import or export subscriber information Workflow for creating cdma2000 subscriber types Defining clutter types for cdma2000 To define clutter types for cdma2000 To assign clutter classes to clutter types for cdma2000 Defining cdma2000 bearers cdma2000 bearers To define cdma2000 bearers To define EV-DO bearers Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 To define subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 To define subscriber equipment bands for cdma2000 Defining session types for cdma2000 To define session types for cdma2000 Defining quality types for cdma2000 To define quality types for cdma2000 Defining service types for cdma2000 To define circuit-switched service types for cdma2000 To define packet-switched service types for cdma2000 Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 To create a subscriber type for cdma2000 To define usage types for cdma2000
283 285 286 287 292 293 294 294 295 295 296 298 300 301 302 304 307 309 309 309 311 312 314 314 316 316 319 323 324 327
CHAPTER 16
Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites
Understanding cdma2000 sites and sectors Considerations for multi-band networks Workflow for configuring and placing cdma2000 sites Creating cdma2000 sites To create a cdma2000 site Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors Losses and gains To calculate base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors To globally edit base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors Defining cdma2000 sector settings Hardware settings for cdma2000 Resource settings for cdma2000 Implementation settings for cdma2000 Quality settings for cdma2000 Power settings for cdma2000 To assign carriers to sectors To define hardware settings To define sector resources To define implementation settings To define quality settings To define cdma2000 power settings Editing sites and sectors To edit a site To globally edit cdma2000 sectors Deleting sites To delete a site Viewing cdma2000 carrier assignment and interference information To view cdma2000 frequency assignment and interference information
330 330 331 331 331 333 333 336 339 340 343 344 344 344 346 347 347 348 349 351 352 353 355 355 355 358 358 358 359
xi
CHAPTER 17
Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 Sectors
Understanding cdma2000 repeaters Repeaters and cdma2000 predictions Workflow for adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors To add repeaters to cdma2000 sectors To define service antenna settings for repeaters To define donor antenna settings for repeaters To define repeater prediction settings To define repeater equipment settings To define repeater carrier settings To edit repeater settings Locating repeaters in a Map window To locate repeaters in a Map window Understanding rapid planning for cdma2000 Prediction view files for cdma2000 analyses cdma2000 analysis layers Understanding data rate negotiation Data rate downgrading Analyzing the results of data rate negotiation Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings To define default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 To create a new rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 To define rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning To choose a defined subscriber type for cdma2000 rapid planning To choose a nominal subscriber for cdma2000 rapid planning Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000 To define rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000 Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 To generate a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000
364 365 365 366 366 369 371 373 375 377 377 378 378 380 380 380 381 382 382 383 383 384 384 385 386 386 386 388 389 389 393 394 395 395
CHAPTER 18
Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000
xii
Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers To view cdma2000 analysis layers Deleting analyses To delete analyses CHAPTER 19 Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for cdma2000 Monte Carlo phases Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs Understanding data rate negotiation Data rate downgrading Analyzing the results of data rate negotiation cdma2000 analysis layers Pilot analysis Forward link interference analysis Reverse link interference analysis Handoff analysis Other analysis Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 Optimizing cdma2000 analyses To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings Defining default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings To define default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings Defining default analysis layers for cdma2000 To define the default cdma2000 analysis layer list Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000 To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000 To choose the subscriber types for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis To define Simulation Area settings for cdma2000 To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for cdma2000 Defining discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000
395 395 396 396 396 396 400 400 402 406 407 407 409 409 413 414 415 417 417 418 419 420 421 421 422 422 423 424 424 427 427 429 431 433
xiii
To define discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000 434 Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 435 To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 435 Adding an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node 436 To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node 436 Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 436 To display discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 in table format 437 Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map 437 To create an unserved subscriber traffic map 438 Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis 439 To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for cdma2000 439 Updating cdma2000 rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results 440 To update cdma2000 target values 440 Defining cdma2000 analysis layers 440 To define the cdma2000 analysis layers to use in an analysis 441 Generating cdma2000 analysis layers 442 To generate cdma2000 analysis layers 442 Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information 442 To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags 443 Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers 443 To view cdma2000 analysis layers 443 Recoloring best serving sector layers 444 To recolor best serving sector layers 444 Deleting analyses 445 To delete analyses 445 Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for cdma2000 445 To obtain per-pixel information about a cdma2000 analysis 446 Analyzing pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors 448 Workflow for analyzing pilot pollution 450 To analyze pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors 451
xiv
CHAPTER 20
Generating EVDO Analysis Layers
Understanding EV-DO analysis layers Forward link analysis Reverse link analysis EV-DO analysis layers Workflow for generating EV-DO analysis layers Understanding PN offset planning How PN codes are assigned in Mentum Planet Preparing input data for PN offset planning Neighbor list Interference matrix Workflow for generating PN offset plans Creating PN offset plans To create a PN offset plan using current sector settings To create a PN offset plan using the PN Offset Planning tool Working with PN offset plans To view or edit the properties of a plan To copy a PN offset plan To delete a PN offset plan To display PN offset assignments in the Map window To edit the PN offset assignments in a plan To add a PN offset plan to a project To export PN offset assignments Analyzing PN offset plans To analyze a PN offset plan To view PN offset plan analysis layers in a Map window To display a PN offset plan analysis report Displaying PN offset reports To display a PN offset report Applying PN offset plans To apply a PN offset plan to a project
456 456 459 460 464 466 466 468 468 468 469 469 470 470 475 475 475 476 476 476 476 477 477 478 480 480 480 481 481 482
CHAPTER 21 Generating PN Offset Plans
xv
CHAPTER 22
Generating cdma2000 Reports
Understanding cdma2000 reports cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data cdma2000 analysis layer data Using report data to help in cdma2000 network analysis Predefined report designs System-mobile-simple report Carrier-sector-mobile report Carrier-sector System-mobile Throughput Columns in predefined reports Workflow for generating cdma2000 reports Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design Modifying a predefined report design To generate a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design Designing a cdma2000 report To design a cdma2000 report To define the data columns for a cdma2000 report To define the export settings for a cdma2000 report To save the cdma2000 report design To modify an existing cdma2000 report design To delete a cdma2000 report design Generating a cdma2000 report To generate a cdma2000 report Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers To calculate cdma2000 layer statistics To display cdma2000 layer statistics in table format To add cdma2000 layer statistics to a report design
484 484 486 486 486 486 487 487 487 487 487 496 496 496 497 497 498 501 502 503 503 504 504 504 505 505 509 509 510
xvi
APPENDIX A
Modeling WCDMA Networks
513
APPENDIX B
W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format
523
APPENDIX C
W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format
525
APPENDIX D
Modeling cdma2000 Networks
535
APPENDIX E
cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format
545
APPENDIX F
cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format
547
INDEX
557
xvii
xviii
Mentum Products
This chapter contains the following section:
The Mentum product portfolio provides a range of products for planning and maintaining wireless networks. This section describes the products that are available as part of the portfolio. For additional details about any of these products, see the Mentum web site at http://www.mentum.com.
List of products
Chapter iii CDMA User Guide
List of products
The following table describes wireless network planning and optimization products. The table does not provide details about Mentum Planet features and tools. For more information about technologies and tools, see the introductory chapters in the User Guide for the specific product or visit the Products page of the Mentum web site at http://www.mentum.com.
Product Mentum Planet Description A Windows-based wireless network planning and analysis tool. You can add technologies and tools to support the planning functions that you require. Depending on the options that you choose, Mentum Planet provides support for the following technologies: TDMA/FDMAGSM (including GPRS and EGPRS), IS-136, AMPS, NAMPS, and iDEN
CDMAW-CDMA (UMTS, including HSPA), cdma2000 (including IS-95, 1xRTT, EV-DO)
Specialized modules Measurement Data Package Universal Model Test mobile and scan receiver functionality that can be added to Mentum Planet so that you can import and analyze measurement data and increase the accuracy of predictions. Propagation model that automatically adapts to all engineering technologies (micro, mini, small and macro cells), to all environments (dense urban, urban, suburban, mountainous, maritime, open), and to all systems (GSM, GPRS, EDGE, UMTS, WIFI, WIMAX) in a frequency range that spans from 400MHz to 5GHz. Indoor/outdoor module that links Mentum Planet with iBwave RF-vu allowing you to view and plan indoor/outdoor networks and manage RFvu projects using the Mentum Planet Data Manager.
Indoor/Outdoor
Optimization applications Mentum Ellipse Renaissance An integrated software solution for the optimal planning and design of point-to-point and point-to-multipoint radio transmission links. Frequency planning tool that uses evolutionary algorithms to find the very best frequency plan that will minimize interference across the network. Optimisation tool that enables engineers to improve upon manual optimisation techniques by allowing them to consider and adjust multiple input parameters simultaneously. The result is a quicker and more costeffective convergence towards a 'best network' configuration.
Capesso
Contacting Mentum
This chapter contains the following sections:

Mentum is committed to providing fast, responsive technical support. This section provides an extensive list of contacts to help you through any issues you may have. We also welcome any comments about our documentation. Customer feedback is an essential element of product development and supports our efforts to provide the best products, services, and support we can.
Getting technical support Send us your comments
Chapter iv CDMA User Guide
Getting technical support

You can get technical support by phone or email, or by going to http://www.mentum.com/customercare/customercare.asp. Email is the best way of getting technical support.
North America Phone: +1 866 921-9219 (toll free), +1 819 483-7094 Fax: +1 819 483-7050 Email: support.americas@mentum.com Hours: 8am 8pm EST/EDT (Monday-Friday, excluding local holidays) Europe, Middle East, and Africa Phone: +33 1 39264642 Fax: +33 1 39264601 Email: support.emea@mentum.com Hours: 9am 6pm CET/CEST (Monday-Friday, excluding local holidays) Asia Pacific Phone: +852 2824 8874 Fax: +852 2824 8358 Email: support.apac@mentum.com Hours: 9am 6pm HKT (Monday-Friday, excluding local holidays)
When you call for technical support, ensure that you have your product ID number and know which version of the software you are running. You can obtain this information using the About command from the Help menu. When you request technical support outside of regular business hours, a Product Support Specialist will respond the next working day by telephone or email, depending upon the nature of the request.
Send us your comments

Feedback is important to us. Please take the time to send comments and suggestions on the product you received and on the user documentation shipped with it. Send your comments to: Planet.feedback@mentum.com
Introduction

This user guide provides the necessary information to plan W-CDMA and cdma2000 networks. It is divided into two sections. Section 1 focuses on the workflow and tasks required to plan and analyze a W-CDMA network while Section 2 focuses on the workflow and tasks required to plan and analyze a cdma2000 network. For more information, see Organization of this user guide on page 10. This chapter describes how to use the documentation.
Using this documentation Organization of this user guide
Chapter v CDMA User Guide
Using this documentation

Before using this documentation, you should be familiar with the Windows environment. It is assumed that you are using the standard Windows XP desktop, and that you know how to access ToolTips and shortcut menus, move and copy objects, select multiple objects using the Shift or Ctrl key, resize dialog boxes, expand and collapse folder trees. It is also assumed that you are familiar with the basic functions of MapInfo Professional. MapInfo Professional functions are not documented in this User Guide. For information about MapInfo Professional, see the MapInfo online Help and MapInfo Professional User Guide. You can access additional MapInfo user documentation from the MapInfo website at www.mapinfo.com. All product information is available through the online Help. You access online Help using the Help menu or context-sensitive Help from within a dialog box by pressing the F1 key. If you want to view the online Help for a specific panel or tab, click in a field or list box to activate the panel or tab before you press the F1 key. The following sections describe the structure of the online Help.
Online Help
From the Help menu, you can access online Help for Mentum Planet software and for MapInfo Professional. This section describes the structure of the Mentum Planet online Help. The online Help provides extensive help on all aspects of software use. It provides

help on all dialog boxes procedures for using the software an extensive Mentum Planet documentation library in PDF format User Guides
The following sections provide details about the resources available through the online Help.
Resource Roadmap
When you first use the online Help, start with the Resource Roadmap. It describes the types of resources available in the online Help and explains how best to use them. It includes a step-by-step guide that walks you through the available resources.
Introduction CDMA User Guide
Printing
You have two basic options for printing documents:
If you want a good quality print of a single procedure or section, you can print from the Help window. Click Print in the Help window. If you want a higher quality print of a complete User Guide, use Adobe Reader to print the supplied print-ready PDF file contained in the Mentum Planet documentation library. Open the PDF file and choose File Print.
Library Search
You can perform a full-text search on all PDF files contained in the Mentum Planet documentation library if you are using a version of Adobe Reader that supports full-text searches. The PDF files are located in the Mentum Planet 4\Help folder.
You can also perform a search on all online Help topics by clicking the Search tab in the Help window. Type a keyword, and click List Topics to display all Help topics that contain the keyword. The online Help duplicates the information found in the User Guide PDF files in order to provide more complete results. It does not duplicate the information in the Release Notes, or Glossary. Frequently Asked Questions
The Frequently Asked Questions section provides answers to common questions about Mentum Planet. For easy navigation, the section is divided into categories related to product functionality.
Whats This? Help
Whats This? Help provides detailed explanations of all dialog boxes.

User Guides
All User Guides for Mentum Planet software is easily accessible as part of the online Help.
Documentation library
Mentum Planet comes with an extensive library of User Guides in PDF format. The following table provides details about the documentation supplied with Mentum Planet. Additional documents, including Application Notes and Technical Notes, are available on the Mentum Web site: http://www.mentum.com.
Document Mentum Planet User Guide Grid Analysis User Guide
Enables you to Plan and analyze simulated wireless communication networks. Perform operations on spatial data that is stored in grids, and display, analyze, and export digital elevation models (DEM) and other grid-based data. Integrate indoor networks into Mentum Planet and learn how to view, edit, and manage indoor projects. Plan and analyze TDMA/FDMA networks. Plan and analyze W-CDMA (UMTS) and cdma2000 networks. Learn how to use the Data Manager. The Data Manager enables users to work with centralized Mentum Planet data stored in an Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server database. Learn how to install and configure the Data Manager Server on database and file servers in a network environment, and how to manage access to project data. Install Wireless Network Planning software. Search for commonly used technical terms. Learn about new features and known issues with the current release of software.
Indoor/Outdoor Integration User Guide TDMA/FDMA User Guide CDMA User Guide Data Manager User Guide
Data Manager Server Administrator Guide
Installation Guide Glossary Release Note
Introduction CDMA User Guide Document Data Manager Server Release Note MapInfo Professional User Guide Enables you to Learn about new features and known issues with the current release of Data Manager Server software. Learn about the many features of MapInfo Professional, as well as basic and advanced mapping concepts.
Notational conventions
This section describes the textual conventions and icons used throughout this documentation.
Textual conventions
Special text formats are used to highlight different types of information. The following table describes the special text conventions used in this document.
bold text Bold text is used in procedure steps to identify a user interface element such as a dialog box, menu item, or button. For example: In the Select Interpolation Method dialog box, choose the Inverse Distance Weighting option, and click Next. Courier text is used in procedures to identify text that you must type. For example: In the File Name box, type Elevation.grd. Bright blue text is used to identify a link to another section of the document. Click the link to view the section. Menu arrows are used in procedures to identify a sequence of menu items that you must follow. For example, if a step reads Choose File Open, you would click File and then click Open. <> Angle brackets are used to identify variables. For example, if a menu item changes depending on the chosen unit of measurement, the menu structure would appear as Display <unit of measurement>.
courier text
bright blue text
Icons
Throughout this documentation, icons are used to identify text that requires special attention.
This icon identifies a workflow summary, which explains a series of actions that you will need to carry out in the specified order to complete a complex task.
This icon identifies a cautionary statement, which contains information required to avoid potential loss of data, time, or resources. This icon identifies a tip, which contains shortcut information, alternative ways of performing a task, or methods that save time or resources. This icon identifies a note, which highlights important information or provides information that is useful but not essential.
Organization of this user guide

This user guide explains how to use Mentum Planet to plan networks that contain CDMA technologies. It is divided into two sections:
Section 1 is organized according to the workflow that you would typically follow to plan and analyze a W-CDMA network. Section 2 is organized according to the workflow that you would typically follow to plan and analyze a cdma2000 network.
Each chapter in this guide provides details about how to perform a step in the planning process and explains how it relates to the other steps. Before you begin, you should read the Understanding... sections in each chapter for an overview of the planning process.
10
Section 1: W-CDMA
Section 1
W-CDMA
This section explains how to use the W-CDMA technology provided with Mentum Planet. For information about cdma2000, see Section 2: cdma2000 on page 257.
1.
Chapter 1: Overview of W-CDMA
Overview of W-CDMA
This chapter provides an overview of W-CDMA and presents a typical workflow for W-CDMA planning.
Understanding W-CDMA networks W-CDMA features Workflow for W-CDMA network planning Suggested reading
13
Chapter 1 CDMA User Guide
Understanding W-CDMA networks

Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA) is a third-generation technology. W-CDMA networks can support a wide range of services (e.g., voice and high-speed data) and service levels simultaneously. As a thirdgeneration (3G) technology, W-CDMA is one of the most sophisticated technologies available. As a result, planning W-CDMA networks is more complex than planning traditional second-generation (2G) voice-centric networks. Unlike other technologies, W-CDMA does not provide dedicated time slots to each user. All signals within a W-CDMA network share the same bandwidth, because each signal is spread across the entire 5 MHz channel. Although a coded signal is broadcast to all users, users to whom the signal is not directed receive the signals (or a portion thereof) as interference. Interference includes energy from non-orthogonal signals broadcast from the same serving site and signals directed at users served by another site. In a W-CDMA network, the amount of internal and external interference across the network determines the network capacity (i.e., the amount of interference is directly linked to the number of calls supported by the network). In the dynamic environment of a W-CDMA network, interference levels fluctuate according to the number and location of users. Interference affects the range of sector coverage and the number of users that can be served. For more information, see Appendix A: Modeling W-CDMA Networks on page 513.
W-CDMA features
Mentum Planet enables you to plan and assess the coverage and performance of your multi-layer (2G and 3G) and multi-technology networks using features described in the following sections.
Multi-technology planning features

Mentum Planet enables you to define a W-CDMA configuration simultaneously with TDMA/FDMA configurations. The Subscriber Manager enables you to effectively plan your network with a diverse mix of subscribers and usage types. You can group the service, bearer, quality, and session requirements of each subscriber into subscriber types, which are used when you analyze the network.
14
Overview of W-CDMA CDMA User Guide
W-CDMA analyses
You can generate analyses using one of two methods:

Monte Carlo rapid planning
Monte Carlo
The Monte Carlo option enables you to perform a detailed analysis of the network using Monte Carlo simulation techniques to analyze a set of randomly generated points (i.e., subscribers) distributed according to traffic maps. For more information, see Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149.
Rapid planning
The rapid planning option provides a faster alternative for generating analysis layers based on user-defined levels of network loading on the uplink and downlink. The simulation runs only once, and does not generate the detailed operating points that the Monte Carlo simulation generates. This option is useful when you want a quick overview of your network. You can then use the Monte Carlo option for a more detailed view. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for WCDMA on page 131.
W-CDMA analysis layers
Analysis layers are generated for both the Monte Carlo and rapid planning options. Analysis layers enable you to compare and query layers of information for details on interference, coverage, and handover. For example, the generated analysis layers can help you to determine:

common pilot channel (CPICH) coverage uplink interference downlink interference throughput handover states and constraints path balance between the downlink and the uplink
You can generate analysis layers for the entire network or for a particular geographic region within the network. For more information, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159.
15
W-CDMA reports
The Report Designer enables you to view data from antenna patterns, sector settings, Monte Carlo simulations, and W-CDMA analysis layers in a report. You can output reports to a Microsoft Excel (.xls) file, MapInfo (.tab) file, or HTML (.htm) file. You can also calculate statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers and obtain per-pixel information about W-CDMA analyses. For more information, see Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227.
Scrambling code planning

The Scrambling Code Planning tool enables you to efficiently allocate scrambling codes to sectors in your network. It also enables you to manage scrambling code exceptions and illegal scrambling codes. For more information, see Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans on page 217.
Workflow for W-CDMA network planning

The workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order. Before you begin this workflow, you should review the list of Mentum Planet activities listed in Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. You should also read the Understanding... sections in each chapter for an overview of the planning process.
Step 1 Step 2
Create a project. See Chapter 2: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA on page 19. Define your W-CDMA network configuration as follows:
Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you plan to analyze. For general procedures for working with traffic maps, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Define subscribers using the Subscriber Manager. See Chapter 4: Defining W-CDMA Subscribers on page 47.
16
Overview of W-CDMA CDMA User Guide
Step 3
Optionally, edit the propagation models supplied with Mentum Planet. See Chapter 4, Working with Propagation Models, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Configure and place sites. See Chapter 5: Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites on page 83. Optionally, analyze survey data or tune propagation models. See Chapter 4, Working with Propagation Models, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Optionally, if you have purchased Capesso, optimize your sites using the workflow described in the Capesso online Help. Generate a rapid planning or Monte Carlo analysis and view results. See:
Step 4 Step 5
Step 6 Step 7
Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131 Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149 Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227
Step 8 Step 9
Optionally, plan scrambling codes. See Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans on page 217. Optionally, create coverage maps and FCC Service Area Boundary reports, see Chapter 15, Generating Reports, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
17
Suggested reading
Holma H., A. Toskala. HSDPA/HSUPA for UMTS: High Speed Radio Access for Mobile Communications, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006. Laiho, J. , A.Wacker, T. Novosad. Radio Network Planning and Optimization for UMTS, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006. Nawrocki, Maciej J., Mischa Dohler, A. Hamid Aghvami, Understanding UMTS Radio Network Modelling, Planning and Automated Optimization, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006. Kim, Kyoung Il. Handbook of CDMA System Design, Engineering, and Optimization, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1999. Lee, Jhong Sam & Leonard E. Miller. CDMA Systems Engineering Handbook. Artech House Publishers, 1998. Yang, Samuel C. CDMA RF System Engineering. Artech House Publishers, 1998.
18
2.
Chapter 2: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA
Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA

This chapter explains how to create a Mobile Technology project. Once you have created a project, you can define network settings and carrier settings, as described in the following chapters.
Understanding Mobile Technology projects Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project Gathering project information Creating a project for W-CDMA Opening a project Creating a default settings file for W-CDMA
19
Understanding Mobile Technology projects

In Mentum Planet, a project defines which elevation, clutter, and site file to use for analyses. You need to create a Mobile Technology project before you can define network and carrier settings, place sites, or generate analysis layers. For detailed information on projects, see the Mentum Planet User Guide. When you create a mobile technology project, you can design a network that supports a variety of technologies, including W-CDMA, cdma2000, and TDMA/FDMA. Once you have created a Mobile Technology project, you must specify that you want to use W-CDMA technology and define W-CDMA network, subscriber, and sector settings.
Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project

Step 1 Step 2
Gather technical information to support the project. See Gathering project information. Create the Mobile Technology project. See Creating a project for W-CDMA on page 20.
Gathering project information

To create a Mobile Technology project, you must have a digital elevation model (DEM) file and, optionally, a clutter file. The results of network analyses will be more accurate and complete if you start with as much information as possible. It is recommended that you also have the following:
technical information about sites and sectors, such as location, power, azimuth, tilt, and twist manufacturers electronic antenna patterns
Creating a project for W-CDMA

The Project Wizard leads you through the process of creating a project and, by default, is automatically displayed upon startup of Mentum Planet. If you want Mentum Planet to automatically open the last project, instead of the Project Wizard, in the Startup Options section of the User Preferences dialog box, choose the Open Most Recent Project option. See Defining User Preferences in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
20
Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA CDMA User Guide
You can use remote project folders to store and access Mentum Planet project data. For example, you can use shared project folders for the following types of project files to conserve disk space on your local computer:

bin files signal (field) strength files prediction view files (CDMA technologies only)
By default, these files are saved in the local project folder. If you use shared project folders, the project files are stored in the shared folders, instead of the local project folder. The shared folders must have read/write access permissions for all Mentum Planet users accessing the shared folders.
If you are using shared folders and do not enable the corresponding check box in the Sharing section of the Advanced Options tab in the Project Settings dialog box, the shared path is not stored in Data Manager when you check in the project. For any Data Manager users who perform a Get on the project, all data will be stored within their local project folder.
You can choose to use a workspace to save your Map window settings, although this is not required. For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To create a project for W-CDMA

1 Start Mentum Planet. By default, the Project Wizard opens when you start Mentum Planet. To use the wizard at any other time, choose File New Project. 2 3 Click Next on the first page of the Project Wizard. In the Mobile Technology dialog box, choose a W-CDMA default settings file and click OK.
21
When you choose a default settings file, default network settings, including appropriate spectrum, are automatically applied to the settings in the Network Settings dialog box and W-CDMA is enabled on the Network Technologies panel. You can modify these settings after you create the project. The default settings are based on defined standards for the technology. These standards are available from various organizations. For CDMA technologies, this list includes 3GPP2 (http:// www.3gpp2.org), TIA/EIA (http://www.tiaonline.org) and ANSI (http:// www.ansi.org). 4 5 6 7 Follow the pages of the Project Wizard and supply the appropriate information to create your project. Click Finish. The Project Settings dialog box opens. On the Data tab, type a project description in the Description box. In the Project File box, type a name for the project file or accept the default. By default, the folder name specified in the Wizard is used as the .dBp file name. 8 If you want to use a workspace, enable the Use a Workspace check box. For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. 9 If you want to update the workspace file automatically each time you close a project, enable the Workspace Autosave check box. With both the Use a Workspace and Workspace Autosave check boxes enabled, the specified workspace will be automatically saved when you close a project. When you re-open the project, the project will be displayed exactly as it appeared when you last closed the project. 10 Click the Folders tab.
22
11 If you want to change the default paths for bin, signal strength, prediction view, or settings files, for any of the following boxes, click Browse, navigate to the shared folder, and click OK.

Bin<project>\bin folder, used for prediction files Signal Strength<project>\SignalStrength folder, used for field strength files Prediction View<project>\PredictionView folder, used when you generate a CDMA Monte Carlo simulation GlobalProgram Files\Mentum Planet 4\Global folder, used for default settings files
12 If you intend to use the Data Manager with shared project files, in the Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab, and in the Sharing section, enable the check boxes for each of the file types that reference shared project data. For information about the other options on the Advanced Options tab, press the F1 key. For more detailed information, see Defining output settings in Chapter 8, Generating Predictions, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. For information about the CDMA Analysis Optimization settings, see Optimizing W-CDMA analyses on page 167. 13 Click OK to save your Mentum Planet project. The Project Explorer opens, docked at the left edge of the application window.
When you create a project, a set of default propagation model files is copied to the Model folder located within the project folder. Each propagation model references a default Clutter Property Assignment (.cpa) file containing settings appropriate for the model. Ensure that the clutter properties defined for the propagation model are set for the clutter grid file you specify in the Project Settings dialog box. For information on creating a default settings file, see Creating a default settings file for W-CDMA on page 24.
23
To open the Project Settings dialog box once a project is open, choose Edit Project Settings, or click the Project Settings button on the Analysis toolbar.
Opening a project
You must close an open project before opening a new one. Only projects you have recently worked with appear in the Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box.
To open a project
1 2 3 Choose File Open Project. The Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box opens. If you want to see the paths in the Most Recently Used Projects list, enable the Show Path check box. Do one of the following:
Choose a project in the Most Recently Used Projects list and click Open. Click Browse, locate the project you want to open and then click Open.
If you are opening a project that contains predictions from an earlier version of Mentum Planet, see Opening and closing projects in Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Creating a default settings file for W-CDMA

When you create a project, you are prompted to choose a default settings (.gsm) file. Mentum Planet includes default settings files for common technologies. You can, however, create a custom default settings file that will automatically appear in the Mobile Technologies list. A default settings file for W-CDMA contains the settings that are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, such as information about which technologies are enabled in your network and how the spectrum is allocated. When you open a project, the values contained in the W-CDMA default settings file are loaded in the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box.
24
To create a default settings file for W-CDMA

1 Define the network settings. For more information, see Chapter 3: Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration on page 27. 2 Export the network settings to a network settings (.gns) file to the Mentum Planet 4\global\GSM\DefaultSets folder. For more information on how to export a network settings file, see Exporting and importing Mobile Technology network settings files in Chapter 3, Defining Network Technologies and Services, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide. 3 In the Mentum Mentum Planet 4\Global\GSM\DefaultSets folder, copy any one of the existing default project settings (.gsm) files and rename it. You must retain the .gsm extension. This will become the new default settings file. 4 5 Open Notepad or any other ASCII text editor. Open the default settings file you created in Step 3 and edit the network settings parameter to refer to the network settings file you created in Step 2. For example:
[Network Settings] Default Settings File=myNetworkSettings.gns
Do not modify any other parameters in the file. 6 Save the default settings file. The default settings file will be listed in the Mobile Technology dialog box when you create a project.
25
26
3.
Chapter 3: Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration
Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration

This chapter describes how to define a W-CDMA network configuration.
Understanding W-CDMA network configuration settings Workflow for defining a W-CDMA network configuration Defining network operators for W-CDMA Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA Defining W-CDMA network settings
27
Understanding W-CDMA network configuration settings

W-CDMA network configuration settings enable you to define spectrum and operators for your W-CDMA network. In addition, you can configure carriers and define other system-level settings. For each carrier, you can define priorities (preference weightings) and soft thresholds, which are used in conjunction with sector settings to allocate subscribers to carriers during network analyses.You can also define HSDPA and HSUPA settings, which are used for HSDPA and HSUPA analyses, if you have purchased an HSDPA or HSUPA license. If you want to model other technologies, you can enable them and define spectrum and other settings. If you chose a default W-CDMA settings file when you created the project, W-CDMA is automatically added to the Network Technologies panel in the Network Settings dialog box, and spectrum and carriers are allocated. In addition to W-CDMA, you can add other technologies as required. For more information on adding other technologies, see Chapter 3, Defining Network Technologies and Services, and Chapter 4, Defining Network Configuration, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide. When you enable technologies, you can assign colors that apply to each technology. You can also assign colors to other network operators in the same or neighboring geographic areas. These colors enable you to graphically display how the spectrum is divided when you allocate portions of the spectrum to each technology. For more information, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA on page 30.
Workflow for defining a W-CDMA network configuration

Step 1 Step 2
Define network operators in your network. See Defining network operators for W-CDMA on page 29. If required, allocate spectrum and assign carriers to W-CDMA. See Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA on page 30. Define general, correlation model, power control, and carrier settings for W-CDMA. See Defining W-CDMA network settings on page 33.
Step 3
28
Defining a W-CDMA Network Configuration CDMA User Guide
Defining network operators for W-CDMA

Network operators are the companies that share the same or neighboring geographic area. One operator, the Home operator, is included by default. This operator represents the network of the company for which you work. On the Spectrum Allocation panel of the Network Settings dialog box, different colors are used to identify the technology type and the network operators. The home operator is not assigned a color, but uses the color that has been assigned for the technology. Additional operators are assigned a unique color to visually indicate the division of the available spectrum. For more information, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA on page 30.
To define network operators for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Network Settings. The Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box opens, with the Network Technologies panel selected by default. One or more technologies will be enabled, depending on the default settings file you chose when you created the project.
If you want to change the color for a technology, in the Technologies table, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK.
29
3 4 5
To add a network operator, click Add below the Network Operators table. If you want to rename the operator, click in the Name column for the operator and type a new name. If you want to change the color for an operator that you have added, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK. You cannot assign a color to the Home operator. The color assigned for the technology is used for the Home operator.
Do one of the following:
Click OK to save your settings and close the Network Settings dialog box. Choose another item in the tree view.
You can also access the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box by clicking the Network Settings button on the Mobile Technology toolbar.
Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA

Spectrum allocation involves assigning bands to technologies and network operators, and defining the spectrum range and carriers for each band. This section describes how to allocate the spectrum and define carriers for W-CDMA. If you chose a default W-CDMA settings file when you created the project, spectrum is automatically allocated and carriers are assigned, but you can modify the spectrum and add new bands as required. For more information on allocating spectrum and defining carriers for other technologies, see Chapter 4: Defining Network Configuration in the TDMA/ FDMA User Guide.
30
Spectrum allocation for W-CDMA

W-CDMA technology can occupy more than one band. This type of configuration is necessary when the technology occupies spectrum in separate bands or blocks of spectrum within one band, but not contiguous carrier numbers. You can define as many as 15 bands.
If you have more than one band defined for W-CDMA, and you want to generate predictions that include carriers from two different bands, you need to ensure that your sectors are configured correctly. For more information, see Considerations for multi-band networks on page 84.
If the band is assigned to the Home operator, you must define

the technology for the band the start and end downlink frequencies, which must be within the range allowed for W-CDMA within your area the starting carrier number, which corresponds to the first carrier at the start of the allocated band
If a band is assigned to another network operator (i.e., a competitor), you can only assign the start and end downlink frequencies, not the technology or the carriers.
When you assign carriers to technologies across multiple bands, you must ensure that the carrier numbers are unique to each technology; you cannot allocate the same number for a technology twice. For example, you can have carrier number 1 in W-CDMA and carrier number 1 in GSM, but you can only have carrier number 1 in W-CDMA once.
W-CDMA carriers
Carriers are the frequencies that carry signals for each band. When you add a technology band, a new set of carriers is added automatically and spaced along the band. You assign carriers when you define W-CDMA sectors for your project. For more information, see Defining W-CDMA sector settings on page 96.
31
To create a new W-CDMA technology band

1 In the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, choose Spectrum Allocation in the tree view.
2 3
On the Spectrum Allocation panel, click Add. A new band is added to the list. If you want to allocate spectrum to another network operator, choose the operator from the list in the Operator column. The operators in the list are the ones that you defined on the Network Technologies panel (see Defining network operators for W-CDMA on page 29). The default operator is the Home operator. If you allocate spectrum to an operator other than the Home operator, you can view the spectrum assigned to the operator, but not the carriers or technologies. This enables you to visually model the ranges of spectrum that belong to your competitors or other adjacent operators.
4 5 6
In the Band Name column, type a name for the band, or accept the default. In the Downlink Center Frequency column, type a value in the Start and End boxes to indicate the lower and upper frequencies for the band. In the Carrier Start column, type the starting carrier number for the band, or accept the default. The Carrier End column updates automatically based on the carrier spacing defined for W-CDMA.
32
7 8 9
In the Technology Type column, choose W-CDMA from the list. To add another band, click Add, and repeat Step 3 to Step 7. Click Refresh Carriers. The carriers required for each technology band are automatically added to the Carriers list on the Carrier tab of the W-CDMA panel of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.
10 Do one of the following:
The frequency values entered in the Start and End boxes in the Downlink Center Frequency column are the center frequencies of the first and last carriers in the list you are allocating. The Spectrum graph shows the actual spectrum occupied by all these carriers. Therefore, the start frequency displayed in the graph is half the carrier bandwidth lower than the center frequency defined for the first carrier, and the end frequency is half the carrier bandwidth higher than the center frequency defined for the last carrier in the table.
Defining W-CDMA network settings

After you have allocated spectrum and defined carriers for your network, you can define the W-CDMA network settings. These settings are described in the following sections.
General settings for W-CDMA

The general settings enable you to view the spreading chip rate of the system, and to define
the common pilot channel (CPICH) pollution margin, which is used to determine CPICH polluters when generating analyses. Servers outside of this range are not considered polluters. interference settings for other systems. These values are used to account for interference that is not specifically modeled in Mentum Planet.
You can also choose curves for CPICH factor mapping and usage factor mapping. The CPICH factor mapping and usage factor mapping are combined
33
in the CPICH - Pollution Index layer. The CPICH - Pollution Index layer shows the proportion of traffic likely to be affected by CPICH pollution, providing a lesser weighting to areas where CPICH pollution may exist but the affected traffic is low. The curves are used as follows:
CPICH Factor MappingThis curve maps CPICH factors to CPICH ratios. The CPICH factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1. Typically, if the CPICH ratio exceeds 7 dB, establishing a CPICH is unlikely. If it is less than 7 dB, establishing a CPICH is more likely. The CPICH factor is high (close to one) if establishing a CPICH in a bin is unlikely, and low (close to zero) if establishing a CPICH is likely. Usage Factor MappingThis curve maps usage factors to user densities. The usage factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1 that is determined for each bin in the analysis area. The usage factor is high (close to one) in bins where the need to establish a CPICH is high, and low (close to zero) in bins where the need to establish a CPICH is low.
You can edit the usage and CPICH curves to modify the relationship between the X- and Y-axes. This relationship affects the final calculated CPICH Pollution Index values. Adjusting the usage and CPICH curves enables you to model possible changes to your network or isolate any factors causing CPICH pollution. For example, if you move the usage curve to the right, higher user density/average user density ratio values must be met before the bins are considered to be areas where the need for CPICH coverage is high.
The X-axis of the usage factor curve is in milli-Erlangs per km2. If you have assigned a traffic map with values in subscribers per km2 to any subscriber types, the values will be converted to Erlangs per km2 before the usage factor curve is applied.
Correlation model settings for W-CDMA

The correlation model settings enable you to define settings for modeling fading. You can define settings for the following two types of correlation models for slow fading of signals:
Angularuses a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. The correlation factor is based on the angular separation of the two sectors at the mobile. The correlation factors are used in the calculation of
34
handover gain and in the generation of fading signal values. For more information on the calculations used to determine the angular correlation factor, see Using a correlation model to model slow fading on page 518.
Non-angularuses correlation factors for co-site sectors and non co-site sectors
For more information on slow fading, see Slow fading on page 517.
Power control settings for W-CDMA

The power control settings enable you to define power control errors that you can simulate during an analysis (see To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA on page 172). Power control errors are caused by delays of power control commands and power control step, and can affect network performance. For more information on how effective power controls can control interference, see Controlling interference on page 516.
Carrier settings for W-CDMA

The carrier settings enable you to define the power amplifier (PA) threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings for the carriers that you created on the Spectrum Allocation panel. The PA threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings are soft thresholds. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA threshold or noise rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If there are no more carriers, the traffic will exceed the soft limits rather than be blocked. For more information on how to define carriers, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA on page 30. You can define the standard that is assigned to each carrier:
Rel 99the carrier supports Rel 99 traffic only (QPSK modulation) Rel 99 & HSDPAthe carrier supports Rel 99 and HSDPA carriers (QPSK and 16QAM modulation) HSDPAthe carrier supports HSDPA traffic only (QPSK and 16QAM modulation) Rel 99 & HSPAthe carrier supports Rel 99 and HSPA carriers HSPAthe carrier supports HSDPA traffic on the downlink and HSUPA traffic on the uplink.
35
PA Threshold
The PA Threshold value is a soft target for subscribers using Rel 99 bearers. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached. If you have assigned HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers, the PA threshold is also used to determine how much power is available for HSDPA channels. Unused power within the PA threshold is available for HSDPA, after the Rel 99 traffic and common channels have had their share. For example, a PA threshold of 100% means that all PA power is shared between Rel 99 channels and HSDPA; a PA threshold of 60% means that 40% of the PA power is reserved for Rel 99 channels and is unavailable for HSDPA. For HSDPA only carriers, the PA Threshold is considered a hard limit. The HS-DSCH power in a carrier is the unused power of the PA up to the PA Threshold.
To define general settings for W-CDMA

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Network Settings. In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA. The W-CDMA panel opens with the General tab selected by default.
36
In the CPICH Pollution Margin box, type a value to define the powerto-interference (Ec/Io) margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a CPICH signal will interfere with the desired signal, or accept the default. Type a value in the Downlink Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the downlink. Type a value in the Uplink Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the uplink. In the Best Ec Threshold box, type a value to define the threshold for the CPICH - Best Ec Server analysis layer. This value is used only for the CPICH - Best Ec Server analysis layer. The analysis layer shows the best server at each location where the Ec is above this value. For more information on analysis layers, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159.
4 5 6
In the CPICH Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve:
Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use, and then click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a CPICH Factor Mapping curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
The CPICH Factor Mapping curve is used to determine the likelihood of establishing a pilot for each bin in the analysis area.
37
In the Usage Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve:
Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use, and then click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a Usage Factor Mapping curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
The Usage Factor Mapping curve is used with the CPICH Factor Mapping curve to determine the CPICH Pollution Index analysis layer. 9 Do one of the following:
Click OK to save your settings and close the Network Settings dialog box. Choose another item in the tree view. Click another tab.
To define correlation model settings for W-CDMA

1 2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA. On the W-CDMA panel, click the Correlation Model tab.
On the Correlation Model tab, do one of the following:
To use an angular correlation model, choose Angular from the list, and type values in the boxes in the Parameters table. For
38
more information on these parameters and the associated equation, see Slow fading on page 517.
To use a non-angular correlation model, choose Non-Angular from the list, and type values in either of the following boxes in the Parameters table:
Inter-site Correlation Factorthe correlation factor for signals arriving from co-site sectors or carriers, which can be other sectors within a site or other carriers within a sector Intra-site Correlation Factorthe correlation factor for signals arriving from sectors at different sites Do one of the following:
To define power control settings for W-CDMA

1 2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA. On the W-CDMA panel, click the Power Control tab.
39
Type a value in either of the following boxes to define the power control deviation:
Uplink Power Control Deviationthe standard deviation of the uplink signal due to power control errors Downlink Power Control Deviationthe standard deviation of the downlink signal due to power control errors
Type values in either of the following boxes to define the power control error:
Mean Uplink Power Control Errorthe mean uplink signal error due to power control errors. Mean Downlink Power Control Errorthe mean downlink signal error due to power control errors. Click OK to save your settings and close the Network Settings dialog box. Choose another item in the tree view. Click another tab.
To define carrier settings for W-CDMA

1 2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose W-CDMA. On the W-CDMA panel, click the Carrier tab.
40
For each carrier listed in the Carrier column, type values in any of the following columns:
Channel Namean optional user-defined channel name. By default, the Channel Name is the same as the Carrier. If you type user-defined channel names in the Channel Name column, they will be used throughout Mentum Planet instead of the Carrier. PA Thresholdthe target percentage of the power at the power amplifier for all sectors assigned to the carrier. For more information, see PA Threshold on page 36. For information on assigning carriers to sectors, see To assign carriers to sectors on page 99. Noise Risethe noise rise target for all sectors assigned to the carrier. This value is a soft target. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached. Preference Weightingsa relative weighting value for the carrier that represents the distribution of preferred use for the carriers listed in the Carrier column. When you assign weightings for carriers, the Preference column will automatically update to display the percentage of use for each carrier. If you
41
assign a preference weight of 0, it does not mean that the carrier will not carry any traffic, but that it is the least preferred carrier. For more information on the Carriers table, press the F1 key. 4 From the Standard column, choose the type of 3GPP W-CDMA carrier:

Rel 99 Rel 99 & HSDPA HSDPA Rel 99 & HSPA HSPA
For more information, see Carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 35. If you choose either HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA, an HSDPA node is created under the W-CDMA node in the Network Settings tree view. When you choose HSPA or Rel 99 & HSPA, both an HSDPA and an HSUPA node are created under the W-CDMA node in the Network Settings tree view. 5 Do one of the following:
To define HSDPA network settings for W-CDMA

The HSDPA panels are only available if you assigned HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA to one or more carriers on the W-CDMA Carriers tab. For more information, see To define carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 40. You must have a license to generate HSDPA analyses. 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA, then expand W-CDMA and choose HSDPA General. Three HSDPA panels are displayed.
42
On the HSDPA General tab, enable any of the following check boxes:
Conversationalquality of service class that is guaranteed. This class is given priority over all other traffic when allocating traffic or negotiating data rates. Streamingquality of service class used for such activities as web casts. Interactivequality of service class reserved for interactive activities. Backgroundthe last quality of service class to be considered when allocating traffic or negotiating data rates.
The traffic classes you enable affect how traffic is allocated and how data rates are negotiated. 3 4 Click the TFRCs tab. In the Use Data Rates With section, enable the check boxes for the number of codes you want to use for the chosen Transport Format and Rate Combinations (TFRCs). The number of codes you enable affects the available data rates. For example, if you enable 1 Code and 5 Codes, and enable TFRCs 1, 2, and 3, then only the data rates for 1 Code and 5 Codes will be available for TFRCs 1, 2, and 3. The maximum available data rate would be 1.78 Mbps (with TFRC 3). For information on HSDPA data rates, see Table 9.1 on page 207.
43
Enable the check box beside each TFRC (Transport Format and Resource Combination) that you want to use and type a value in the corresponding Ec/Nt for Max Data Rate column or accept the defaults. The Ec/Nt Code value represents the ratio of the HS-DSCH channel symbol energy to the total spectral noise density.
6 7
Click the Terminal Downlink Data Rates tab. From the Terminal Category list, choose the terminal category you want to use. In this release, only HSDPA terminal categories 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12 are modeled.
8 9
In each field of the Data Rate (kbps) column, type a new value or accept the default. From the Modulation list for each data rate, choose the corresponding modulation.
10 From the Codes list, choose the corresponding codes. 11 In the Ec/Nt (dB) column, for each data rate, type a new Ec/Nt value or accept the default. 12 To delete a data rate, choose a row in the table and click Remove. 13 To add a new data rate, choose the data rate above which you want to insert a new data rate and click Add. 14 Do one of the following:
To define HSUPA network settings for W-CDMA

The HSUPA panel (for uplink elements) is always shown with the HSDPA panel (for downlink elements). It is only available if you assigned HSPA or Rel 99 & HSPA to one or more carriers on the W-CDMA Carriers tab. For more information, see To define carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 40. You must have a license to generate HSPA analyses.
44
In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA, then expand W-CDMA and choose HSUPA. The FRCs panel is displayed. Enable the check boxes for the number of codes you want to use for the chosen Fixed Reference Channels (FRCs). Each FRC corresponds to a TTI length (2 or 10ms) and the number of codes used for each spreading factor.
45
46
4.
Chapter 4: Defining W-CDMA Subscribers
Defining W-CDMA Subscribers

This chapter describes how to use the Subscriber Manager to define the subscribers in your network. Subscribers are categorized into types, which are used when you generate an analysis of your W-CDMA network. Creating subscriber types that account for the possible variations of subscribers enables you to generate reliable and comprehensive analyses of your W-CDMA network.
Understanding W-CDMA subscribers Importing and exporting subscriber information Workflow for creating W-CDMA subscriber types Defining clutter types for W-CDMA Defining W-CDMA bearers Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA Defining session types for W-CDMA Defining quality types for W-CDMA Defining service types for W-CDMA Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA
47
Understanding W-CDMA subscribers

The characteristics of subscribers are defined using the categories in the Subscriber Manager. You can create a diverse mix of subscribers by defining different services, quality types, and user equipment types and assigning them to subscriber types. Subscriber types are used with Monte Carlo and rapid planning analyses. Rapid planning analyses can also use a nominal subscriber, which contains a subset of the subscriber information. The nodes within the Subscriber Manager represent building blocks for subscriber types:
Subscriber Typesconsolidate the information from the other nodes in the Subscriber Manager into various combinations to represent the mix of subscribers in your network. Servicesare the applications that a subscriber uses. You can define circuit-switched services and packet-switched services. HSDPA can only be used with packet-switched services. Qualitiesdefine the guaranteed and maximum data rates of a service. Session Typesmodel the stream of packets which is used to calculate the effective amount of time that a subscriber uses a packet-switched service. You can assign session types to packetswitched service types. Subscriber Equipment Typesrepresent the types of mobile equipment that are available in your network. Bearersrepresent traffic channels, and are assigned to subscriber equipment types. Clutter Typesenable you to define the characteristics of the environments in which services are used. Typically, a Clutter Type includes one or more clutter classes.
For each subscriber type, you must choose a subscriber equipment type and traffic map. You can define multiple usage types, each of which comprises weightings to spread subscribers within the four different environments, a quality, and a service type. Figure 4.1 shows how the information related to subscriber types is organized hierarchically. This hierarchy is reflected in the workflow for defining subscriber types. For example, you need to define bearers (or use the defaults) before you define subscriber equipment bands, because you need to assign
48
Defining W-CDMA Subscribers CDMA User Guide
bearers to subscriber equipment bands. For details on the workflow, see Workflow for creating W-CDMA subscriber types on page 51.
Subscriber Types
Subscriber Equipment Types
Usages (defined as part of Subscriber Types)
Technology Bands
Environments
Services
Qualities
(defined for each Clutter Type and weighted per Usage)
Bearers
Clutter Types
Session Types
Figure 4.1 Subscriber Manager information hierarchy
For a detailed example of how to define a subscriber type, see Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA on page 77. This example shows you how to define usages, explains the effect of weighting, and describes how the settings that you specify for the subscriber type translate into a real-world scenario. Mentum Planet provides a set of default items for the Subscriber Manager, including bearers, clutter types, services, and subscriber types. To use the defaults, you must import subscriber settings using the Import Wizard. See Importing and exporting subscriber information on page 50.
W-CDMA subscriber types and rapid planning

If you are generating a rapid planning analysis, you can use the subscriber types defined using the Subscriber Manager or you can use a nominal subscriber. Rapid planning uses only a small subset of the information in the Subscriber Manager. Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics quickly, rather than investing the time required to define detailed subscriber types using the Subscriber Manager. For more information on defining a nominal subscriber, see Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning on page 140.
49
Importing and exporting subscriber information

You can import or export subscriber data using Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. In order to simplify the process of subscriber creation, you can use predefined subscriber worksheets to set common subscriber values. Pre-defined templates are located in the Subscriber Data folder within a project folder.
As illustrated in Figure 4.1 on page 49, subscriber types consist of many inter-related elements. In order for the import of pre-defined subscriber types to be successful, all elements must be defined. Before using the pre-defined templates, review the details in the Readme.txt file located in the Subscriber Data folder.
To import pre-defined subscriber information

1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import. The Import Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard, see Chapter 13, Working with Network and Project Data, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. 2 On the File Location page, do the following:

Choose Microsoft Excel. Click the Browse button, navigate to the Subscriber Data folder located within the project folder, choose the pre-defined templates you want to use and click Open.
3 4
Click Next. On the Data Selection page, enable the check boxes next to the data you want to import and click Finish.
50
To import or export subscriber information

When you export data, an Excel Spreadsheet is created that contains subscriber settings divided into different worksheets. 1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import or Export. The Import Wizard or Export Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard or Export Wizard, see Chapter 13, Working with Network and Project Data, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. 2 Follow the prompts in the Wizard.
Workflow for creating W-CDMA subscriber types

Step 1
Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you want to analyze. For information on creating traffic maps, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. If required, define clutter types. See Defining clutter types for W-CDMA on page 52. If required, define bearers and then define subscriber equipment types, assigning bearers to the technology bands for each type. See

Step 2 Step 3
Defining W-CDMA bearers on page 58 Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA on page 63
Step 4
If required, define session types, and then define service types, assigning session types to packet-switched services. See
Defining session types for W-CDMA on page 66 Defining service types for W-CDMA on page 70
Step 5
If required, define quality types. See Defining quality types for W-CDMA on page 69.
51
Step 6
If required, create subscriber types. See Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA on page 77.
To simplify the creation of subscriber types, you can import default subscriber settings and then modify the settings as required. See Importing and exporting subscriber information on page 50.
Defining clutter types for W-CDMA

Clutter types are groupings of clutter classes contained in the clutter grid. For more information, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Grouping clutter classes simplifies your workflow by enabling you to define characteristics only once for the type (rather then once for each clutter class in the clutter grid). For example, you could create a type called Populated Areas - Low Density, and assign the clutter classes Suburban, Town, Village, and Semi-Rural to it. For each clutter type, you can define the characteristics of the environments within that clutter type. The available environments are:

Outdooropen air environments Indoorbuildings or structures (normally representing areas where single wall penetration is required) Deep Indoorin-building areas where two-wall penetration is required, or dense buildings where higher than normal penetration losses are experienced Vehicularmoving vehicles
You can enable one or more of the environments for a clutter type. Environments are used when you define usage types for a subscriber type (see Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA on page 77 for details). For each usage type, you can define a weighting indicating the amount of time that usage type occurs in each environment (for example, you could define a business subscriber who uses voice service in an outdoor environment 10% of the time). For all of the environments, you can define the penetration loss and the required fast fading margin. For the Vehicular environment, you can also define the speed at which the vehicle is traveling. Figure 4.2 shows a sample clutter file, and shows how example clutter types could be applied to the clutter classes in the file. In the figure, the Village and Suburban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - Low Density
52
clutter type, and the Urban and Dense Urban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type. Figure 4.2 also provides example settings for each clutter type. These settings are typical of urban and suburban environments.
Village
Dense urban Urban
Suburban Clutter type: Populated Areas - Low Density Outdoor fast fading: 6 dB penetration loss: 0 dB Indoor fast fading: 0 dB penetration loss: 9 dB Deep Indoor not enabled Vehicular fast fading: 4 dB penetration loss: 6 dB speed: 50 km/h Figure 4.2 Examples of clutter types Clutter type: Populated Areas - High Density Outdoor fast fading: 7 dB penetration loss: 0 dB Indoor fast fading: 0 dB penetration loss: 11 dB Deep Indoor fast fading: 0 dB penetration loss: 22 dB Vehicular fast fading: 3 dB penetration loss: 6 dB speed: 30 km/h
When you run a Monte Carlo simulation, if an environment does not apply to a particular type of clutter (for example, in Figure 4.2, the deep indoor environment does not apply to the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type), the simulation will not place any subscribers in that type of clutter in that environment. In the example in Figure 4.2, no subscribers would be using
53
services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type, but you could have subscribers using services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type. When you assign clutter classes to a clutter type, each clutter class inherits the settings that you defined for the clutter type. The W-CDMA Simulation tool will use default settings, shown in Table 4.1, for clutter classes that are not assigned to a clutter type.
Table 4.1 Default environment settings Setting Fast fading margin Penetration loss Speed Outdoor 0 dB 0 dB N/A Vehicular 0 dB 7 dB 50 km/h Indoor 0 dB 10 dB N/A Deep Indoor 0 dB 20 dB N/A
For Downlink Orthogonality, the default value is 100%, and for Slow Fading Standard Deviation, the default value is 7 dB.
To define clutter types for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Clutter Types and choose New. The Create New - Clutter Type dialog box opens.
54
2 3 4
In the Name box, type a name for the clutter type. In the Comments box, type a description for the clutter type. To define the orthogonality factor for the clutter type, type a value in the Downlink Orthogonality box. A value of 100% represents perfect orthogonality. To define the standard deviation for slow fading of the clutter type, type a value in the Slow Fading Standard Deviation box. This value is used to model the shadowing from obstacles that cannot be handled by a propagation model. Slightly higher values (approximately 8 dB) may be appropriate for high density urban areas, lower values (approximately 6.5 dB) for open areas.
55
Enable any of the following check boxes to choose environments for the clutter type and define the fast fading margin and penetration loss specific to the environment:
Enable Outdoorenables the outdoor environment for the clutter type Enable Vehicularenables the vehicular environment for the clutter type Enable Indoorenables the indoor environment for the clutter type Enable Deep Indoorenables the deep indoor environment for the clutter type
For more information on the settings associated with these environments, press the F1 key. 7 If you enabled the Vehicular environment, type a value in the Vehicular Speed box or accept the default. The speed is used in conjunction with the sector settings to determine whether a subscriber will be served by a sector. Subscribers that exceed the maximum speed for a sector will not be served by the sector. For more information, see Quality settings for W-CDMA on page 98 8 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing clutter type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the clutter type and choosing Edit.
To assign clutter classes to clutter types for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Clutter Types and choose Assign Clutter Classes. The Assign Clutter Classes dialog box opens.
56
Choose a clutter type from the Clutter Types list, and then choose one or more clutter classes from the Unassigned Clutter Classes list, and click Assign. The clutter classes in the Unassigned Clutter Classes list are defined in the clutter grid file for the project. For more information, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. The W-CDMA Simulation tool will use default settings for any unassigned clutter classes.
Click Save and then click Close.
To unassign clutter classes from a clutter type, choose a clutter class under a clutter type node in the Clutter Types section, and click Unassign. You can create a new clutter type by clicking New in the Assign Clutter Classes dialog box. To modify the properties of the new clutter type, click Edit. The Edit - Clutter Type dialog box opens.
57
Defining W-CDMA bearers

Bearers represent the traffic channels in terms of their service data rate and dedicated bearers in terms of their channel data rate. Bearers are displayed under the Bearers node in the Subscriber Manager and are assigned to subscriber equipment types. A default set of bearers is supplied with Mentum Planet, but you can define additional bearers or modify any of the default bearers. The following sections provide information about W-CDMA bearers. For information about cdma2000 bearers, see Defining cdma2000 bearers on page 301.
W-CDMA bearers
W-CDMA bearers are configured with

direction (uplink or downlink) service and channel data rates signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) to frame erasure rate (FER) mapping table downlink channel elements downlink DPCH power offsets
Bearer Eb/No to FER
The Eb/No to FER mapping is defined using a curve that can be created or edited using the Curve Editor. When you generate analysis layers, this mapping is used to calculate the Downlink Service FER value from the Downlink - Eb/No analysis layer. For information on the Downlink - Eb/No layer and the Downlink Service FER value, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159. To ensure that borderline Eb/No values are accounted for, the points you define for the curve should exceed the Eb/No values that you are interested in analyzing. If values generated by the analysis exceed your defined range, they will be represented by the last defined point.
58
The Curve Editor interpolates values linearly, based on Eb/No and FER pairs. The FER values are calculated as follows:
For Eb/No values greater than the highest point in the curve, the FER at that highest point is assigned. In the example in Figure 4.3, for Eb/No values over 8.7 dB, a FER value of 0% is assigned. For Eb/No values defined in the range of the curve, the Curve Editor linearly assigns a FER value based on the two nearest values, above and below. In the example in Figure 4.3, an Eb/No value of 4.3 dB is assigned a FER value of 12%. For Eb/No values less than the lowest point in the curve, the FER at the lowest point is assigned. In the example in Figure 4.3, for Eb/No values less than -2.3 dB, a FER value of 90% is assigned.
Figure 4.3 Curve Editor displaying the linear relationship between Eb/No and FER
59
To define W-CDMA bearers

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Bearers and choose New. In the New Bearer dialog box, from the Select the Type of Bearer Required list, choose W-CDMA Bearer, and click OK. The Create New - W-CDMA Bearer dialog box opens.
3 4 5
In the Name box, type a name for the bearer. In the Comment box, type a description for the bearer. In the Direction section, choose one of the following options to define the direction of the bearer:

Uplink Downlink
Typically, you would create a set of two bearers: one for the uplink and one for the downlink. 6 7 In the Service Data Rate box, type the service data rate for the traffic channels. In the Channel Data Rate box, type the channel data rate for the dedicated bearers.
60
From the Technology Type list, choose the type of technology for the bearer. The only technology available for the bearer is W-CDMA. In the S/N to Error Rate Mapping section, do one of the following:
Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to FER curve, and click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to FER curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
10 If you are defining a downlink bearer, in the Number of Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer. This number represents the number of channel elements required for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network). The number of channel elements that each sector can support is defined on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box. 11 If you are defining a downlink bearer, type values for the following:
Maximum DPCH Power Offsetthe maximum power correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Minimum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates. Minimum DPCH Power Offsetthe minimum power correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Maximum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates.
12 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing bearer from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the bearer and choosing Edit.
61
To define HSDPA bearers

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Bearers and choose New. In the New Bearer dialog box, from the Select the Type of Bearer Required list, choose HSDPA Bearer, and click OK. The Create New - HSDPA Bearer dialog box opens.
3 4 5 6 7
In the Name box, type a name for the bearer. In the Comment box, type a description for the bearer. The direction of the HSDPA bearer is uplink. In the Service Data Rate box, choose the service data rate for the traffic channels. In the Channel Data Rate box, type the channel data rate for the dedicated bearers. From the Technology Type list, choose the type of technology for the bearer. The only technology available for the bearer is W-CDMA.
62
In the S/N to Error Rate Mapping section, do one of the following:
In the Number of Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer. This number represents the number of channel elements required for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network). The number of channel elements that each sector can support is defined on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box.
10 Click OK.
Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA

The Subscriber Manager enables you to group the mobile equipment types in your network into subscriber equipment types. When you create a subscriber equipment type, you can define subscriber equipment technology band types that contain information about the performance of subscriber equipment for a particular technology and band. For example, you could create a subscriber equipment type that contains five subscriber equipment technology bands that represent the capabilities of the mobile on each of the bands. For more information on creating technology bands, see To create a new W-CDMA technology band on page 32.
To define subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Subscriber Equipment Types and choose New. The Create New - Mobile Equipment dialog box opens. 2 3 4 In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber equipment type. In the Comments box, type a description for the subscriber equipment type. Click OK.
63
To define subscriber equipment bands for W-CDMA

When you define subscriber equipment bands, you define the characteristics of the band, and then assign bearers to it. If you assign multiple bearers to the equipment band, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, the most efficient bearer that meets the quality requirement of the service for the subscriber type will be used for each individual subscriber in the analysis. The most efficient bearer is the bearer with the highest data rate. 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, expand Subscriber Equipment Types, expand an equipment type, right-click Technology Bands and choose New. The Create New - Mobile Equipment Technology Band dialog box opens.
64
To define the transmit power, type a value in the following boxes:
Maximum Transmit Powerthe maximum transmit power at the power amplifier output Minimum Transmit Powerthe minimum transmit power at the power amplifier output
In the Maximum Active Servers box, type a value to define the maximum number of handover servers in the active set (i.e., the number of rake fingers) supported by the equipment type. In the Antenna Gain box, type a value to define the antenna gain. In the Receiver Noise Figure box, type a value to define the noise figure of the receiver. In the Body Loss (Voice) box, type a value to define the body loss for voice traffic. In the Body Loss (Data) box, type a value to define type a value to define the body loss for data traffic. From the Technology Band list, choose the band for this equipment type. Technology bands are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. For more information, see Defining W-CDMA network settings on page 33.
4 5 6 7 8
If the mobile equipment type supports HSDPA, enable the HSDPA Active check box and choose a terminal category from the HSDPA Terminal Category list. To assign a bearer to the equipment type, choose a bearer from the Available list and click Add. The bearer is added to the Assigned list. To unassign a bearer from the equipment type, choose a bearer from the Selected list and click Remove. The bearer is added to the Available list.
10 In the Bearers section, do either of the following:
11 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber equipment technology band from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the subscriber equipment technology band and choosing Edit.
65
Defining session types for W-CDMA

Session types are used to characterize the size and distribution of sessions in your network. A session defines the characteristics of a subscribers use of a packet-switched service (for example, e-mail or Web browsing), and consists of one or more packet arrivals. Once you create session types, they can be assigned to packet-switched services. For more information on packetswitched services, see Defining service types for W-CDMA on page 70. For packet-switched traffic, the distribution of packets during simulation impacts how queued traffic is modeled. Packet-switched sessions use the traffic model recommended by the European Telecommunications Standard Institute (ETSI) to model packet traffic. This model is described in UMTS 30.03 version 3.2.0, Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS): Selection procedure for the choice of radio transmission technologies of the UMTS, which is available at http:// www.etsi.org. Figure 4.4 shows how a packet call is modeled using this traffic model. The horizontal axis represents the time elapsed, and the vertical lines represent individual packets. The arrival of several packets in a burst is called a packet call, and the arrival of these packet calls is called a packet service (or packetswitched) session. The reading time is the amount of time that a user spends studying data before making another packet call.
Packet timeout Individual packet First packet arrives at base station buffer Interarrival time between packets Reading time Last packet arrives at base station buffer
Packet calls
Time
Packet service session Figure 4.4 Packet service session
66
When you define session types using the Session Type dialog box, the following values in the dialog box refer to the ETSI model:

Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc) Mean Reading Time (Dpc) Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd) Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd) Packet Timeout
Values used in the ETSI model are displayed in brackets following the label. For example, Mean No. of Packet Calls refers to the Npc value in the ETSI model.
To define session types for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Session Types and choose New. The Create New - Session Type dialog box opens.
2 3
In the Name box, type a name for the session type. In the Comments box, type a description for the session type.
67
To define the packet settings, type a value in any of the following boxes (see Figure 4.4 for details about how these values are modeled):
Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc)the mean number of packet calls in a packet service session Mean Reading Time (Dpc)the mean reading time between packet calls in seconds. Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd)the mean number of packets in a packet call Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd)the mean interarrival time between packets Packet Timeoutthe time between the last packet in a packet call and the designated end of the packet call (i.e., before the reading time starts)
In the Packet Size Distribution section, choose an option to model the distribution of packet sizes:

Paretouses a Pareto distribution model Poissonuses a Poisson distribution model
To define the packet size based on distribution type, do one of the following:
If you chose Pareto as the distribution type, type a value in all of the following boxes to define the packet size: Packet Size Alphathe Alpha packet distribution parameter for Pareto distributions Minimum Packet Sizethe minimum size of a packet Maximum Packet Sizethe maximum size of a packet If you chose Poisson as the distribution type, type a value in the Mean Packet Size box to define the mean packet size.

Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing session type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the session type and choosing
Edit.
68
Defining quality types for W-CDMA

When you define the usages for subscriber types, you can specify the quality for each usage. The quality type defines two levels of throughput in each direction for the service assigned to the usage. Each quality type contains settings for the guaranteed and maximum data rates of the service. When you generate an analysis, if the guaranteed data rate is not available at a location, then the service is not available at that location.
To define quality types for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Qualities and choose New. The Create New - Quality dialog box opens.
2 3 4
In the Name box, type a name for the quality type. In the Comment box, type a description for the quality type. To define the uplink data rate, type values in any of the following boxes:
Guaranteed Uplink Data Ratethe guaranteed uplink data rate required by the quality type Maximum Uplink Data Ratethe maximum uplink data rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate.
The guaranteed uplink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the uplink. If a bearer with a rate that falls
69
between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served. 5 To define the downlink data rate, type values in any of the following boxes:
Guaranteed Downlink Data Ratethe guaranteed downlink data rate required by the quality type Maximum Downlink Data Ratethe maximum downlink data rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Downlink Data Rate.
The guaranteed downlink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the downlink. If a bearer with a rate that falls between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served. 6 7 In the Traffic QoS Class section, choose the traffic class that applies to the quality and its associated data rates. Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing quality type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the quality type and choosing Edit.
Defining service types for W-CDMA

Service types are the applications that your subscribers are using. You can define the following types of services:
Circuit-switched (such as voice)these types of services are delay intolerant, and require dedicated bearers Packet-switched (such as Web browsing)these types of services have various levels of delay tolerance, from delay intolerant to delay tolerant. The delay-intolerant services require dedicated bearers, while the delay-tolerant services will use shared bearers if available in the technology.
70
To define circuit-switched service types for W-CDMA

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Services and choose New. In the New Service dialog box, choose Circuit Switched Service from the list, and click OK. The Create New - Circuit Switched Service dialog box opens.
3 4 5
In the Name box, type a name for the circuit-switched service type. In the Comments box, type a description for the circuit-switched service type. In the Erlangs per Subscriber box, type a value to define the number of Erlangs generated by each subscriber type associated with this service. During a Monte Carlo analysis, when subscribers are distributed using the traffic map associated with the subscriber type, this value determines the number of subscribers that are distributed per service. For example, a value of 1 in this box results in one subscriber distributed for each subscriber in the traffic map. A value of 0.5 results in half the number of subscribers that are in the traffic map being distributed.
71
To define the percentage of time that traffic is transmitted in a direction, type values in either of the following boxes:
Uplink Activity Factorthe percentage of time uplink traffic is actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF. Downlink Activity Factorthe percentage of time downlink traffic is actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF.
To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes:
Uplink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit control overhead for uplink traffic Downlink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit control overhead for downlink traffic
The Uplink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically based on the Uplink Activity Factor and Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead. The Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead is calculated as a percentage of the Uplink Activity Factor and then added to the Uplink Activity Factor. For example, if the Uplink Activity Factor is 50% and the Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead value is 2%, then the Uplink Channel Activity Factor is 51 = (50+50*0.02). The Downlink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically in the same way, based on the Downlink Activity Factor and Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead. 8 To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box. Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited. You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority overrides the service priority. 9 To define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered, type a value in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box. The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a Monte Carlo or rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for
72
the Downlink - Best Server, Uplink - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers. For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less downlink service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector downlink service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including CPICH - Ec/Io. 10 To define the maximum FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:
Required Uplink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the uplink Required Downlink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the downlink
11 To define the number of circuits from one server that are available to the subscriber type associated with this service type, type a value in the Number of Downlink Connections box. 12 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing circuit-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the circuit-switched service type and choosing Edit.
To define packet-switched service types for W-CDMA

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Services and choose New. In the New Service dialog box, choose Packet Switched Service from the list, and click OK. The Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box opens.
73
3 4 5
In the Name box, type a name for the packet-switched service type. In the Comments box, type a description for the packet-switched service type. In the Input Load section, do one of the following to define the mean input load:
To define the mean input load in kilobits per hour, choose the Kilobits/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section. To define the mean input load in sessions per hour, choose the Sessions/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section. To define the mean input load in Erlangs per subscriber, choose the Erlangs/Subscriber option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.
These values represent the average input load over a sustained period, not a peak or instantaneous load.
74
From the Session Type list, choose a session type for this service type. For more information on session types, see Defining session types for W-CDMA on page 66.
In the Symmetry section, do one of the following to define the primary and non-primary traffic on the channel:
Choose the Uplink option as the primary direction of traffic, and then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and nonprimary directions. Choose the Downlink option as the primary direction of traffic, and then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and nonprimary directions.
The asymmetry factor defines the relationship between primary traffic and non-primary traffic. For example, choosing Downlink as the primary direction and defining an asymmetry factor of 0.1 would set the uplink traffic to be 0.1 times that of the primary downlink direction. 8 To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes:
Uplink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit and control overhead for uplink traffic Downlink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit and control overhead for downlink traffic
To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box. Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited. You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, and enable the Use Priority check box for the subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority will override the service priority for that subscriber type.
10 To define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered, type a value in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box. The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a Monte Carlo or rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for
75
the Downlink - Best Server, Uplink - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers. For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less downlink service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector downlink service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including CPICH - Ec/Io. 11 To define the FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:
Required Uplink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the uplink Required Downlink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the downlink
12 To define the number of circuits from one server that are available to the subscriber type associated with this service type, type a value in the Number of Downlink Connections box. 13 If you want to view information about the uplink and downlink channel activity factors, click Illustration. The Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box opens. This dialog box enables you to choose bearers that could potentially be assigned to this service. When you choose a bearer, the fields update to show the values that would be used in an analysis for this service type if the bearers were to be used for this service.
76
14 From the Uplink Bearer and Downlink Bearer lists, choose the bearers for which you want to view statistics. The other fields in the dialog box automatically display values depending on uplink bearer and downlink bearer that you choose. The bearers that you choose in the entries in the Illustration window are for illustration purposes only. They do not affect the analysis. 15 Click Close to close the Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box. 16 Click OK to close the Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box.
You can modify the properties of an existing packet-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the packet-switched service type and choosing Edit.
Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA

Subscriber types are defined by:

the subscriber equipment used the traffic map on which the subscriber type is based the different kinds of services that a subscriber uses and the quality that applies to each service the environments where the usage takes place
The information contained in a subscriber type is used when you generate Monte Carlo simulations or analysis layers.
The total number of subscribers is defined by the traffic map and scaling, not by the number of usage types or environments. The total number of subscribers for each subscriber type is spread across the usage types and environments defined for the subscriber type. Example
You might create a subscriber type called Advanced Business that represents subscribers who use mobiles as their primary business tools. The subscribers represented by this type use their mobiles for everything from downloading email to placing cellular calls. After you create the usage types, you can assign a ratio to determine the proportion of the traffic that is in each of the
77
available environments. In addition, you can set the service type and quality type for each usage type. For example, if you set up four usage types for the Advanced Business subscriber type, you could assign the weightings, service types, and quality types shown in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 Example usage type settings Usage type 1 2 3 4 Indoor 5 1 2 2 Deep Indoor 5 2 2 2 Outdoor 5 1 4 4 Vehicular 5 0 0 0 Service type Voice Video WWW Email Quality type 12.2kbps_Conversational 64kbps_Streaming 144kbps_Interactive 12.2kbps_Background
In this example, the total weighting value calculated across all usage types is 40. Therefore, the Advanced Business subscriber type uses Usage 1 50% of the time, Usage 2 10% of the time, Usage 3 20% of the time, and Usage 4 20% of the time.
To create a subscriber type for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Subscriber Types and choose New. The Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box opens.
78
2 3 4
In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber type. In the Comment box, type a description for the subscriber type. In the Traffic Scaling box, type a value to define how much traffic should be scaled up or down from the traffic map associated with the subscriber type. Values greater than 1.0 indicate a greater number of subscribers of this type than the value indicated in the associated traffic map.
If you want to define the priority in which the subscriber is served or provided with the best level of service when network capacity is limited, enable the Use Priority check box and type a priority value in the Priority box. Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority. If you enable this check box, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, this subscriber is served according to the priority that you define. If you do not enable this check box, the traffic is allocated according to the priority set
79
for the services, which is defined in the Priority box for both circuitswitched and packet-switched services. 6 In the Variance section, choose one of the following options to define the variability of the number of subscribers generated by different Monte Carlo runs:
Meanthe same mean number of subscribers will be used on every run. Poissona Poisson distribution of subscribers will be used. User Definedchoose this option to define a custom Poisson distribution with modified variability. A value of 1 is a standard Poisson distribution.
From the Subscriber Equipment Types list, choose the equipment type of the subscriber type. For more information on creating a subscriber equipment type, see Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA on page 63.
From the Traffic list, choose the traffic map that you want to associate with the subscriber. You can only choose traffic maps in subscribers/km2 or Erlangs/km2. Traffic maps in Kbps/km2 are not valid. The type of traffic map that you choose affects the service types that are available in the usage types section. Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For information on generating and adding a traffic map to the project, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Define usage types as described in To define usage types for W-CDMA on page 81.
10 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the subscriber type and choosing Edit.
80
You can create traffic maps using the information defined in the Subscriber Manager. The traffic maps combine the voice and packet usages for all defined subscriber types. For more information, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To define usage types for W-CDMA

1 2 3 In the Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box, click New. A new row is created in the table. Click in the Short Name box and type a description for the usage type. The description can be up to eight characters in length. To define the weighting ratio for each clutter type, click in each of the following boxes and type values or accept the defaults:
Indoor Weightingthe weighting for indoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type Deep Indoor Weightingthe weighting for deep indoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type Outdoor Weightingthe weighting for outdoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type Vehicular Weightingthe weighting for vehicular usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type
Values must be positive integers. For more information, press the F1 key or see Example on page 77 for information about how the weighting numbers are used. 4 Click in the Service box and choose a service type for the usage type from the list. Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For more information about circuitswitched and packet-switched service types, see Defining service types for W-CDMA on page 70.
81
Click in the Quality box and choose a quality type for the usage type from the list. For more information about quality types, see Defining quality types for W-CDMA on page 69.
6 7
To add another usage type, repeat Step 1 to Step 5. Click OK.
82
5.
Chapter 5: Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites
Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites

This chapter describes how to configure and place a W-CDMA site, define sector settings specific to W-CDMA, and globally edit W-CDMA sector properties. Once you have defined the W-CDMA network configuration, you can configure and place the sites in your network.
Understanding W-CDMA sites and sectors Considerations for multi-band networks Workflow for configuring and placing W-CDMA sites Creating W-CDMA sites Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors Globally editing base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors Defining W-CDMA sector settings Editing sites and sectors Deleting sites Viewing W-CDMA carrier assignment and interference information
83
Understanding W-CDMA sites and sectors

When you define the sectors in a site, you need to define the following settings specific to W-CDMA technologies:
Carrier assignments (see To assign carriers to sectors on page 99) Hardware settings (see Hardware settings for W-CDMA on page 97) Resource settings (see Resource settings for W-CDMA on page 97) Implementation settings (see Implementation settings for W-CDMA on page 97) Quality settings (see Quality settings for W-CDMA on page 98) Power settings (see Power settings for W-CDMA on page 99)
For more information about general site and sector properties, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. For information about TDMA/FDMA site and sector properties, see Chapter 5, Configuring and Placing TDMA/FDMA Sites, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.
Considerations for multi-band networks

If your network is configured with multiple bands (see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA on page 30), and you want to generate different predictions for carriers on two different bands, you need to do the following:
configure two different sectors, with same location and azimuth, but different antenna patterns and propagation models (see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide) assign a carrier from one band to one sector and the second band to the second sector (see To assign carriers to sectors on page 99) when you generate the analysis, include both sectors
In the area where both sectors can serve subscribers, the subscribers that are served by each sector will depend on the carrier preference weightings, and
84
Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites CDMA User Guide
the PA power and noise limits. For more information, see To define carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 40. This gives you the flexibility of simulating different scenarios, for example:
If all carriers have the same preference weightings, subscribers will be allocated equally between the two sectors, except for an area at the fringe where only the stronger sector can work, until the PA power and noise limits are reached. At this point, subscribers will be allocated to the remaining carrier or carriers. Carriers on the weaker sector could be given a zero preference weighting, so that only the stronger sector will be allocated subscribers until the PA power and noise limits are reached. Any additional subscribers would then be allocated to the weaker sector. In this case, more users in the fringe area could be blocked.
Workflow for configuring and placing W-CDMA sites

Step 1 Step 2
Define the network configuration. See Chapter 3: Defining a WCDMA Network Configuration on page 27. Configure and place W-CDMA sites. See Creating W-CDMA sites on page 85.
Creating W-CDMA sites

This section describes how to configure and place W-CDMA sites using a new site configuration. You can also create and place sites based on an existing site configuration. For more information, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To create a W-CDMA site

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose New. In the Site Configuration dialog box, choose the Create a New Configuration option, and click Continue. The Site Properties dialog box opens. 3 Click the Site tab, and type a prefix for the site in the Site ID box.
85
4 5
If you want to add additional site information, type additional identifiers or descriptions in the Site UID, Site Name, or Site Name 2 boxes. Define the remaining site settings. General site settings are described in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
6 7
Click the Sectors tab, and then click in the Technology field and choose W-CDMA from the list. Define the remaining general sector settings. General sector settings are described in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. If you want to calculate the radiated power for a sector, you must place the site first. Complete this procedure and then see Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors on page 87.
On the Sectors tab, click Add Sector to add as many sectors to the site as required. If you define W-CDMA sector settings before adding other sectors, the settings that you used for the last sector will be automatically applied to the new sectors that you add.
Click the Site tab and do either of the following to place the site:

Click in the Map window to add a site at that location. Enable the Manual Entry check box, choose the coordinate units from the Units list, type the coordinates in the X/Long and Y/Lat boxes, and click Place Site.
The created site is displayed in the Map window and a site with the name <Site>_1 is added to the Sites category in the Project Explorer. 10 If you want to use the configuration again, choose File Save Configuration As, type a name for the site configuration (.dsc) file in the File Name box, and click Save. Site configuration files are stored in the Config\GSM subfolder of the project folder. For more information on using an existing site configuration, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. When you save the .dsc file, the settings for individual sectors (defined in the Sector Settings dialog box) are not saved.
86
11 When you have finished placing sites, click Close.

You can edit the properties of a single site after you place it. In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site and choose Edit. In the Site Properties dialog box, edit the properties, click Apply, and then click Close.
Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors

The Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to calculate the radiated power for a sector based on the power output of the sectors power amplifier (PA) plus or minus system gains and losses. You can also use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box to define settings for specific sites, sector groups, or flags. For more information, see Globally editing base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors on page 93. The value for ERP or EIRP on the Sectors tab of the Site Properties dialog box is the same as the value for CPICH EIRP in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box. The ERP or EIRP values on the Sectors tab are read-only and are calculated as shown in Equation 5.1.
CPICH EIRP = First carrier CPICH power + Antenna boresight gain + Downlink losses and gains Equation 5.1 CPICH EIRP calculation
When you generate predictions, the power value used is the value in the ERP or EIRP box for the sector.
Losses and gains

The Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to define specific losses and gains for the sector and updates the total power for the sector using these values. For both the downlink and uplink, a default antenna gain value is added based on the antenna type assigned to the sector. You cannot modify this value. All new sites are also given a default Feeder value on both the downlink and the uplink to account for cable and connector losses. A default BTS Noise Figure is assigned to the uplink to account for base station receiver noise gain. You should modify the BTS Noise Figure according to the hardware manufacturer's specifications. You can add additional losses and gains as required. Because the Friis noise formula (see Equation 5.2) is used to calculate the Uplink Noise Figure, the
87
order of the items on the Base Station Losses & Gains tab in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box must match the hierarchy of the sector hardware (see Figure 5.1 and Figure 5.2). By default, the BTS Noise Figure is always the last item in the list.
Antenna Antenna Feeder Tail Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA) Feeder Feeder Tail BTS Amplifier Figure 5.1 Example sector hardware configuration
The hardware configuration shown in Figure 5.1 would be represented in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box in Mentum Planet as shown in Figure 5.2.
Figure 5.2 Example Uplink Losses & Gains settings
The Uplink Composite Noise Figure (Composite System Noise Figure (NFs)) is calculated as follows, using the Friis noise formula:
Equation 5.2 Uplink Composite Noise Figure calculation
88
f4 1 fn 1 f2 1 f3 1 f s = f 1 + ------------ + ------------- + -------------------- + + --------------------------------------------G1 G1 G2 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G( n 1 ) Where:
All terms are in their linear form.

fs
is the Composite System Noise Factor (linear ratio). is the Composite System Noise Figure.
NF s = 10 log 10 f s f1 fn
is the Noise Factor of individual elements (linear ratio). is the numerical gain of individual elements (linear ratio).
G1 Gn
Note that a loss (in dB) is taken as negative gain:

G = 10 f = 10
G ( db ) --------------10
NF ( db ) ------------------10
So, for passive elements:

1 f = --G
Some subscriber-related settings must be configured in the Subscriber Manager. For more information see Defining subscriber equipment types for W-CDMA on page 63.
If you are using an Excel spreadsheet to import base station link budget settings, you must use the Index column to specify the order of the items in the Losses and Gains list. For more information, see Importing and exporting project data in Chapter 13, Working With Network and Project Data, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To calculate base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site for which you want to modify the base station link budget settings, and choose Edit. In the Site Properties dialog box, click the Sectors tab.
89
Click in the ERP or EIRP box of the sector you want to modify, and then click the Base Station Link Budget (...) button. The Base Station Link Budget dialog box opens with the Uplink tab selected.
Do one of the following to choose the carrier(s) to which you want to apply the settings:
If you want to apply the settings to a single carrier, choose a carrier from the Carrier list. If you want to apply the settings to all carriers on the sector, enable the Apply the Same Settings to All Carriers check box.
On the Base Station Losses & Gains tab, do the following to modify the Feeder settings or accept the defaults:

From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain. If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal noise associated with the gain.
To modify the BTS Noise Figure value, type a value in the Noise Figure box.
90
Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the uplink:

Click Add. From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain. If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal noise associated with the gain. If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains.
To remove an item from the Uplink tab, choose the item and click Remove. The Uplink Composite Noise Figure box at the bottom of the Base Station Link Budget dialog box updates to reflect the loss, gain, and noise figure values.
Click the Downlink tab at the bottom of the Base Station Losses & Gains tab and do the following to modify the Feeder value for the downlink, or accept the default:

From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.
10 Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the downlink:

Click Add. From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain. If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains.
11 To remove an item from the Downlink tab, choose the item and click Remove. The Total EIRP and CPICH EIRP boxes update to reflect the loss or gain values.
91
12 To modify power information for the sector, type values in any of the following boxes:
PA Powerthe power at the power amplifier. When you change this value, the CPICH % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to CPICH Power. The Total EIRP box updates automatically to reflect the new Total EIRP for the power amplifier. You can also modify the PA power on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box. See To define hardware settings on page 99. The two boxes are interdependent. Changes in one location are reflected in the other location. CPICH Powerthe power of the CPICH channel. When you change this value, the CPICH % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to CPICH Power and the CPICH EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 5.1 on page 87. CPICH % of PA Powerthe CPICH power as a percentage of PA power. When you change this value, the CPICH Power updates automatically to reflect the new ratio and the CPICH EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 5.1 on page 87. Total EIRPthe total PA power for the sector (calculated as PA Power + Downlink losses and gains). When you change this value, the PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the change and the CPICH % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to CPICH Power.
13 Click OK. The ERP or EIRP value is updated for the sector.
92
Globally editing base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors
The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool enables you to define base station link budget settings and apply them to specific sites, sector groups, or flags. You can add, remove, update, and reorder base station link budget settings. For example, you could use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool with a newly created project to define a common set of losses and gains according to the hardware used most often in your network. Using these common settings as a base, you could then define individual or unique sector settings as required. Before using the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool, you should be familiar with the Base Station Link Budget tool. For more information, see Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors on page 87.
The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box is not technology-dependent and will update all of the sectors you choose with the same settings. Depending on the options you choose, existing settings may be lost.
To globally edit base station link budget settings for W-CDMA sectors
1 In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:
To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget. To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites, right-click and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget. To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the group and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget. To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags, and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget.
93
The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box opens, displaying the Uplink/Reverse settings for the first sector in the group, the first sector with the specified flag condition, or the first sector chosen in the Project Explorer.
From the Action list, choose the type of action that you want to perform:
Insertadds additional losses/gains in the order specified, but leaves existing settings intact. Removeremoves any losses/gains that match the specified name/order. You can choose to exclude individual losses/gains. Replacereplaces the values for the specified losses/gains. Updateupdates values for losses/gains that match the specified name/order. You can choose to update the name, the associated value, or both.
You can only choose one action each time you apply changes to the base station link budget settings. If you want to perform multiple actions, use the Apply button each time you define settings for a specific action. If you choose another action before applying the new settings, the changes for the current action will be lost.
94
If you chose either Remove or Update in Step 2, choose one of the following filters from the Action Options list:
By Name & Orderremoves/updates only existing losses/ gains that match both the name and specified order. By Name Onlyremoves/updates only existing losses/gains with the same name. By Order Onlyremoves/updates only existing losses/gains that match the specified order. If you chose Insert, Remove, or Replace in Step 2, and you want to add an item, click Add, then from the Type list choose Loss or Gain, type a name in the Name box and a value in the Value box. If you are adding a gain, a type a value in the Noise Figure box. You can add additional losses/gains as required. If you chose Remove in Step 2, enable the check box beside each item that you want to remove. If you chose Replace in Step 2, modify the values for the losses/ gains that you want to replace as required If you chose Update in Step 2, enable the check box and modify the values for each field that you want to update.
On the Uplink/Reverse tab, do any of the following.
The options that are available will depend on the action that you chose in Step 2. 5 6 7 If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains. If required, click the Downlink/Reverse tab and repeat Step 2 to Step 5. Do one of the following:
To apply your changes and exit from the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box, click OK. To apply your changes and choose a new action from the Action list, click Apply and repeat Step 3 to Step 7.
95
Defining W-CDMA sector settings

For each site in your project, you need to define W-CDMA sector settings. The first step in defining sector settings is assigning the carriers to the sector. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA on page 30. After you assign carriers to sectors, you can define sector settings for each carrier as described in the following sections. The sector settings that are available will be slightly different, depending on the type of carrier.
Figure 5.3 W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box showing the Hardware panel
96
Hardware settings for W-CDMA

Hardware settings enable you to define the equipment for the sector, including channel elements, noise figure, throughput, and link loss. A channel element is a logical controller on a channel element card or server that controls and routes data for services in the W-CDMA network. The number of channel elements required per service depends upon the amount of throughput the service needs and the vendors equipment. Services that require higher throughput may need more channel elements. As part of the hardware settings, you can also activate a specific technology for a sector and, in this way, conserve network resources by offering only those services needed. For example, if a sector is serving a sparsely populated area you can activate only R99 even though the carrier is both R99 and HSDPA. For more information, see To define hardware settings on page 99.
Resource settings for W-CDMA

Resource settings enable you to define how best to allocate sector resources so that the maximum number of subscribers are served. Mentum Planet considers the traffic channel limitations as well as the uplink and downlink elements defined per carrier in the network analysis. For more information, see To define sector resources on page 101.
Implementation settings for W-CDMA

Implementation settings enable you to define noise rise and traffic power settings for rapid planning.
Rapid planning settings
Rapid planning provides a quick method of generating analysis layers, as an alternative to the Monte Carlo simulation. It also provides the ability to create layers for a given network or sector loads. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for WCDMA on page 131. The rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel are used when layers are generated using the rapid planning option. Unlike the Monte Carlo method, which obtains many values required to compute analysis layers from the operating points file, the Rapid Planning method does not generate an operating points file. Instead, the Rapid Planning method derives most of the values required to compute analysis layers from the Powers panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. The Current Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power values are the two exceptions; to determine these values, the Uplink Noise Rise, DPCH Total
97
Traffic Power, and, for HSDPA, HS-DSCH Power values should be manually defined for the sector.
If you do not define these values manually, you can enable the Override All Cell Loads option on the System panel of the Analysis Settings dialog box, and define values for DPCH Available Traffic Power, HSDSCH Available Traffic Power, HS-DSCH Activity Factor, and Uplink Load. For more information, see To define rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA on page 138.
The Uplink Noise Rise value is used to calculate equivalent Current Total Receive Power, which is required to compute all uplink analysis layers. The DPCH Total Traffic Power and, for HSDPA carriers, the HS-DSCH Power are used to calculate Total Traffic Transmit Power, which is used to compute most CPICH, downlink, and HSDPA analysis layers. The Current Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power are also used to compute the Other - Path Balance layer. For more information, see To define implementation settings on page 103.
Quality settings for W-CDMA

Quality settings enable you to define settings related to the quality of service for the sector, including, among others, the maximum number of subscribers, maximum speed of vehicular subscribers, and the handover margin. The maximum speed assigned to the sector is used to determine whether subscribers in a vehicular environment will be served by the sector. Vehicular subscribers have an expected speed associated with them depending on the clutter class in which the service is being provided. This speed is defined when you create clutter types (see Defining clutter types for W-CDMA on page 52). Subscribers in all environments other than vehicular are assigned a fixed speed of 3 km/h. If the vehicular subscriber speed exceeds the maximum, then the subscriber is not served by the sector. This enables you to ensure that fast-moving subscribers are not served by certain sectors (for example, microcells). The maximum speed is used when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, During the random pattern generation phase, if a randomly generated subscriber has an associated speed that exceeds the sector limit, the subscriber will not be served by the sector. For more information, see To define quality settings on page 104.
98
Power settings for W-CDMA

Power settings enable you to define the power requirements for the sector, including the limits for CPICH power, control channels, and traffic power. For more information, see To define W-CDMA power settings on page 105.
To assign carriers to sectors

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, double-click a site. The Site Properties dialog box opens. In the Site Properties dialog box, on the Sectors tab, click W-CDMA Settings. The Carriers panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box opens by default. 3 In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check boxes next to the carrier IDs that you want to assign to the sector. Only the technology bands that are assigned the W-CDMA technology are displayed in this section. When you enable a carrier, the carrier is added to the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box tree view. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for W-CDMA on page 30. 4 Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
To define hardware settings

1 2 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Hardware. On the Hardware panel, in the Technology section, activate a technology for the sector by choosing one of the available technologies from the Activated Technology list. In the HSDPA section, enable the 16-QAM supported if you want the sector to support 16-QAM modulation.
99
In the Throughput Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:
Maximum Pooled Downlink Throughputthe maximum throughput for all traffic on the same carrier of the site Maximum Packet Throughputthe proportion of the maximum throughput that is allowed for packet sessions Maximum Circuit Throughputthe proportion of the maximum throughput that is allowed for circuit sessions
The Throughput Per Carrier settings apply only to Rel 99 Subscribers. HSDPA throughput control is not explicitly enforced. The sum of the maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput can exceed 100%, but within the analysis, the total of maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput cannot total more than 100%. Throughput for an analysis is calculated using the number of subscribers carried multiplied by the rate used for each subscriber modified by the activity factor (which is dependent on the bearer used for the service). 5 In the Base Station Link Budget section, if you want to modify any of the values, click Base Station Link Budget. The values shown in this section are read-only, and are calculated using the Base Station Link Budget tool. For information on using the Base Station Link Budget tool, see Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors on page 87. 6 Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
If you open the Base Station Link Budget tool from the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, the carrier displayed is the carrier from which the tool was launched. If the carrier is an EV-DO carrier, the Pilot Power column and the Percentage column are read only columns.
100
To define sector resources

1 2 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Resources. On the Resources panel, in the Traffic Channel Codes section, type a value in the Maximum Number of Codes box to define the maximum number of codes that can be allocated to traffic channels. The Maximum Number of Codes value applies only to Rel 99 subscribers. For Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers, this value should be set to reflect the actual number of Traffic Channel Codes used or reserved only by Rel 99 subscribers. HSDPA Traffic Channel Codes are not explicitly accounted for. It is implicitly assumed that HSDPA will use the leftover Traffic Channel Codes in the base station that are not assigned to Rel 99 subscribers. 3 For HSDPA carriers or HSDPA & Rel 99 carriers, from the HS-DSCH Codes list, choose the number of HS-DSCH traffic codes to use in the network analysis. In the Uplink Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:
Total Available For The Sitedisplays the number of channel elements available. Total Dedicated For The Sectordisplays the number of channel elements dedicated for the sector. Primary (Per Sector)the number of channel elements assigned to this carrier on this sector for primary traffic. Primary traffic consists of the subscribers with this sector designated as the best server. Primary Pooled (Per Site)the number of channel elements pooled for this carrier for all sectors on this site for primary traffic. You can combine primary and pooled channel elements, or use only one or the other. If you want to specify that all of the channel elements on the site are pooled, type 0 in the Primary (Per Sector) box and type the total number of channel elements in the Primary Pooled (Per Site) box. When you generate an analysis, when this number has been reached, new calls for this sector will be blocked. Additional For Handoverthe number of channel elements allocated for handover for all sectors on the site for this carrier.
101
For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handover, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handover, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handover are available. These channel element settings apply only to Rel 99 Subscribers. HSDPA Channel Elements are not explicitly accounted for on the downlink. For details on how these values are used to calculate the Total Available For the Site and Total Dedicated For the Sector values, press the F1 key. 5 In the Downlink Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:
Total Available For The Sitedisplays the number of channel elements available. Total Dedicated For The Sectordisplays the number of channel elements dedicated for the sector. Primary (Per Sector)the number of channel elements assigned to this carrier on this sector for primary traffic. Primary traffic consists of the subscribers with this sector designated as the best server. Primary Pooled (Per Site)the number of channel elements pooled for this carrier for all sectors on this site for primary traffic. You can combine primary and pooled channel elements, or use only one or the other. If you want to specify that all of the channel elements on the site are pooled, type 0 in the Primary (Per Sector) box and type the total number of channel elements in the Primary Pooled (Per Site) box. When you generate an analysis, when this number has been reached, new calls for this sector will be blocked. Additional For Handoverthe number of channel elements allocated for handover for all sectors on the site for this carrier. For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handover, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handover, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handover are available.
Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
102
To define implementation settings

1 2 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Implementation. If you want to manually assign a scrambling code index or modify the scrambling code index assigned to the sector, type a value in the Scrambling Code Index box. The Scrambling Code and Scrambling Code Group values update automatically. For more information on scrambling codes, see Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans on page 217. 3 Beside the HSDPA Scheduler Gain box, do one of the following to define the BTS scheduler gain:
Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the scheduler gain curve, and click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a scheduler gain curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
If you do not assign a Scheduler Gain curve, Mentum Planet assumes that there is no gain. 4 In the Rapid Planning section, define the settings for rapid planning:
Uplink DPCH Noise Risethe noise rise in the receiver, above the thermal noise floor, generated by traffic links. DPCH Total Traffic Powerfor Rel 99 and Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers, the total traffic transmit power for dedicated Rel 99 channels for the sector. HS-DSCH Powerfor HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers, the maximum transmit power for the downlink shared channel.
For information on how these values are used, see Rapid planning settings on page 97. 5 For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, in the HS-DSCH Activity Factor box, type the HSDPA downlink shared channel average activity factor. This setting is used to model the bursty nature of packet-type traffic, such as Web browsing. 6 Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
103
To define quality settings

1 2 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Quality. On the Quality panel, in the Quality Parameters section, type values in any of the following boxes:
CPICH Target Ec/Iothe target common pilot channel (CPICH) signal-to-noise ratio (Ec/Io) that the system can attain HS-SCCH Target Ec/Ntthe target High Speed Shared Control Channel Ec/Nt that the system can attain. This parameter is only visible when the carrier is HSDPA. Maximum DPCH Noise Risethe maximum noise rise permitted for the sector. This value is used to limit the number of users in a system based on noise rise. Maximum Users (Per Sector)the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector. Maximum Rel 99 Users (Per Sector)the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector on a Rel 99 carrier. This parameter is only visible when for Rel 99 carriers. Maximum HSDPA Users (Per Sector)the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector on a HSDPA carrier. This parameter is only visible when for HSDPA carriers. Handover Marginthe soft handover margin. For soft handover, the system will consider all cells that are within the value of the Handover Margin value from the best server and also the CPICH Target Ec/Io value. Maximum Intra-Site Serversthe maximum number servers from the same site that are permitted for this sector Maximum Cell Radiusthe maximum cell radius permitted for this sector Maximum Speedthe maximum speed permitted for this sector
104
To define W-CDMA power settings

1 2 3 In the tree view of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Powers. On the Powers panel, from the Transmit Power Parameters In list, choose the unit in which the transmit power settings are defined. In the Absolute Power Values section, type a value in the Total PA Power box to define the maximum power output by the sector's power amplifier (PA). The Total PA Power value and the PA Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget calculations. For more information, see Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors on page 87. 4 To define CPICH power, do one of the following:
To define a fixed value for the CPICH power, type a value in the Fixed CPICH Power box. The Fixed CPICH Power value and the CPICH Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget calculations. For more information, see Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors on page 87. To automatically optimize CPICH power, enable the Optimize CPICH check box and define the range of CPICH values in the Maximum CPICH Power and Minimum CPICH Power boxes.
If you choose to optimize CPICH power, the analysis calculates the required CPICH power to ensure that all the users achieve the required Ec/Io (Monte Carlo analyses only). 5 In the Control Powers (Relative to CPICH Power) section, type values in the following boxes:
Relative SCH/P-CCPCH Powerthe synchronization channel (SCH)/primary common control physical channel (P-CCPCH) power relative to the CPICH power HS-SCCH Powerthe power of the High Speed Shared Control Channel. This parameter is only visible if the sector is using a HSDPA or Rel 99 & HSDPA carrier. HSUPA Control Channels Powerthe combined power required for the E-AGCH (E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel), E-
105
RGCH (E-DCH Relative Grant Channel), and the E-HICH (EDCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel).
Other Common Channel Powersthe power for other common channels relative to the CPICH power
In the Traffic Power Limits (Relative to Max CPICH Power) section, type values in the following boxes (not applicable to HSDPA carriers):
Maximum DPCH Powerthe maximum service power for a single DPCH relative to the maximum CPICH power. Note that it is also possible to define the Maximum DPCH Power for individual bearers (excluding HSDPA bearers) using the Maximum DPCH Power Offset value in the Edit - W-CDMA Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer. Minimum DPCH Powerthe minimum service power for a single DPCH relative to the maximum CPICH power. Note that it is also possible to define the Minimum DPCH Power for individual bearers (excluding HSDPA bearers) using the Minimum DPCH Power Offset value in the Edit - W-CDMA Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer.
In the Other User Interference section, type a value in the Average PRACH Interference Power box to define the interference for the physical random access channel (PRACH) channel. The Average PRACH Interference Power value is used to model the uplink power that is used during Monte Carlo analyses. During Rapid Planning analyses, the HSDPA uplink power is modelled using Uplink Noise Rise setting on the Implementation panel.
106
Editing sites and sectors

You can edit individual sites or you can use the Global Editor to edit one or more sites.
To edit a site
In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click on the site that you want to edit and choose Edit. Click the Edit Site button on the Site toolbar and then click in the Map window on the site that you want to edit.
The Site Properties dialog box opens. 2 3 If there is more than one site at the chosen location, choose the site you want to edit from the Editing Site list. Do one of the following:
Modify any of the site properties and save them as a new configuration if required. For information, see Creating W-CDMA sites on page 85. Load an existing configuration by choosing File Open Configuration.
4 5
Click Apply to update your project. Click Close.
To globally edit W-CDMA sectors

You can easily edit W-CDMA-specific sector properties for individual carriers assigned to sites in your project or for a particular group of sites using the W-CDMA Global Edit dialog box. You can also add or remove carriers from sites. The W-CDMA Global Edit dialog box is different from the standard Global Edit dialog box that you can use with other technologies because it only contains settings that are specific to W-CDMA. For more information on the
107
standard Global Edit dialog box, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
If you are modifying the W-CDMA power values, you have the option of viewing data in dBm or Watts. However, if you want to modify the Average PRACH Interference Power, you will only be able to use the full range of values available for the field if you are using the dBm option. If you prefer to use Watts, you can use the Watts option when you are modifying other power values, and then change the units to dBm before modifying the value for PRACH.
In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:
To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Global Edit W-CDMA. To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites, right-click and choose Global Edit W-CDMA. To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the group and choose Global Edit W-CDMA. To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags and choose Global Edit W-CDMA.
The W-CDMA Global Edit dialog box opens.
108
In the Sector Selection section, choose one of the following options:

Allapply changes to all sectors Current Selectionapply changes to the sectors that are selected in the Map window. For more information, see the Choosing sites section in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Groupapply changes only to sectors in group chosen from the list
109
In the Carrier Selection section, choose one of the following options from the Action list for each carrier ID that the changes affect:
Modify Existingmodify the sector settings for existing carriers Modify/Createadd a new carrier to the sector and modify the sector settings for existing carriers Deletedelete this carrier from the sector Do Not Modifydo not modify the sector settings for this carrier
In the Cell Equipment Parameters section, enable the check box beside each setting that you want to update in the chosen table, click in the Value column and type a new value for each setting. Click Apply to update the settings and then click Close.
Deleting sites
You can delete sites using the Project Explorer or the Map window.
To delete a site
In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site, choose Delete, and click Yes to confirm the deletion. In the Map window, choose the site, right-click and choose Delete, and then click Delete to confirm the deletion.
Viewing W-CDMA carrier assignment and interference information

Once you have created a project and assigned carriers to sectors, you can use the Carrier In-Map Display tool to view co-channel and adjacent channel interference in the Map window. You can also view carrier allocation information.
110
To view W-CDMA frequency assignment and interference information

1 On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the Carrier In-Map Display button, and then click in the Map window near the sector for which you want to view interference information. If you want to view only carrier allocation information, you can click anywhere in the Map window. The Carrier In-Map Display window opens with the Interactive tab open by default. The Sector ID box shows the name of the sector closest to where you clicked in the Map window and the Technology box displays the sector assigned to the sector. The display in the Map window updates to identify sectors in the Map window that are co-channel interferers with the selected sector. For each sector that is a co-channel interferer, the numbers of the carriers that cause co-channel interference are displayed in the Map window. For the selected sector, carrier information is displayed in red.
111
Do any of the following:
To view other types of interference in the Map window, from the View list, choose the type of interference that you want to view. The display in the Map window updates to show the interferers. To choose another sector for which to view interference information, click in the Map window near the sector. To display the results again for a sector that you selected previously, choose the sector from the Sector ID list.
If you want to view information in the Map window about frequency allocation, click the Sector Selection tab.
4 5
From the View in Map Window list, choose Carriers. From the Technology list, choose W-CDMA. The list section of the dialog box updates to show all of the carriers assigned to the technology.
6 7
Choose one or more of the listed items to display in the Map window and click Display. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors for which you want to display the information.
112
If you want to choose a different group of sectors for which to display the selected information, click Update Selection, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose another group of sectors and click OK. If you want to clear the display, click Clear.
Visibility of the Carrier In-Map Display is affected by the same settings that control the visibility of site labels. If you cannot see the sector information in the Map window, see Displaying and formatting site labels in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide for information about changing the appearance of labels.
113
114
6.
Chapter 6: Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA Sectors
Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA Sectors

This chapter describes how to add repeaters to W-CDMA sectors in your project.
Understanding W-CDMA repeaters Workflow for adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors Repeaters and W-CDMA predictions Locating repeaters in a Map window
115
Understanding W-CDMA repeaters

Repeaters are used to retransmit signals received from donor sectors to locations that have insufficient coverage. For example, repeaters can be used to extend coverage or fill in shadow areas caused by hills, large buildings, and other structures that obstruct signals. A repeater receives a signal from the donor antenna of a donor sector, and then amplifies and retransmits the signal through its service antenna. Repeaters are primarily used to reduce path loss without providing an increase in network capacity. Generally, repeaters add noise and amplify noise in the uplink, which can limit their effectiveness; however, a well placed repeater can reduce noise levels within a W-CDMA network and enhance the overall capacity. Implementing repeaters can be an efficient and cost-effective method of increasing the received signal strength for mobiles in an area without having to place additional sites. A repeaters power is defined by its Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP). EIRP measures the maximum radiated power in the direction of the maximum gain relative to an isotropic antenna (typically in the direction the antenna is pointing). The EIRP of W-CDMA repeaters is based on the CPICH power of the first active carrier, and is calculated as shown in Equation 6.1.
Repeater EIRP = CPICH Power Lm + GD+ LD+ GR LR LS + GS
Equation 6.1 Repeater EIRP Where:
CPICH Power is the pilot power of the first carrier from the W-CDMA Sector Settings of the donor sector. Lm is the masked path loss between the base station transmitter and the repeater. GD is the repeater donor antenna gain. LD is the repeater donor antenna system loss (typically feeder loss). GR is the repeater gain. LR is the repeater loss. LS is the repeater service antenna system loss (typically feeder loss).
116
Adding Repeaters to W-CDMA Sectors CDMA User Guide
GS is the repeater service antenna gain.
Repeaters and W-CDMA predictions

When you generate predictions for a sector that has one or more repeaters assigned to it, signal strength grid (.grd) files are generated for the sector and for each repeater. W-CDMA analyses use the separate predictions for the donor sectors and repeaters. A combined signal strength file is also generated, which merges the separate sector and repeater signal strength files. Combined signal strength predictions are used when the full coverage area of a sector is required, such as when you generate a traffic map or interference matrix, or analyze the interference between two sectors. After you have generated predictions for a sector, you can choose to view a prediction for the donor sector or individual repeaters. You can also view a combined prediction that displays the combined signal strengths of the donor sector and all of its repeaters. For information on generating and viewing predictions, see Chapter 8: Generating Predictions in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Workflow for adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors

Step 1 Step 2
Configure and place W-CDMA sites. See Chapter 5: Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites on page 83. Add repeaters to sectors with insufficient coverage. See Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors on page 117.
Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors

To add a repeater to a sector, you must define general settings, such as the donor sector for which the repeater will retransmit a signal, and the location of the repeater. You must also define settings for service and donor antennas, predictions, repeater links, and carriers. You can add repeaters manually or you can import them from an existing file.
117
To add repeaters to W-CDMA sectors

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the sector to which you want to add a repeater, and choose Add Repeater. Click in the Map window in the location where you want to add the repeater. The Repeater Settings dialog box opens with the general settings panel selected by default.
3 4 5
In the Repeater-Site ID box, type a unique name for the repeater. If you want to add additional information, such as the associated Site ID, in the Repeater-Site UID box, type an identifier or description. If you want to change the donor sector, choose a sector from the list.
118
Do one of the following to define the status of the repeater:

To set the repeater as active, enable the Active check box. To set the repeater as inactive, clear the Active check box.
Inactive repeaters are not used for predictions or analyses. 7 If you want to change the symbol and color settings used to represent active or inactive repeaters in the Map window, in the Color/Symbol for All Repeaters section, click the Active or Inactive swatch, choose the font, font size, symbol, color, rotation angle, background, and effects, and then click OK. You can only change the symbol and color settings for the status (Active or Inactive) that you applied to the repeater in Step 6. The symbol and color settings will be applied to all Active or Inactive repeaters. 8 In the Repeater Connection Type section, choose one of the following options:
RFan antenna is used for communication between the donor sector and the repeater. Fibera fiber-optic link is used for communication between the donor sector and the repeater.
If you choose the Fiber option, the donor antenna settings do not apply (see To define donor antenna settings for repeaters on page 123). 9 If you want to place the service antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Service Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/ Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes. The values displayed by default correspond to the location that you clicked in the Map window in Step 2. 10 If you want to place the donor antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Donor Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/ Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes. By default, the donor antenna and service antenna are placed at the same location. 11 Define the service antenna settings. See To define service antenna settings for repeaters on page 121. 12 If you chose the RF option in Step 8, define the donor antenna settings. See To define donor antenna settings for repeaters on page 123.
119
13 Define the repeater prediction settings. See To define repeater prediction settings on page 125. 14 Define the repeater equipment settings. See To define repeater equipment settings on page 127. 15 Define the repeater carrier settings. See To define repeater carrier settings on page 129. 16 Click Create to add the repeater to the sector, and then click Close to close the Repeater Settings dialog box. The repeater is displayed in the Sites category of the Project Explorer under both the Repeaters node and the chosen donor sector.
You can also change the status of a repeater by right-clicking a repeater node in the Project Explorer and choosing Activate Repeater or Deactivate Repeater.
120
To define service antenna settings for repeaters

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Service Antenna.
On the Service Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list. This is the pattern that the service antenna will use to retransmit the signal received from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.
If you want to view or modify the antenna pattern, click Edit. For more information on modifying antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, Working with Antenna Patterns, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
121
If you are using an antenna pattern with electrical downtilt, from the Electrical Tilt list, choose the electrical downtilt pattern that you want to use. For information on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, Working with Antenna Patterns, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Type values in the following boxes:
Azimuththe horizontal direction the service antenna looks towards. An azimuth value of 0 degrees is true north, 90 degrees is east, 180 degrees is south, and 270 degrees is west. As you rotate clockwise, the azimuth increases. Tiltthe number of degrees that a service antenna is tilted upward or downward. A positive (+) tilt value points the antenna upwards, while a negative (-) tilt value points the antenna downwards. Twistthe number of degrees that a service antenna is twisted counter-clockwise or clockwise. A positive (+) twist value rotates the antenna counter-clockwise, while a negative (-) twist value rotates the antenna clockwise. Heightthe height of the service antenna from ground level. Use DEM Elevationsets the elevation height based on the repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file. Manual Entryenables you to define the elevation height for the repeater. Type the elevation height in the Elevation box. This option is useful if the repeater is being used as a microcell for indoor coverage.
In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:
7 8
In the System Losses box, type a value for the service antenna system feeder loss or any additional antenna system-related losses. Click Create to save your settings and add the repeater, or choose another item in the tree view.
122
To define donor antenna settings for repeaters

Donor antenna settings only apply if the repeater type is RF. If a fiberoptic connection is used between the donor and service antenna, the donor antenna settings do not apply. For more information, see To add repeaters to W-CDMA sectors on page 118.
In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Donor Antenna.
On the Donor Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list. This is the pattern that the donor antenna will use to receive the signal from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.
123
If you are using an antenna pattern with electrical downtilt, from the Electrical Tilt list, choose the electrical downtilt pattern that you want to use. For details on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, Working with Antenna Patterns, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
5 6
In the Height box, type the height of the donor antenna from ground level. In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:
Use DEM Elevationsets the elevation height based on the repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file. This is the default option. Manual Entryenables you to define the elevation height for the repeater. Type the elevation height in the Elevation box. This option is useful if the repeater is being used as a microcell for indoor coverage.
In the System Losses box, type a value for donor antenna system feeder loss or any other antenna system-related losses. The Isolation box indicates the calculated value of isolation between antennas (masked path loss). For an accurate isolation value, the antenna patterns assigned to the repeater must have a full definition of the vertical pattern (all angles).
Click Create to save your settings and add the repeater, or choose another item in the tree view.
124
To define repeater prediction settings

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Predictions.
2 3
On the Predictions panel, choose a propagation model from the Propagation Model list. In the Number of Radials box, type the number of radials to be used in the prediction. Prediction calculations are performed along radial lines. A higher number of radials will produce more accurate results, but the calculation will take more time.
In the Propagation Distance box, type the maximum distance from the repeater for which the signal strength will be calculated.
125
In the Masked Path Loss from Donor box, type a value for the repeater amplifier system loss. Click Calculate, and in the Calculate Masked Path Loss dialog box, type a value for any other known losses in the Additional Losses box, choose the propagation model you want to use to calculate the path loss, and click OK. The value in the Masked Path Loss from Donor box is automatically updated.
For maximum accuracy, enter a measured value of pathloss in the Masked Path Loss From Donor box. The measured pathloss can be determined by measuring the signal strength with a known EIRP from the donor sector. If you choose to calculate the masked path loss, ensure you specify an appropriate model. The most appropriate propagation model will depend on the specifics of the environment between donor sector and the repeater donor antenna. If you suspect obstruction at the repeater location, choose a deterministic model with the correct receiver height. You may need to create a model specifically for repeater installations. Mentum Planet will not update the stored masked pathloss automatically, even if the current value is generated using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box. If there are changes to the network that would impact the pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, you must apply a new value to the repeater, either by manually entering a new value in the Repeater Settings dialog box or re-calculating the value using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box.
126
To define repeater equipment settings

The gain of a repeater in Mentum Planet is maintained at a constant level. Any changes to the donor sector and repeater system that affect the power received by the repeater will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. For example, a change in the masked pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, the donor sectors pilot power, or the antenna system at the donor sector which results in a change to the EIRP of the sector, will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. The EIRP value at the repeater will also change in line with a change in either of the repeaters antenna systems. As such, it is important to review repeater settings following any changes of this nature.
In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Equipment.
127
On the Equipment panel, do either of the following to define the repeater EIRP:
In the Power EIRP box, type the CPICH EIRP based on the CPICH power of the first carrier on the donor sector. The value in the System Loss box is updated based on the value you enter. In the Gain box, type a value for the repeater system gain. The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter.
3 4 5 6
In the System Loss box, type a value for the repeater system loss. The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter. In the Noise Figure box, type a value for the noise contribution of the repeater to the uplink. In the Forward Max Power Per Carrier box, type a value for the achievable limit of power for the carrier. In the Reverse Eb/No adjustment box, type a value for any adjustment that should be applied to the required Eb/No for signals through the repeater in the reverse path. This value can be used to take into account the effects of the fixed path of signals through the repeater, for example, to simulate the effect of a lack of diversity gain on repeated signals at the donor sector.
128
To define repeater carrier settings

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Carriers.
In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check box beside each of the carriers that you want assigned to the repeater. All of the carriers assigned to the donor sector are enabled by default. Click Create to save your settings and add the repeater, or choose another item in the tree view.
To edit repeater settings

After you have added a repeater to a sector, you can edit the repeater at any time. 1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the tree view of the Sites category, expand the site and sector to which the repeater belongs. Right-click the repeater that you want to edit and choose Edit. The Repeater Settings dialog box opens.
129
3 4
If you want to change the donor sector (re-parent), choose a sector from the Donor Sector list. Modify the other repeater settings as required. For information, see Adding repeaters to W-CDMA sectors on page 117.
Click Apply and then click Close.

You can also access all of the repeaters in your project from the Repeaters node in the Sites category of the Project Explorer.
Locating repeaters in a Map window

You can use the Project Explorer to locate repeaters in a Map window.
To locate repeaters in a Map window
In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the repeater and choose Locate. The repeater is selected in the Map window.
130
7.
Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA
Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA

This chapter describes how to generate a rapid planning analysis and view results. A rapid planning analysis provides a quick simulation of your network. You can use the results of a rapid planning analysis to make adjustments to your project settings and then run a more detailed Monte Carlo analysis.
Understanding rapid planning for W-CDMA Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers Deleting analyses
131
Understanding rapid planning for W-CDMA

Rapid planning uses minimal settings to generate a set of analysis layers that you can use to analyze your network quickly. The analysis runs only once and generates analysis layers automatically (as opposed to a Monte Carlo analysis, for which you can generate layers automatically or as a separate step). A rapid planning analysis does not require as much time as a Monte Carlo analysis, but it also does not generate the detailed subscriber information that is generated with a Monte Carlo analysis. For more information on Monte Carlo simulations, see Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for W-CDMA on page 150.
Prediction view files for W-CDMA analyses

Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin. By default, prediction view files are created when you generate an analysis. Using prediction view files is optional. You can determine whether or not to use them by considering the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case. See Optimizing W-CDMA analyses on page 167 for more information.

The analysis layers that you can generate using rapid planning depend on whether you choose to use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager or a nominal subscriber. For more information on choosing subscribers, see Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning on page 140.
If you use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager, the layers available are the same as the analysis layers available when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation, with the exception of the Downlink - Throughput and Uplink - Throughput analysis layers. Throughput layers are not available for rapid planning. If you use a nominal subscriber, the throughput layers are not available, and the CPICH - Pollution Index layer is also not available, because no traffic map is used in this kind of rapid planning analysis.
For details on each analysis layer, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159.
132
Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA CDMA User Guide
Understanding data rate negotiation

By default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 7.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates. It is also assumed that HSDPA traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background). Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.
If you dont want data rate negotiation to be simulated in your network, define only one bearer within the quality constraints you set in the Subscriber Manager.
Table 7.1 Data rate negotiation process for W-CDMA Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Voice (Circuit Conversational below 15 kbps) Rel 99 & HSDPA & GSM Carried on Rel 99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in Rel 99) Symmetric negotiation within Rel 99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in Rel 99 Symmetric negotiation within Rel 99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in Rel 99 Rel 99 & GSM Carried on Rel 99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in Rel 99) Symmetric negotiation within Rel 99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in Rel 99 Symmetric negotiation within Rel 99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in Rel 99 HSDPA & GSM On GSM as Voice GSM Only On GSM as Voice
Circuit Conversational above 15 kbps)
On GSM as Data
On GSM as Data
Circuit streaming
On GSM as Data
On GSM as Data
133
Chapter 7 CDMA User Guide Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Packet Conversational/ Streaming Packet or Circuit Interactive/ Background Rel 99 & HSDPA & GSM Negotiated within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 Negotiated within HSDPA then within R99, then on GSM as Data Rel 99 & GSM Negotiated within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 Negotiated within R99 then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 HSDPA & GSM On GSM as Data GSM Only On GSM as Data
Negotiated within HSDPA then on GSM as Data if blocked in HSDPA
On GSM as Data
Data rate downgrading

In the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 7.1 on page 133 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the GSM network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.
Analyzing the results of data rate negotiation

Mentum Planet provides several means of analyzing the results of data rate negotiation. You can:
view coverage maps showing the coverage probability for different rates for one usage. In particular, you can view the Downlink - Bearer Coverage layer, the Downlink - Max Achievable Coverage layer as well as the Uplink - Bearer Coverage layer and Uplink - Max Achievable Coverage layer. review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sectormobile report. See Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227.
134
Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

Step 1 Step 2
Define prediction view settings. See Optimizing W-CDMA analyses on page 167. Define rapid planning settings for the sectors that you want to include in your analysis. See To define implementation settings on page 103. If you want to use the same settings for a number of analyses, define default analysis settings. See Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings on page 135. Create a new rapid planning analysis. See Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA on page 136. Define the analysis settings and generate the analysis. See Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA on page 138. View the results of the analysis. See Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers on page 147.
Step 3
Step 4 Step 5
Step 6
Defining default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings

If you want to use the same settings for a number of rapid planning analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.
135
To define default W-CDMA rapid planning analysis settings

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Default W-CDMA Analysis Settings. Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK. For more information defining analysis settings, see the following sections:
Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA on page 138 Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning on page 140 Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA on page 145
The Runtime Parameters settings in the Default W-CDMA Analysis Settings dialog box apply only to Monte Carlo analyses. For more information, see To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA on page 177.
Creating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the W-CDMA Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project.
A rapid planning analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the W-CDMA technology. If you want to perform analyses for carriers assigned to a TDMA/FDMA technology, you must create a TDMA/FDMA analysis under the TDMA/FDMA Analyses node. For more information, see Chapter 7, Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.
136
A Monte Carlo analysis takes more time than rapid planning, but generates detailed subscriber information that a rapid planning analysis does not. For more information on Monte Carlo analyses, see Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149.
If you want to generate network analyses at the same resolution as predictions created using either the Volcano or WaveSight propagation models, you need to specify the resolution of the analyses in the Analysis Resolution box and choose an elevation file and, optionally, a clutter file, that uses the same resolution as the predictions on the Advanced tab in the Propagation Model Editor.
To create a new rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose New Network Analysis. The W-CDMA Analysis dialog box opens.
2 3
In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis. In the Description box, type a description of the analysis.
137
From the Analysis Mode list, choose Rapid Planning and click OK. A new W-CDMA analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.
If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node, choose Select Sectors, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use, and click Continue. If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA on page 146.
To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node

If you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the W-CDMA Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project. 1 2 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the W-CDMA_Analyses folder in the current project folder. In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses. The list of analyses updates to show the new analysis.
Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA

System settings enable you to define network characteristics that you want to simulation in your analysis (e.g., slow fading and soft handover gain).
To define rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate. The W-CDMA Simulation dialog box opens. 2 In the tree view, choose System.
138
If you want to calculate soft handover gain due to macro-diversity, enable the Use Soft Handover Gain check box. If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handover will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handover gain is not taken into account for the uplink link analysis for the mobile.
From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer. The CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the third best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the third best server is causing any significant interference for the best server.
139
If you want to override the rapid planning settings on the Sector Settings Implementation panel for this analysis, enable the Override All Cell Loads check box. Typically, you would use the Override All Cell Loads option if you are doing nominal planning or network dimensioning. If you are optimizing an existing network using switch statistics, you would use the rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel for the sector.
For each applicable W-CDMA carrier, define the following:
DPCH Uplink LoadFor Rel 99, Rel 99 & HSDPA, HSDPA, and Rel99 & HSPA sectors, the percentage of cell loading you want to target on the DPCH uplink. Total Uplink LoadFor Rel 99 & HSPA, and HSPA sectors, the percentage of cell loading that you want to target for the uplink. This load percentage is used to update the total noise rise per sector DPCH Available Traffic PowerFor Rel 99, Rel 99 & HSDPA, and Rel 99 & HSPA sectors, the percentage of the total power available for the dedicated physical channel (DPCH). HS-DSCH Available Traffic PowerFor Rel 99 & HSDPA, HSDPA, Rel99 & HSPA, HSPA sectors, the percentage of the total power available for the high-speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) HS-DSCH Activity FactorFor Rel 99 & HSDPA, HSDPA, Rel99 & HSPA, HSPA sectors, the downlink shared channel average activity factor.
The total power available is the remaining PA power after power for the CPICH and other common channels has been assigned. 7 Choose another item in the tree view.
Choosing subscriber types for W-CDMA rapid planning

When you choose subscriber types for a rapid planning analysis, you have two options:
You can choose a subscriber type that you have defined using the Subscriber Manager. For information on the Subscriber
140
Manager, see Chapter 4: Defining W-CDMA Subscribers on page 47.
You can choose the Nominal Subscriber type, which enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics for a simple rapid planning analysis. This option is available only for rapid planning.
The Monte Carlo planning option requires the detailed information provided by the Subscriber Manager.
To choose a defined subscriber type for W-CDMA rapid planning

1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view.
On the Subscribers panel, choose the Subscriber Manager option.
141
3 4
Enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include in the analysis. Choose another item in the tree view.
To choose a nominal subscriber for W-CDMA rapid planning

Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define the minimum subscriber settings required to run a rapid planning analysis. 1 2 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view. On the Subscribers panel, choose the Nominal Subscriber option.
142
On the Nominal Subscribers tab, in the Mobile Equipment section, define values for the following:
Max Transmit Powermaximum transmit power at the mobile power amplifier in the box. Antenna Gainthe antenna gain for the mobile equipment band type used by the nominal subscriber type Body Lossthe signal loss as a result of the proximity of objects located near the transmitter. Max Active Serversthe maximum number of handover servers supported by the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use Noise Figure the noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use
If the network supports HSDPA, in the HSDPA section, enable the HSDPA Active check box and choose a terminal category from the associated list. Only terminal categories 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12 are available in this release.
In the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box, type a value to define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered. The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for the Downlink Best Server, Uplink - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.
From the Environment list, choose one of the following environment types for the nominal subscriber:

Outdooropen air environments Indoorbuildings or structures Deep Indoordense buildings, such as office towers Vehicularmoving vehicles
In order to view results for a chosen environment, you must have specified the environment parameters in the New Clutter Type or Edit Clutter Type dialog box in the Subscriber Manager and you must have assigned the clutter classes to the appropriate clutter types. 7 Click the Nominal Bearers tab.
143
In the Downlink Bearer section, define values for the following:
Required Downlink Eb/Nothe received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) required for a given quality, such as FER, on the downlink. Downlink Service Traffic Ratethe data rate for the downlink. Maximum DPCH Power Offsetthe maximum power correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber. This box, in conjunction with the Minimum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.
Minimum DPCH Power Offsetthe minimum power correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber. This box, in conjunction with the Maximum DPCH Power Offset, enables you to adjust the DPCH power defined on a per-sector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.
Downlink Eb/No to FERdo one of the following:
Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to FER curve, and click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to FER curve, and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
For details about how the Eb/No to FER curve is used, see Defining W-CDMA bearers on page 58. 9 In the Uplink Bearer section, define values for the following:
In the Required Uplink Eb/No box, type the received signal-tonoise ratio (Eb/No) required for a given quality, such as FER, on the uplink. In the Uplink Service Traffic Rate box, type the data rate for the uplink traffic.
10 Choose another item in the tree view.
144
Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA

The analysis area is the area over which the analysis is computed. You have the option of using the full area covered by the analysis or defining boundaries to limit the analysis area. By limiting the analysis area, you can significantly reduce the computation time by eliminating all of the areas in which you are not interested.
To define rapid planning analysis area settings for W-CDMA

1 2 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the tree view. On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:
Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictionsindicates that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions Use Analysis Boundsenables you to specify x and y coordinates to limit the extent of the simulation. Do one of the following: Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes Click Update Bounds With Active View if you have resized or zoomed your Map window. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window. Use An Analysis Gridenables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, Working with the Grid Manager, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.

Use An Area Gridenables you to choose a predefined area grid. For information on creating area grids, see Chapter 14, Working with Grids, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
145
In the Analysis Resolution box, type a value for the resolution of the analysis. For more information on this box, press the F1 key. Choose another item in the tree view.
Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

Before generating a rapid planning analysis, you must define the settings on each panel in the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box as described in Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA on page 138.
To generate a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA

1 2 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, click Analyze. If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis, and click Continue. In the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK. By default, the check boxes are enabled for all of the layers that you chose in the analysis layer filter. A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include the layers in the analysis.
Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information

You can generate a network analysis for sectors identified with certain flags and conditions. For example, you could generate a network analysis for sites in Phase 1 that are installed and operational. To do this, you define the flags and conditions, and then generate a network analysis. In the Select Sectors dialog box, you choose the Flags Filter. For more information on flags and conditions, see Working with flags, in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
146
To generate an analysis for sectors chosen by flags

1 2 3 4 5 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions that you want to use. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis and choose Select Sectors. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose Flags Filter and click Continue. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis you want to generate and choose Generate. Define the analysis settings as described starting in Defining rapid planning system settings for W-CDMA on page 138, and then follow the procedure described in To generate a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA on page 146.
Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers

Once you have generated your analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.
To view W-CDMA analysis layers
In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis layer under the W-CDMA Analysis node and choose View. The analysis layer is displayed in the Map window.
To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the W-CDMA Analysis node, right-click an analysis layer, and choose Remove. You can obtain statistical and composite reports for the analysis layers using the Layer Statistics Analysis tool. For more information, see Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227.
147
Deleting analyses
Files generated from a network analysis can take up a lot of hard disk space. You can delete analyses that are no longer required.
To delete analyses
1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, do any of the following:

Choose one or more analyses, right-click and choose Delete. Expand an analysis node, choose one or more analysis layers, right-click and choose Delete.
In the Mentum Planet dialog box, click Yes. The analyses or analysis layers you chose are removed from the Project Explorer and the files are deleted from the project folder.
148
8.
Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for WCDMA
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA

This chapter describes how to generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA and view results. A Monte Carlo analysis provides two types of results:
Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for W-CDMA Understanding data rate negotiation Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA Optimizing W-CDMA analyses Defining default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis Generating W-CDMA analysis layers Analyzing CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors
information about sectors, carriers and subscribers in your network analysis layers
You can also generate a rapid planning analysis, which provides only analysis layers, but takes less time. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA.
149
Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for W-CDMA

A Monte Carlo analysis uses Monte Carlo simulation techniques to determine the characteristics of your network over repeated runs. A run consists of the distribution of random numbers of subscribers throughout the analysis area in a random pattern, and an analysis of the uplink and downlink. On the last run, operating points and discrete subscriber information are generated. Once the runs are completed, you can view the results and generate analysis layers (either automatically or as a separate step). Statistically, individual runs are of little value. However, over many Monte Carlo runs, the average result provides a realistic representation of network performance. The results are averaged to create the operating points that are used when you generate analysis layers. The following sections describe the phases of a Monte Carlo run and explain the methods for determining how many runs are required.
Monte Carlo phases

This section explains the phases of a Monte Carlo run:

placing subscribers in a random pattern uplink and downlink analysis generation of operating points and subscriber information
Placing subscribers in a random pattern
Each run begins with the placement of subscribers in a random pattern throughout the analysis area. This pattern is created using input values from the carriers defined for the band and the subscribers defined in the Subscriber Manager. The random distribution pattern corresponds to the traffic map, and is an efficient method for establishing transmission patterns when the exact location of each subscriber cannot be established.
Analyzing the uplink and downlink
The goal of the uplink and downlink analysis phase is to determine the subscribers that can be served, taking into account the impact of each served subscriber on the network. The uplink analysis begins by considering the subscribers in the simulation, then the serving sectors for each subscriber.
150
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA CDMA User Guide
The uplink analysis
determines the best uplink server that is also the best downlink server identifies the second and third best uplink servers calculates the handover gain based on the degree of correlation of the active serving sectors and adjusts the uplink power accordingly calculates the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) and checks that the required coverage probability is achieved calculates the noise rise and checks that the limit is not exceeded on all sectors checks that the cell radius and speed limit are not exceeded calculates the required downlink power of the serving sector determines whether the received serving sector common pilot channel (CPICH) power-to-interference ratio (Ec/Io) is above the target calculates the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) and checks that the required coverage probability is achieved checks that the channel element, user limit, PA power, throughput, and code limits are not exceeded
The downlink analysis

The analysis also checks the carrier soft limits for noise rise and PA threshold, as defined on the Carrier tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. Subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.
Generating operating points and subscriber information
On the last run, operating points and subscriber information are generated. Operating points provide detailed information about each sector, carrier, and subscriber type in the analysis. The operating points are averaged and stored. You can view the actual values (i.e., standard deviation and range) of the operating points by opening the operating points text (.txt) file that is stored in the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of your project. For more information on
151
operating points, see Appendix C: W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format on page 525. You can also view the mean values of the operating points by designing a report using one of the following types of report data:

System-mobile Carrier-sector Carrier-sector-mobile Throughput
For more information, see Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227. Subscriber information provides details on the coverage status of subscribers (also known as discrete subscribers). Snapshots of each subscribers status are compiled on each run of the simulation. When the simulation is complete, the coverage status of each subscriber is displayed automatically in the Map window. The discrete subscriber information is also stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) that you can view. For more information, see Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA on page 184 and Appendix B: WCDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 523. In order to get a visual snapshot of the results of data rate negotiation across the network, you can create a traffic map that highlights unserved subscribers. The unserved traffic maps are created using the discrete subscribers table that is generated during a Monte-Carlo analysis. See Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map on page 185.
Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs

Before you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, you must define the number of runs to complete. You have two options for determining the number of runs:

user-defined method convergence method
These options are defined on the Runtime Parameters panel of the W-CDMA Simulation tool dialog box, and are described in detail in the following sections. You can choose either the user-defined method, or the convergence method, or you can choose a combination of both methods. For more information on the Runtime Parameters panel, see To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA on page 177.
152
User-defined method
Using the Fixed Number of Runs option on the Runtime Parameters panel, you can define the exact number of runs to complete in the Monte Carlo analysis. You need to consider the minimum number of runs that will present an accurate model of the system; with too few runs, the results will not accurately reflect the distribution of subscribers within the network. Too many runs will not degrade the outputs of the analysis, but may take a long time. If the analysis does not achieve what you consider to be an accurate model of the network using the number of runs that you specified, you can generate additional runs. See To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for W-CDMA on page 187. The number of runs required to achieve a given level of accuracy can vary dramatically based on several factors, which include the following:
the number of bins in the analysis, which is directly proportional to the analysis area and resolution. The number of bins in the analysis has an impact as it will provide the number of potential points for subscribers. The more potential points for subscribers, the greater the likelihood of variation. the number of subscribers to be spread. This, coupled with the type of subscriber (for example, high data rate subscribers) and the traffic map, has potentially the greatest impact on the number of runs required. If you spread very few subscribers over a large area, then you need many runs to get a good statistical representation. If these subscribers are spread in a limited area, then fewer runs are likely required. the impact of each individual subscriber on the analysis, which is essentially the required Eb/No. Higher data rate subscribers create a bigger load and have a bigger impact in all respects. They are also are more likely to be served or not served. the potential variation in the locations of the subscribers in the analysis according to the assigned traffic maps. A flat traffic map will likely require more runs than a map where all of the subscribers are concentrated.
153
the number of sectors in the analysis. A greater number of servers, coupled with the potential for overlapping coverage areas, handover regions, and gaps in coverage, results in a higher potential for different sectors providing service, and more runs being required.
In general, the greater potential variability then the greater the number of runs required to ensure a reasonable level of accuracy. It is often useful to do a single run first, especially for large analyses. A single run can identify obvious errors quickly, for example, incorrect PA power settings for a sector. To help determine whether additional runs are required, you view discrete subscriber information (see Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA on page 184) and you can generate reports to view the operating points. For more information on reports, see Chapter 11: Generating WCDMA Reports on page 227.
Convergence method
The Convergence Achieved option on the Runtime Parameters panel enables you to have more refined control over the simulation process than the Fixed Number of Runs option. The distribution of subscribers is affected by the traffic density. The greater the traffic density, the fewer runs will be required. Using this approach, the runs continue until the convergence target is reached. After each run, the tool calculates the convergence factor (see Convergence factor calculation on page 155). When the convergence factor is equal to or less than the value that you define in the Convergence Achieved box, the runs are complete. To achieve results that are statistically valid, you must determine an appropriate Convergence Achieved value. If you specify a lower value (for example, 1%), more runs will be required for the solution to converge. A lower Convergence Achieved value generally requires a higher resolution digital elevation model (DEM) to ensure accurate results. If the DEM has low resolution, small variations in the interference calculations between runs might cause significant differences in the coverage area for a particular site. The Convergence Achieved option requires a minimum of three runs to complete.
154
Convergence factor calculation
The following calculations are used to determine the convergence factor during a run. First, the number of dropped users is calculated using Equation 8.1.
n Si i = 0 Mean number of dropped users = Sn = ------------------n Equation 8.1 Mean number of dropped users Where: S n
is the mean number of dropped users for a particular run is the number of simulation runs
The divergence of consecutive values is continually calculated using the mean value. For example:
Divergence = Max { Sn 4,Sn 3,Sn 2,Sn 1,Sn } M in { Sn 4,Sn 3,Sn 2,Sn 1,Sn } Equation 8.2 Divergence of consecutive values Where: Max Min S n
is the maximum number of dropped users is the minimum number of dropped users
The Sn value from Equation 8.1 and the divergence value from Equation 8.2 are then used to determine the convergence factor, as shown in Equation 8.3.
( Divergence ) ( Sn ) 100 Equation 8.3 Convergence factor
155

By default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 8.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates. It is also assumed that HSDPA traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background). Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.
Table 8.1 Data rate negotiation process for W-CDMA Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Voice (Circuit Conversational below 15 kbps) R99 & HSDPA & GSM Carried on R99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in R99) Symmetric negotiation within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 Symmetric negotiation within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 R99 & GSM Carried on R99 (fixed rate), then on GSM as Voice if blocked in R99) Symmetric negotiation within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 Symmetric negotiation within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 HSDPA & GSM On GSM as Voice GSM Only On GSM as Voice
Circuit Conversational above 15 kbps)
On GSM as Data
On GSM as Data
Circuit streaming
On GSM as Data
On GSM as Data
156
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA CDMA User Guide Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Packet Conversational/ Streaming Packet or Circuit Interactive/ Background R99 & HSDPA & GSM Negotiated within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 Negotiated within HSDPA then within R99, then on GSM as Data R99 & GSM Negotiated within R99, then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 Negotiated within R99 then on GSM as Data if blocked in R99 HSDPA & GSM On GSM as Data GSM Only On GSM as Data
Negotiated within HSDPA then on GSM as Data if blocked in HSDPA
On GSM as Data

In the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 8.1 on page 156 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the GSM network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.

view coverage maps showing the coverage probability for different rates for one usage. In particular, you can view the Downlink - Bearer Coverage layer, the Downlink - Max Achievable Coverage layer as well as the Uplink - Bearer Coverage layer and Uplink - Max Achievable Coverage layer. review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sector-
157
mobile report. See Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227.
create a traffic map from the un-served users based on a Monte Carlo analysis. See Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map on page 185. use the Grid Info tool or the Info tool to view details about the data rate negotiation. See Chapter 5: Working with the Grid Manager in the Grid Analysis User Guide. For information about the Info tool, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide. browse the discrete subscriber table for details about data rate negotiations. In particular, examine the following columns:
Block Reason. See Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 523. Achieved Downlink Rate. See Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 523. Achieved Uplink Rate. See Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 523. Negotiation State. See Negotiation States.
Negotiation States
You can generate a Monte Carlo analysis with discrete subscriber information. When you do so, the discrete subscriber table contains a Negotiation State column. There are five possible states:
Non-negotiateda subscriber who is carried at the maximum data rate on both the uplink and downlink. Forward negotiateda subscriber who is carried where the downlink is at less than the maximum downlink data rate, but the uplink is at the maximum data rate. Reverse negotiateda subscriber who is carried where the uplink is at less than the maximum uplink data rate, but the downlink is at the maximum data rate. Negotiateda subscriber who is carried where neither the downlink or uplink are at the maximum data rates. Not Serveda subscriber can not be served.
158

Analysis layers are generated after the final Monte Carlo run. The following types of analysis layers are available to enable you to visualize and optimize the coverage of your network:

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) analysis Uplink interference analysis Downlink interference analysis Handover analysis Throughput analysis Path balance analysis HSDPA analysis (see Chapter 9: Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers on page 203) HSUPA analysis (see Chapter 9: Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers on page 203)
W-CDMA analysis layers are stored in the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of your project.
W-CDMA analysis layers are generated separately from TDMA/FDMA analysis layers. For more information on TDMA/FDMA analysis layers, see Chapter 7, Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers, in the TDMA/ FDMA User Guide.
CPICH analysis
CPICH analysis layers (see Table 8.2 on page 160) enable you to visualize CPICH coverage and interference over the analysis area. As a subscriber becomes more distant from the serving site, the path loss increases, decreasing the CPICH power (Ec). As the subscriber moves away from the serving site and closer to other sites, interference (Io) occurs. The boundary of CPICH coverage varies due to load, environmental, and bearer conditions. Generating CPICH analysis layers enables you to quantify this effect by calculating the maximum propagation loss for a given load,
159
environment, or bearer. For more information, see CPICH interference on page 515.
Table 8.2 CPICH analysis layers Layer CPICH - Best Server Description Displays the coverage area of each sectors CPICH. The coverage area is based on achieving at least the CPICH Target Ec/Io defined in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. See To define quality settings on page 104. Identical to the CPICH - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the CPICH Ec/Io at each bin based on the power limits defined in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box (see To define W-CDMA power settings on page 105) rather than the CPICH Target Ec/Io value. See To define quality settings on page 104. Displays the coverage area of all the sectors within the analysis area Displays the second best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the third best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the fourth best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the fifth best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the sixth best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the seventh best CPICH to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the best server at each location where the Best Ec is better than the value defined in the Best Ec Threshold box on the General tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, or null if the Best Ec is worse than the threshold value.
CPICH - Composite Best Server CPICH - Ec/Io
CPICH - Coverage CPICH - 2nd Server CPICH - 3rd Server CPICH - 4th Server CPICH - 5th Server CPICH - 6th Server CPICH - 7th Server CPICH - Best Ec Server
160
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA CDMA User Guide Table 8.2 CPICH analysis layers (continued) Layer CPICH - Composite Best Ec Server CPICH - Best Ec CPICH - Total Ec Description Identical to the CPICH - Best Ec Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the Ec (the energy received per chip) for the best CPICH. Displays the total Ec for the pilots in the active set. The total Ec is computed as the sum of Ec powers of the pilots in active set. Displays the areas in your coverage region where CPICH coverage is not sufficient. The CPICH - Pollution Index is a numeric grid (.grd) file that uses a percentage for each bin. Values closer to 100% indicate areas where CPICH pollution and/or CPICH coverage may be a problem. This index is created based on the number of users in an area (usage factor) and the probability of CPICH pollution (CPICH factor) in that area. High values occur when there is a low CPICH-to-interference ratio and/or there is a high concentration of users in relation to the available signal strength. The usage factor is based on the traffic map and the usage factor curve defined in the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box and the traffic factor is based on the CPICH factor curve define in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. Displays the difference in CPICH Ec/Io between the best server and the server that you choose in the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer box on the System panel of the Analysis Settings dialog box. See To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA on page 172 for details. Displays the number of CPICH polluters at each bin. A CPICH is a polluter if it is not a best or handover server and its Ec/Io is within the CPICH Pollution Margin defined in the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box. See To define general settings for W-CDMA on page 36.
CPICH - Pollution Index
CPICH - Delta Ec/Io
CPICH - Polluters
161
Chapter 8 CDMA User Guide Table 8.2 CPICH analysis layers (continued) Layer CPICH - Worst Polluter CPICH - Sum of CPICH minus Best CPICH Description Displays the worst CPICH polluter at each bin. Displays the total CPICH signal strength within the network minus the best CPICH signal strength. This indicates whether the best CPICH is the primary component of the composite signal. In areas where there are too many different signals of similar strength, the signal-to-interference ratio will be too high and calls may be dropped. It is more effective for W-CDMA networks to have a dominant CPICH signal throughout the desired coverage area.
Downlink interference analysis

Downlink interference analysis layers (see Table 8.3) enable you to determine the interference generated on the downlink connections in your network.
Table 8.3 Downlink analysis layers Layer Downlink - Best Server Downlink - Composite Best Server Downlink - Coverage Probability Downlink - Eb/No Description Displays the service channel coverage area for each sector Identical to the Downlink - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the probability of downlink coverage at each bin. This value includes the fade margin. Displays the downlink service Eb/No at each bin without limiting it to the downlink target Eb/No. The W-CDMA analysis layer generation process assumes that perfect power control will cause the power to set itself at a level that will achieve the target Eb/No. See Controlling interference on page 516. Displays the frame erasure rate (FER) at each bin based on the FER to Eb/No curve defined in the W-CDMA Bearer dialog box. See Defining W-CDMA bearers on page 58. Displays the total downlink noise received at the mobile receiver. This value represents the downlink received signal strength including thermal noise.
Downlink - FER
Downlink - Received Io
162
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA CDMA User Guide Table 8.3 Downlink analysis layers (continued) Layer Downlink- Outdoor Io Description Displays the total interference outdoors at the location of the receiver. Thermal noise is not included. This analysis layer does not take into account the penetration loss or the mobile antenna gain. Displays the in-cell to out-of-cell interference ratio based on the ratio of the signal energy from the best serving sector divided by the energy from all other sectors. The signal energy includes overhead channels as well as traffic channels. This measurement is always below zero (i.e., out-of-cell energy is greater than in-cell energy) at the edge of primary coverage. Displays the other-to-own cell interference ratio based on all other sectors and the in-cell signal strength. This layer is the reciprocal of the Downlink - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference layer in linear form. Displays the mean downlink throughput for each bin. Displays the coverage probability for each bearer specified in the analysis. Displays the maximum achieved data rates over the analysis area.
Downlink - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference
Downlink - i-Factor
Downlink - Throughput Downlink - Bearer Coverage Downlink - Max Achievable Coverage
Uplink interference analysis

Uplink interference analysis layers (see Table 8.4) enable you to determine the interference generated on the uplink connections in your network.
Table 8.4 Uplink interference analysis layers Layer Uplink - Best Server Uplink - Composite Best Server Uplink - Coverage Probability Description Displays the uplink coverage for each sector Identical to the Uplink - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the probability of uplink coverage at each bin. This value includes the fade margin.
163
Chapter 8 CDMA User Guide Table 8.4 Uplink interference analysis layers (continued) Layer Uplink - Req Mobile EIRP Description Displays the EIRP values for a mobile at each bin that are required to close the uplink. This is calculated as follows: Required EIRP = Required PA Power + Mobile Antenna Gain = Required Eb/No - Processing Gain + Penetration Loss + Masked Pathloss + Noise Rise + Composite Noise Figure + kTB The composite noise figure is taken from the link budget for the sector (and, optionally, the carrier). See Calculating base station link budgets for W-CDMA sectors on page 87. The required mobile EIRP will vary for different subscriber types. Displays the difference between the maximum possible mobile EIRP and the actual required EIRP for each bin Displays the best server cell load for each bin. The load at a bin is the cell loading of the uplink best server for that bin. Displays the mean uplink throughput for each bin. Displays the coverage probability for each bearer specified in the analysis. Displays the maximum achieved data rates over the analysis area.
Uplink - Mobile EIRP Margin Uplink - Load
Uplink - Throughput Uplink - Bearer Coverage Uplink - Max Achievable Coverage
Throughput will only exist in areas where CPICH coverage and path balance exists.
Handover analysis
Handover analysis layers (see Table 8.5) enable you to determine the handover status of each sector included in an analysis. For more information on how handover and soft handover occur, see Appendix A: Modeling WCDMA Networks on page 513.
164
All handover calculations are based on the Handover Margin value defined on the Quality panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see To define quality settings on page 104.
Table 8.5 Handover analysis layers Layer Handover - Status Description Displays the handover state of each sector within the analysis area. The handover states are: Not in handover (N)there is only one available server Soft handover (S)the subscriber is served by two sectors from two different sites Softer handover (SS)the subscriber is served by two sectors from the same site Softer-Soft handover (SS-S)the subscriber is served by three sectors. The subscribers best server and either the second or third best server is situated at one site and the remaining server is at another site. Soft-Softer handover (S-SS)the subscriber is served by three sectors. The subscribers best server is situated at one site and the next two best servers are situated at another site. Soft-Soft handover (S-S)all three servers are located at different sites Softer-Softer (SSS)the subscriber is served by three sectors, all from the same site 4 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by four sectors (irrespective of the sites) 5 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by five sectors (irrespective of the sites) 6 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by six sectors (irrespective of the sites) 7 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by seven sectors (irrespective of the sites) Displays the uplink soft handover gain at each bin. The gain is produced by the ability of the subscribers and sites to operate at a lower power value when engaged in soft handover and still meet the system quality requirements for the FER. Displays the total number of serving sectors (i.e., the sectors in soft handover) Displays the total number of serving sites (i.e., the sites where sectors are in soft handover)
Handover - Soft Handover Gain
Handover - Active Server Count Handover - Active Site Count
165
Other analysis
The path balance analysis layer (see Table 8.6) enables you to determine whether coverage has been achieved on both the uplink and downlink paths.
Table 8.6 Path balance analysis layer Layer Other - Path Balance Description Displays the balance between the downlink and uplink. The downlink is considered covered at a bin if both CPICH coverage and service coverage are achieved. Path balance is achieved when the probability of both the uplink and downlink coverage is equal to or greater than the Cell Edge Coverage Probability value in the Circuit Switched Service or Packet Switched Service dialog box. See Defining service types for W-CDMA on page 70. The combined coverage probability for the downlink and uplink (Downlink - Coverage Probability layer and Uplink Coverage Probability layer). For each pixel, the combined probability layer represents the minimum probability of the two layers.
Other - Combined Probability
Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

Step 1
Ensure that you have defined a traffic map for the subscriber types that covers the same area as your Monte Carlo analysis. See Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA on page 77 and Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Optionally, generate a rapid planning analysis. See Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131. Define prediction view settings. See Optimizing W-CDMA analyses on page 167. Create a new W-CDMA analysis. See Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA on page 171. Define settings and generate a Monte Carlo analysis. See Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA on page 172.
Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5
166
Step 6
View and interpret discrete subscriber information and operating points. See Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA on page 184 and Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227. If required, generate additional runs. See Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis on page 187. Define, generate, and view analysis layers. See

Step 7 Step 8
Defining W-CDMA analysis layers on page 188 Generating W-CDMA analysis layers on page 190 Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers on page 191
Step 9
Generate statistical reports for analysis layers. See Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227.
Optimizing W-CDMA analyses

You can optimize analysis speed or disk space usage by choosing whether or not to use prediction view files. Using prediction view files is optional and your decision should be based on a consideration of the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case. By default, when you generate an analysis, prediction view files are created. Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin. Using prediction view files results in faster analyses because Mentum Planet only reads one file to access information about signal strength for all potential servers. If you do not use prediction view files, Mentum Planet opens individual prediction files to query signal strength. However, prediction view files occupy additional disk space and can take a significant amount of time to generate initially, especially if you are working with multi-resolution predictions over a large area. Prediction view files work at a single resolution. If you are analyzing a large area with mostly low resolution data and small amounts of higher resolution data, the disk space requirements can be significantly higher than the combined disk space requirements of the prediction data if the analysis is carried out at the higher resolution. This is because the prediction view files will be created at the higher resolution over the entire area. Also, separate
167
prediction views are created for each of the required analysis resolutions, which can further add to disk space requirements. For example, an area that is 100 km x 100 km with a 10-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 2 GB of disk space for prediction view files, whereas an area that is 200 km x 200 km with a 5-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 32 GB of disk space for prediction view files.
To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings

1 2 Choose Edit Project Settings. In the Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab.
In the CDMA Analysis Optimization section, do the following to define the number of predictions considered at each location (especially in calculating total downlink interference) and specify the maximum pathloss:
In the Maximum Number of Predictions box, type a value for the number of overlapping predictions considered at each location when you generate analyses. Limiting the number of overlapping predictions is useful in situations such as a dense urban area where there are thousands of overlapping predictions,
168
but the total interference is dominated by a small number of the strongest signals. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it.
In the Maximum Pathloss box, type a value for the maximum pathloss that will be considered (within the Maximum Number of Predictions restriction). This value enables you to exclude weak signals from your analyses. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it.
Click OK.
Defining default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings

If you want to use the same settings for a number of Monte Carlo analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.
To define default W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis settings

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Default W-CDMA Analysis Settings. Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK. For more information defining analysis settings, see the following sections:
To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA on page 172 To choose the subscriber types for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis on page 175 To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for W-CDMA on page 179 To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA on page 177
169
Defining default analysis layers for W-CDMA

After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, nodes are created in the Project Explorer under the W-CDMA analysis name for the carriers, subscriber types, usage types, and environments that were included in the analysis. W-CDMA analysis layers are generated for each environment under the usage type. By default, all of the available W-CDMA analysis layers are generated. If you have a large project, to avoid lengthy generation times, you can omit layers that you do not need using the W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter. The W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter enables you to define a default list of analysis layers that will be available for all of the W-CDMA analyses that you create for the current project.
To define the default W-CDMA analysis layer list

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Analysis Layer Filter.
In the W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK. For more information on each analysis layer, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159.
170
Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the W-CDMA Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project. Rapid planning is a quicker analysis method than Monte Carlo, but does not provide the detailed subscriber information that a Monte Carlo analysis does. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131.
A W-CDMA analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the W-CDMA technology. If you want to perform analyses for carriers assigned to a TDMA/FDMA technology, you must create a TDMA/FDMA analysis under the TDMA/FDMA Analyses node. For more information, see Chapter 7, Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide. If you want to generate network analyses at the same resolution as predictions created using either the Volcano or WaveSight propagation models, you need to specify the resolution of the analyses in the Analysis Resolution box and choose an elevation file and, optionally, a clutter file, that uses the same resolution as the predictions on the Advanced tab in the Propagation Model Editor.
To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose New Network Analysis. The W-CDMA Analysis dialog box opens.
171
2 3 4
In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis. In the Description box, type a description of the analysis. From the Analysis Mode list, choose Monte Carlo, and click OK. A new W-CDMA analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.
If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node, choose Select Sectors, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use and click Continue. If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA on page 183.
Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA

You define the settings for the Monte Carlo analysis using the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box. When you are satisfied with the settings, you can generate the analysis directly from this dialog box.
To define Monte Carlo system settings for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate. The W-CDMA Simulation dialog box opens. 2 In the tree view, choose System.
172
If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effect of power control imperfections or errors, on the System panel, enable the Simulate Power Control Errors check box. For more information on defining power control settings, see To define power control settings for W-CDMA on page 39. For general information on controlling interference using power controls, see Appendix A: Modeling W-CDMA Networks on page 513.
If you want to calculate soft handover within the Monte Carlo simulation to limit macro-diversity soft handover gain, enable the Use Soft Handover Gain check box. If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handover will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handover gain is not taken into account for the uplink link analysis for the mobile.
173
If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effects of slow fading, enable the Model Slow Fading check box. For more information on slow fading, see How slow fading is modeled on page 517.
From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer. The CPICH - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the fourth best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the fourth best server is causing any significant interference for the best server.
Choose another item in the tree view.
174
To choose the subscriber types for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis

1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view.
2 3
On the Subscribers panel, enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include in the simulation. Choose another item in the tree view.
To define Simulation Area settings for W-CDMA

The simulation area controls traffic spreading for Monte Carlo analyses.
175
In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Simulation Area in the tree view.
On the Simulation Area panel, choose one of the following options:
Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictionsindicates that the simulation area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis Use Analysis Boundsenables you to specify x and y coordinates to limit the extent of the simulation. Do one of the following:
Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes Click Update Bounds With Active View. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window. In the Simulation Resolution box, type a value for the resolution of the simulation.
176
For more information on this box, press the F1 key. 4 Choose another item in the tree view.
To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA

1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters in the tree view.
On the Runtime Parameters panel, in the Analysis Target section, do one of the following:
To enable the simulation to run a specific number of times, choose the Use Fixed Number of Runs option and type a value in the Number of Runs box. To enable the simulation to run until a convergence target is reached, choose the Use Convergence Achieved option and type a value in the Convergence Required box.
177
To enable the simulation to run until both the specified number of runs have completed and the convergence target has been reached, choose the Use Number of Runs and Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes. To enable the simulation to run until either the specified number of runs have completed or the convergence target has been reached (whichever comes first), choose the Use Number of Runs or Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes.
For more information on these settings, see Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs on page 152. 3 In the Options section, do any of the following:
To collect information about discrete subscribers that you can display once the analysis is complete, enable the Collect Discrete Information check box. For more information on displaying discrete subscriber information, see Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA on page 184. To automatically generate W-CDMA analysis layers when the Monte Carlo runs are complete, enable the Automatically Generate Layers check box. By default, the analysis layers that are enabled in the W-CDMA Analysis Layer Filter dialog box are generated. If you do not enable this check box, you can still generate layers after the Monte Carlo runs are complete. For more information on generating analysis layers and the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, see Generating W-CDMA analysis layers on page 190.
178
To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for W-CDMA

1 In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the tree view.
179
On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:
Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictionsindicates that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis Use Analysis Boundsenables you to specify x and y coordinates to limit the extent of the simulation. Do one of the following: Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes Click Update Bounds With Active View. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window. Use An Analysis Gridenables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. This option is useful to ensure that the analysis area remains the same over repeated analyses. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, Working with the Grid Manager, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.

180
Defining discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA

You can define different colors for each coverage state associated with a subscriber and for each subscriber type defined. Coverage states are:
Served, Not NegotiatedThe subscriber was served at the maximum data rate on both the downlink and uplink. Served, Downlink NegotiatedThe subscriber was served but the downlink was not at the maximum data rate although the uplink was. Served, Uplink NegotiatedThe subscriber was served but the uplink was not at the maximum data rate although the downlink was. Served, NegotiatedThe subscriber was served but neither the uplink or downlinkwere at the maximum data rate. Mobile PA PowerThe subscriber was dropped because the mobile PA power was not sufficient to achieve the Eb/No target on the uplink. Noise RiseThe subscriber was dropped because the mobile signal caused one or more sectors to exceed its noise rise limit. Channel ElementsThe subscriber was dropped because there were insufficient channel elements available on the serving sector. User LimitThe subscriber was dropped because the maximum user limit was reached on the serving sector. Sector PA PowerThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient PA power at the serving sector. Traffic PowerThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient traffic power on the downlink to meet the subscribers Eb/No target. CPICH PowerThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient CPICH power on the downlink, which means that the CPICH power was not sufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile. Unknown Drop StateThe subscriber was dropped for an unknown reason. Code LimitThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient codes on the downlink.
181
Cell Radius LimitThe subscriber was dropped because he or she was outside of the maximum cell radius for the serving sector. Speed LimitThe subscriber was dropped because he or she exceeded the speed limit for the sector. Throughput LimitThe subscriber was dropped because the throughput limit for the serving site was exceeded.
To define discrete subscriber display settings for W-CDMA

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Discrete Subscriber Preferences. The Discrete Subscriber Preferences dialog box opens.
182
If you want to change the color used for a coverage state, do the following:
Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the coverage state. In the Color dialog box, choose or define the color, and click OK.
If you want to change the properties for the symbol that is displayed in the Map window for a subscriber type, do the following:
Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the subscriber type. In the Symbol Style dialog box, modify the symbol properties and click OK.
For more information on the Symbol Style dialog box, press the F1 key.
Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

Once you have finished defining settings for an analysis, you can generate it directly from the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box.
To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA

1 Define the settings on each panel in the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box as described in Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA on page 172. In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, click Analyze. If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis, and click Continue. If you chose to generate layers automatically, in the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK. A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the dialog box closes and the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include each subscriber type and carrier in the analysis. If you chose to generate layers automatically, the layers are generated and displayed in the Project Explorer under the analysis. If you did not
2 3
183
generate layers automatically, you can generate them as a separate step. See Generating W-CDMA analysis layers on page 190.
If you cancel an analysis generation before it has completed, the number of runs completed and the convergence level achieved (if applicable) are indicated at the bottom of the Runtime Parameters panel of the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box.
Adding an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node

If you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the W-CDMA Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project.
To add an existing analysis to the W-CDMA Analyses node

1 2 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the W-CDMA_Analyses folder in the current project folder. In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses. The list of analyses updates to show the new analysis.
Viewing discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA

If you chose to collect information about discrete subscribers during the Monte Carlo simulation (see To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA on page 177), the status of each subscriber is automatically displayed in the Map window when the simulation completes. The coverage
184
states are displayed using the colors that you chose in the Discrete Subscribers Preferences dialog box.
If you generate multiple runs for a Monte Carlo simulation, the discrete subscriber information that is displayed automatically applies only to the last run. If you want to view discrete subscriber information that applies to all runs in a Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Display Discrete Subscribers. The Display Discrete Subscribers command will not work if you have cleared the Visible check box for the analysis in the Windows category of the Project Explorer.
The discrete subscriber information from each run of the analysis is stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) in the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of your project using the naming convention <AnalysisName>_<Run Number>. You can also display discrete subscriber information in a tabular form using a new Browser window. For more information on the columns and format of the table, see Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 523.
To display discrete subscriber information for W-CDMA in table format

1 2 Choose File Open Table. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the W-CDMA_Analyses folder of your project and choose the MapInfo table (.tab file) that you want to display. From the Preferred View list, choose Browser. Click Open. The discrete subscriber table opens in a new Browser window.
3 4
Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map

When you view discrete subscribers, you may notice a high number of subscribers who are not being served by a particular sector. In order to better understand the reason behind this, you can create a traffic map of unserved subscribers. Using the Grid Info tool, you can determine how much unserved traffic there is at a particular bin. If your network consists of a 3G technology
185
overlaid on a 2G technology, you can use the unserved subscriber traffic map in a network analysis of the 2G network layer.
Before creating an unserved subscriber traffic map, you must have generated a Monte Carlo analysis and collected discrete subscriber information. For the traffic map to contain meaningful values, the Monte Carlo analysis should consist of several runs.
To create an unserved subscriber traffic map

1 Do one of the following in the Project Explorer:
In the Project Data category, right-click the Traffic Maps node and choose Create Unserved Traffic Map from Monte-Carlo Analysis. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the Monte Carlo analysis from which you want to create the unserved subscriber traffic map and choose Unserved Subscriber Traffic Map.
2 3 4
In the Unserved Subscribers Traffic Map Generator dialog box, in the Traffic Map Output Name box, type a name for the traffic map. In the Subscriber Types section, enable the check boxes next to the subscriber types for which you want to view the unserved subscribers. Click Generate. The traffic map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category.
Right-click the generated map and do any of the following:
To view the map, right-click the generated map and choose View. To update the traffic information for the sectors with traffic information from a traffic map, choose Capture. To combine multiple compatible traffic maps into one new traffic map, choose Combine. To scale the traffic values in a traffic map, choose Scale.
Use the Zoom-In tool to zoom in on individual areas of the map and better view unserved subscribers.
186
Generating additional runs for a W-CDMA Monte Carlo analysis

After viewing the operating points (see Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227) and discrete subscriber information, you might determine that additional runs are required to achieve greater accuracy. You can modify the runtime parameters of an existing analysis and perform additional runs. The new results are added to the operating points of the final run of the existing analysis.
If you make changes to your project outside of the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box (for example, if you modify the usages assigned to a subscriber type in the Subscribers category in the Project Explorer) these changes will not be reflected in the additional runs.
To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for W-CDMA

1 2 3 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate. In the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters in the tree view. On the Runtime Parameters panel as required, do one of the following:
If you originally used the Fixed Number of Runs option, increase the number of runs. If you originally used the Convergence Achieved option, modify the convergence value.
For more information, see To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA on page 177. 4 5 If you want to change the settings in the Options section, enable or clear the check boxes as required. Click Append.
Updating W-CDMA rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results
Once you have generated a Monte Carlo simulation, you have the option of using the results of the simulation to update the target values for Uplink DPCH Noise Rise and Downlink Total Traffic Power on the Sector Settings -
187
Implementation panel. These values are used in rapid planning. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131.
If you apply cell loads and there is 0 required traffic for a carrier-sector, a value of -200 dBm is applied to the Downlink Total Traffic Power box on the Sector Settings - Implementation panel.
To update W-CDMA target values

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click a Monte Carlo analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Apply Cell Loads. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The rapid planning settings are updated for all sectors in the group chosen for the analysis.
Defining W-CDMA analysis layers

If you chose not to generate layers automatically as part of the analysis, you can generate them afterward. To manage the analysis layers for an individual analysis, you can use the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box to define the availability of analysis layers for each environment. This enables you to generate the same analysis layers for all of the environments, or different analysis layers for different environments.
You can also generate W-CDMA analysis layers at the same time as operating points and subscriber information. For more information, see To define runtime parameter settings for W-CDMA on page 177.
188
To define the W-CDMA analysis layers to use in an analysis

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the W-CDMA Analysis node and choose Layers. The W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box opens, showing nodes for each carrier, subscriber type, quality, and environment, and the layers that are available for each.
If the check box is enabled for a node, all of the layers that apply to the node will be generated. If the check box is cleared, no layers that apply to the node will be generated. If the check box contains a black square, only some of the layers that apply to the node will be generated. You can expand the nodes to view which layers are chosen.
189
In the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box, expand the environment nodes, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK. This dialog box includes only the default analysis layers you chose in the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box. To modify the default analysis layers, see To define the default W-CDMA analysis layer list on page 170. For more information on each analysis layer, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159.
You can generate the W-CDMA analysis layers directly from the W-CDMA Analysis Layers dialog box by clicking Generate.
Generating W-CDMA analysis layers

Once you have defined the analysis layers, you can generate the analysis.
To generate W-CDMA analysis layers
In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the W-CDMA Analyses node and choose Generate Layers. A dialog box opens that displays the status of the operation. Any errors are displayed in a separate dialog box. If required, path loss and signal strength predictions are updated during the analysis.

190

1 2 3 4 5 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions that you want to use. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis and choose Select Sectors. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose Flags Filter and click Continue. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis you want to generate and choose Generate. Define the analysis settings as described in as described in Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for W-CDMA on page 172, and then follow the procedure described in To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA on page 183.
Viewing W-CDMA analysis layers

Once you have generated an analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.
To view W-CDMA analysis layers

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the W-CDMA Analyses node, expand the carrier, subscriber type, usage type, and environment for which you want to view analysis layers. Right-click an analysis and choose View. The analysis layer is displayed in the Map window.
If you rename an analysis in the Project Explorer, any layers currently open or displayed in the Map window will be closed. To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the W-CDMA Analysis node, right-click an analysis layer, and choose Remove. You can obtain statistical and composite reports for the analysis layers using the Layer Statistics Analysis tool. For more information, see Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports on page 227.
191
Recoloring best serving sector layers

The Best Serving Sector Recolor tool enables you to change the color scheme used to display best serving sector analysis layers (classified grid files). You can use the colors defined in a sector display scheme or choose from the default color schemes used to display TDMA/FDMA and CDMA best serving sector analysis layers. Sector display schemes enable you to display analysis layers based on sector properties, such as the forward link load for CDMA technologies or carried traffic for TDMA/FDMA technologies. When you use a sector display scheme with the Best Serving Sector Recolor tool, only the colors that have been defined for the scheme are used; other sector display scheme settings, such as symbol and size, are ignored. For information about defining sector display schemes, see Customizing sector symbols for multiple sites in Chapter 2, Working With Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To recolor best serving sector layers

1 Choose Tools Best Serving Sector Recolor. The Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box opens.
Click Browse, navigate to the WCDMA_Analysis project folder, choose the best serving sector layer (.grc) file that you want to recolor, and then click Open.
192
In the Select Sector Display Scheme section, choose a color scheme and click Apply. The best serving sector layers are displayed in the Map window using the new color scheme.
You can modify an existing sector display scheme from within in the Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box by right-clicking a local or shared scheme and choosing Edit.
Deleting analyses
To delete analyses

Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for W-CDMA

You can obtain per-pixel information about a W-CDMA analysis by selecting an area in the Map window and using the CDMA Pixel Info tool.
The CDMA Pixel Info tool is available only for Monte Carlo analyses.
193
For each subscriber type and carrier that you choose, the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box displays:

the pixel co-ordinates (location) the number of predictions available uplink details, including: Best Server Required ERP ERP Margin Coverage Probability downlink details, including:

Service Best Server Service Eb/No and Service Margin Coverage Probability Received Noise CPICH details, including:

received power Ec/Io masked path loss polluter indicator and server status at the specified pixel location
To obtain per-pixel information about a W-CDMA analysis

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand W-CDMA Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to obtain per-pixel information and choose Pixel Info. The CDMA Pixel Info dialog box opens. The Type box displays the technology for which the analysis that you chose was generated. The Analysis box displays the analysis for which you chose to display pixel information.
194
From the SubCat list, choose the usage type for which you want to view analysis information. Usage types are defined for a subscriber type, and consist of a service type, quality, and environments. Usage types are displayed in the SubCat list using the syntax of <short name> <first letter of the environment name>. In the example above, Voice is the short name and I indicates that the environment is Indoor. For more information on usage types, see Defining subscriber types for W-CDMA on page 77.
3 4 5
From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to view analysis information. Click in the Map window to display analysis information for each pixel in the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box. Click Close.
You can also access the CDMA Pixel Info tool by clicking the CDMA Pixel Info button on the Mobile Technology toolbar.
195
Analyzing CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors

CPICH pollution occurs when there is an excessive number of pilot signals with high power levels. CPICH pollution can create high levels of interference, resulting in dropped calls, poor voice quality, and poor data throughput. The CPICH Pollution Inspector enables you to identify polluting sectors at specific locations, modify the appropriate sector settings, and then view the effects of your changes. The level of CPICH pollution is analyzed by comparing the powers of the pilot channels with the power of the best serving pilot channel, taking into account the active set (the set of pilots currently participating in the call) and the CPICH pollution margin. Before you use the CPICH Pollution Inspector, you need to identify the areas that may be affected by CPICH pollution. For example, you can generate a Rapid Planning or Monte Carlo analysis and examine the CPICH - Delta Ec/ Io layer. You can also use drive test data or network data to identify potential problem areas. When you click a location in a Map window, the CPICH Pollution Inspector analyzes the location for pilot pollution based on specific carrier, downlink loading, and subscriber settings. You can use settings from a network analysis or define these settings in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box. For a specified location, the CPICH Pollution Inspector displays the following information in a graph window:

Best serving sector soft handover sectors polluting sectors (if any)
Horizontal lines in the graph window indicate the threshold levels for the best serving, handover, and polluting sectors. You can define the number of polluting sectors that are displayed in the graph window, as well as the colors and pilot value (Ec/Io or Ec) used for the display. Additional location and sector information is displayed in the Analysis Info section (see Figure 8.1).
196
Threshold levels Graph display of analyzed sectors
Location and analysis information
Figure 8.1 CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box
In the Mentum Planet Map window, lines are drawn from the specified analysis location to each of the corresponding sectors: Best Server, Handover, CPICH Polluter, and CPICH Detected (see Figure 8.2). The color of the lines corresponds to the colors used in the graph window of the CPICH Pollution Inspector.
197
Figure 8.2 Map window displaying the CPICH - Delta Ec/Io analysis layer. For the specified location, the CPICH Pollution Inspector adds lines indicating the best serving sector (green), handover sectors (yellow), and polluting sectors (red).
After you have identified the polluting sectors, you can leave the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box open, use the Site Properties dialog box to change the antenna downtilt, azimuth, or height for the polluting sectors, and then update the display in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box to see the effects of your changes.
Workflow for analyzing CPICH pollution

Minimizing CPICH pollution is an iterative process; you may need to repeat the steps in the workflow to achieve the desired results. The workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order.
Step 1
Generate a Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis or use drive test data to identify potential polluters. See Generating a rapid planning analysis for W-CDMA on page 146 or Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for W-CDMA on page 183. Use the CPICH Pollution Inspector to identify polluters.
Step 2
198
Modify the configuration of polluter sectors. See Editing sites and sectors on page 107. Regenerate predictions for the modified sectors. See Chapter 8, Generating Predictions, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Use the CPICH Pollution Inspector to verify the improvements. Generate an additional Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis to evaluate the overall impact of the sector configuration changes.
To analyze CPICH pollution for W-CDMA sectors

1 Do one of the following to open the CPICH Pollution Inspector:
In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis and choose CPICH Pollution Inspector. On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the CPICH Pollution Inspector button, click an area in the Map window, then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis and click Continue.
The CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box opens. If you open the CPICH Pollution Inspector from an analysis node in the Project Explorer, the sector, subscriber, carrier, and loading information from the analysis is used. You can use the settings from the analysis or edit them as required, as outlined in this procedure. 2 On the System tab, from the Carrier list, choose the carrier that you want to analyze. If you opened the CPICH Pollution Inspector from an analysis node, the first carrier included in the analysis is chosen by default. 3 In the Forward Loading section, choose one of the following options to define the forward loading that will be used for the analysis:
Use the Loading Defined in the Sector Settingsuses the DCH Total Traffic Power value specified on the Implementation panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see Defining W-CDMA sector settings on page 96. Use Global Loadingtype a value to define the percentage of the total PA power that will be used for the analysis. This value
199
will override the total traffic power defined for individual sectors.
Use Loading From Analysischoose an analysis from the list. The forward loading values from the analysis will be used.
4 5
Click the Subscribers tab. Choose one of the following options to define the subscriber type that will be used for the CPICH pollution analysis:
Subscriber Typechoose a predefined subscriber type from the list. Nominal Subscribertype values for each of the following:
6 7 8
Antenna Gainthe antenna gain for the mobile equipment band type used by the nominal subscriber Maximum Active Serversthe maximum number of handover servers supported by the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber Noise Figurethe noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber From the Environment list, choose the type of environment that will be used for the analysis.

Click the Analysis Settings tab. In the Maximum Polluters box, type the number of polluting sectors that you want displayed in the CPICH Pollution Inspector graph window and the Map window. From the Pilot Value list, choose the value that you want to use for the display in the graph window.
10 If you want to change the colors used in the graph window, in the Legend Profile section, do any of the following:
To edit the current color settings, click Edit, define the colors for the sector categories, and then click OK. To load an existing legend color profile, click Load, choose a Pilot Inspector color (.pic) file, and then click Open. To save the current legend color profile, click Save, type a name in the File Name box, and then click Save.
200
11 Click on a location in the Map window that you have identified as being affected by CPICH pollution. The CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box displays CPICH pollution information for the location. 12 If you want to save a report containing information for the location currently displayed in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box, click Export Report, type a name in the File Name box, and then click Save. The location and pollution information is saved in a Microsoft Excel file.
After you have clicked an area in the Map window, you can modify any of the System, Subscriber, or Analysis Settings and then click Update to refresh the information displayed in the CPICH Pollution Inspector dialog box based on the new settings.
201
202
9.
Chapter 9: Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers
Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers

This chapter describes High Speed Downlink Packet Access (HSDPA) analysis layers as well as High Speed Uplink Packet Access analysis layers, and explains how to generate them. You must have a license for HSDPA and HSUPA in order to generate analysis layers.
Understanding HSDPA in Mentum Planet Workflow for generating HSDPA analysis layers Understanding HSUPA in Mentum Planet Workflow for generating HSPA analysis layers
203
Understanding HSDPA in Mentum Planet

High Speed Downlink Packet Data Access (HSDPA) is a high-speed, downlink-only shared channel used for packet data in primarily urban or indoor environments. In real-world networks, the dynamic power allocation ability available using HSDPA results in more subscribers being served and cell power being used more efficiently. Unlike Release 99, where unused power is lost, with HSDPA the unused power is used to optimize network capacity as shown in Figure 9.1 and Figure 9.2.
Power
Unused power Total cell power
Dedicated channels (power controlled)
Common channels
t Figure 9.1 In Release 99, unused power is lost
204
Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers CDMA User Guide
Power
HS-DSCH (rate controlled) Total cell power
Dedicated channels (power controlled)
Common channels
t Figure 9.2 HSDPA, through the use of the HS-DSCH channel, utilizes unused power to maximize network efficiency
To generate HSDPA analysis layers, you need to assign either the Rel 99 & HSDPA or HSDPA carrier type on the Carriers panel in the Network Settings dialog box (see To define carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 40) and assign the carriers to sectors in your project (see To assign carriers to sectors on page 99). HSDPA analysis layers include only sectors that are assigned Rel 99 & HSDPA and HSDPA carriers, and consist of standard Rel 99 analysis layers as well as layers that are specific to HSDPA. For more information, see HSDPA analysis layers on page 208 and W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159. For information on configuring and generating network analyses, see Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131 and Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149.
HSDPA Monte Carlo analysis

In HSDPA, the following channels are defined and accounted for in a Monte Carlo analysis:
HS-DSCH (High-Speed Downlink Shared Channel)carries downlink data. Power is allocated dynamically. Defined on the Implementation panel in the Sector Settings dialog box. Within a Monte Carlo analysis, the maximum data rate for a served
205
subscriber is determined by the received HS-DSCH Ec/Nt and the corresponding data rate for the terminal category.
HS-SCCH (High-Speed Shared Control Channel)controls scheduling. Power is user defined and relative to the CPICH power. Defined on the Powers panel in the Sector Settings dialog box. A-DCH (Associated Dedicated Channel)carries uplink packet data associated with the HS-DSCH channel. There is one A-DCH channel associated with every served subscriber. Uplink A-DCH bearers support 64,128 and 384 Kbps.
Modeling HSDPA discrete subscribers
HSDPA discrete subscribers are modeled within a Monte Carlo analysis on both the uplink and the downlink. The number of subscribers spread during an analysis is based on the selected traffic map and the defined input load. The maximum number of HSDPA users allowed per sector is limited by the quality parameters you specify. HSDPA terminal categories are also modeled during an analysis when an A-DCH (Associated Dedicated Channel) uplink bearer is assigned to the sector. The icon next to the Technology Band in the Subscriber Manager of the Project Explorer identifies HSDPA capable terminals. Terminal categories add support for more codes and modulation types thus enabling additional achievable maximum data rates.
In this release of Mentum Planet, only HSDPA terminal categories 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, and 12 are modeled.
Downlink analysis
When you generate a network analysis using Rel 99 & HSDPA or HSDPA carriers, Mentum Planet first evaluates the amount of power used by overhead and dedicated Rel 99 channels. This power is then subtracted from the total PA power minus the PA threshold for the carrier, defined on the Carriers tab in the Network Settings dialog box. The PA threshold acts as a hard limit for the calculated power of the HSDPA part of a carrier, which represents the unused PA power up to the PA threshold. This is unlike Rel 99 power, where the PA threshold is only a soft limit; which will be breached if subscribers need to be served up to the total PA power.
206
Ec/Nt, which represents the ratio of the high-speed downlink shared channel (HS-DSCH) energy per symbol to the total spectral noise density, is then calculated for 1 code throughout the simulation area. The coverage probability for each one of the transport format and resource combinations (TFRC) selected is calculated for the desired number of HSDPA codes. Additionally, the TFRC selection algorithm will select the maximum achievable data rate provided by a TFRC/Number of Codes combination based on quality indicators that reflect the channel conditions, represented by Ec/Nt. Table 9.1 shows the available HSDPA data rates based on the TFRC and number of codes.
Table 9.1 Downlink data rates for HSDPA TFRC Modulation Code rate 1 code 1 2 3 4 5 QPSK QPSK QPSK 16QAM 16QAM 1/4 1/2 3/4 1/2 3/4 .119 .237 .356 .477 .712 Data Rate (mbps) 5 codes .595 1.185 1.780 2.385 3.560 10 codes 1.190 2.370 3.560 4.770 7.120 15 codes 1.785 3.555 5.340 7.155 10.680
Uplink analysis
To model the uplink noise associated with HS-DSCH channels, a Monte Carlo analysis of Rel 99 & HSDPA and HSDPA carriers requires the use of the Average PRACH Interference Power value from the Powers panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. The A-DCH channel is also modeled using 64, 128 or 384 kbps bearers. The use of the A-DCH channel add flexibility and gives you more codes and modulations to choose from. For a Rapid Planning analysis of Rel 99 & HSDPA and HSDPA carriers, the Uplink DPCH Noise Rise on the Implementation panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box includes the uplink noise rise associated with HSDSCH channels; that is in addition to uplink Rel 99 DCH channels in the case of Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers. The uplink layers generated for a DCH service are equally applicable to an HS-DSCH service with the same uplink noise (load) parameters.
207
HSDPA analysis layers

When you generate an HSDPA analysis, you can create most of the standard W-CDMA analysis layers. You can also generate HSDPA analysis layers for any combination of TFRC and HS-DSCH codes. For example, to model an HSDPA terminal capable only of QPSK modulation and up to 5 codes, you would enable TFRC 1, 2, and 3 and then enable 1 and 5 codes on the HSDPA panel in the Network Settings dialog box. Using these settings, the following HSDPA coverage probability layers can be generated:

HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 1 for 1 Code HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 1 for 5 Codes HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 2 for 1 Code HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 2 for 5 Codes HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 3 for 1 Code HSDPA - Downlink Coverage For TFRC 3 for 5 Codes
For information about standard W-CDMA analysis layers, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159.
If you are using only HSDPA carriers, not all of the standard W-CDMA downlink analysis layers will be generated. You can only generate a full set of downlink layers if you are using Rel 99 or Rel 99 & HSDPA carriers.
208
Generating HSDPA and HSUPA Analysis Layers CDMA User Guide Table 9.2 HSDPA analysis layers Layer Description
HS-DSCH - Max Achievable Data Rate Displays the predicted highest achievable forward link data rate per bin (see Table 9.1). This rate is automatically selected from those provided by the chosen combinations of TRFC and HS-DSCH codes in the Network Settings dialog box. The data rate prediction is based on the predicted Ec/Nt and the slow fade margin that is required to ensure a certain level of coverage probability. The slow fade margin required depends on the coverage probability requirement and the slow fading standard deviation assumptions. When predicting the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate, the required fade margin is computed at each bin, and then a coverage probability is calculated for each data rate according the required Ec/Nt threshold, predicted Ec/Nt and the fade margin. For each bin, the data rates with coverage probabilities lower than the required threshold are considered as having no coverage in the bin. There may be more than one data rate for which the coverage probabilities are above the coverage probability requirement. In this case, the highest data rate is considered as the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate for the bin. HS-DSCH Ec/Nt Displays the ratio of HS-DSCH symbol energy to total spectral noise density for each bin. Ec/Nt is derived from the predicted Ec/Nt. The mobile constantly measures this parameter in order to predict the highest achievable data rate over next the packet. During an HSDPA analysis, the forward SINR represented by Ec/Nt for 1 code is computed for each bin according to the signal predictions of the serving sector, its HS-DSCH power, and the total output power and signal predictions of all other interfering sectors. The values in this layer represent the best SINR in an ideal situation. HS-DSCH - Coverage for TFRC <number> for <number> Codes Displays a coverage map for each HSDPA data rate provided by the chosen combinations of TRFC and HS-DSCH codes in the Network Settings dialog box (see Table 9.1). HS-DSCH - Cell Throughput Displays the average HS-DSCH throughput on a per-sector basis. This layer is only generated for Monte-Carlo analyses. HS-SCCH - Best Server Displays the coverage area of each sector supporting HSDPA when CPICH coverage and HS-SCCH coverage are achieved.
209
Chapter 9 CDMA User Guide Table 9.2 HSDPA analysis layers (continued) Layer Description
HS-SCCH - EIRP Margin Displays the difference between the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt and the HS-SCCH Ec/Nt target. HS - SCCH Ec/Nt Displays the ratio of the high-speed downlink shared channel (HSDSCH) energy per chip to the total spectral noise density. HS - SCCH Coverage Displays the downlink coverage of the High Speed Shared Control Channel based on the HS-SCCH target Ec/Nt threshold.
210
Workflow for generating HSDPA analysis layers

Step 1
Assign the Rel 99 & HSDPA or HSDPA technology to at least one W-CDMA carrier and define HSDPA technology settings for the network. See To define carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 40 and To define HSDPA network settings for W-CDMA on page 42. Assign Rel 99 & HSDPA and/or HSDPA carriers to at least one sector in your project, and define HSDPA settings for the sector. See To assign carriers to sectors on page 99 and Editing sites and sectors on page 107. Generate an analysis, ensuring that you choose the HSDPA carrier, and view the results. See Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131 and Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149.
Step 2
Step 3
Understanding HSUPA in Mentum Planet

High Speed Uplink Packet Data Access (HSUPA) is based on high-speed, uplink-only dedicated channels used for packet data in primarily urban or indoor environments. It is always used in tandem with HSDPA (on the downlink) and provides high uplink data rates resulting in more subscribers being served and cell power being used more efficiently. Figure 9.3 on page 212 illustrates how resources are shared within an HSUPA channel. HSUPA offers similar enhancements on the uplink as those provided by HSDPA on the downlink. The carrier name, HSPA, reflects that both technologies are used and both technologies are added to the tree view when HSPA is chosen in the Network Settings dialog box.
211
The main differences between the implementation of HSDPA and HSUPA are:
In HSUPA, the shared resource is the interference headroom whereas in HSDPA the shared resource is the transmission power and the code space. In HSUPA, traffic is carried on a dedicated channel with time multiplexing whereas in HSDPA traffic is carried on dedicated channels with no time multiplexing. In HSUPA, a constant transmission power rate adaptation is implemented to deal with the non orthogonality of signals (i.e., fast power control is required). In HSUPA, soft handover is supported on the uplink to limit the amount of interference generated by neighboring cells; thus power control from multiple cells is allowed.
Maximum Allowable Interference
HSUPA Interference Headroom Interference Level
Rel99 In-Cell Interference Inter Cell Interference Thermal Noise
Figure 9.3 In HSUPA, the maximum allowable interference level is exploited in order to allow the highest data rate transfer possible.
To generate HSPA analysis layers, you need to assign either the Rel 99 & HSPA or HSPA carrier type on the Carriers panel in the Network Settings dialog box (see To define carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 40) and assign the carriers to sectors in your project (see To assign carriers to sectors on page 99).
212
HSPA analysis layers include only sectors that are assigned Rel 99 & HSPA and HSPA carriers, and consist of standard Rel 99 analysis layers as well as layers that are specific to HSUPA. For more information, see HSDPA analysis layers on page 208 and W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159. For information on configuring and generating network analyses, see Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131 and Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149.
HSPA Rapid Planning analysis

In Mentum Planet 4.4, only Rapid Planning analyses for HSPA are available. As a result, you cannot model site capacity; however, you can model site coverage. In HSPA, the HSDPA channels are used on the downlink (see HSDPA Monte Carlo analysis on page 205) as well as the following additional downlink channels:
E-AGCH (E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel)carries absolute grants for uplink E-DCH scheduling. E-HICH (E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Channel)carries hybrid ARQ ACK/NACK indicator. E-RGCH (E-DCH Relative Grant Channel)carries relative grants for uplink E-DCH scheduling.
You define a combined control power for these channels in the HSUPA Control Channels Power box on the Powers panel in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. On the uplink, the following channels are used:
E-DPDCH (E-DCH Dedicated physical Data Channel)carries uplink user data E-DPCCH (E-DCH Dedicated physical Control Channel) carries control information.
HSPA analysis
On the downlink, HSDPA elements are used. See Downlink analysis on page 206 for information on the channels included in the analysis. In addition, the HSUPA Control Channel Power value defined on the Powers panel in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box is also included.
213
On the uplink, the total uplink load defined on the Implementation panel in the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box or in the W-CDMA Simulation dialog box is used.
During an HSPA Monte Carlo analysis, HSPA carriers will spread HSDPA subscribers and HSPA & Rel 99 carriers will spread HSDPA and Rel 99 subscribers. Analysis layers
When you generate an HSPA analysis, you can create most of the standard WCDMA analysis layers. You can also generate HSPA analysis layers for any combination of FRCs. Each FRC corresponds to a TTI length (2 or 10ms) and the number of codes used for each spreading factor. For example, to model an HSUPA terminal capable of transmitting 2 codes with a spreading factor of 4 (terminal category 2), you need to enable the check box next to FRC 1 and FRC 5 on the HSUPA panel in the Network Settings dialog box. Using these settings, the following HSUPA coverage probability layers are generated:

E-DCH - Coverage for FRC 1 E-DCH - Coverage for FRC 5
For information about standard W-CDMA analysis layers, see W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159. Table 9.3 details HSUPA analysis layers.
Table 9.3 HSUPA-specific layers Layer Description
E-DCH - Coverage for FRC Displays the coverage for the selected FRC based on the slow fading standard deviation and required Ec/No for the FRC. E-DCH - Max Achievable Data Rate Displays the data rate for the FRC that achieves the cell edge coverage probability defined in the Packet Switched Service dialog box. E-DCH - Average Data Rate Displays the average data rate calculated from the coverage probability for each FRC.
214
Workflow for generating HSPA analysis layers

Step 1
Assign the Rel 99 & HSPA or HSPA technology to at least one WCDMA carrier and define HSPA technology settings for the network. See To define carrier settings for W-CDMA on page 40 and To define HSUPA network settings for W-CDMA on page 46. Assign Rel 99 & HSPA and/or HSPA carriers to at least one sector in your project, and define HSPA settings for the sector. See To assign carriers to sectors on page 99 and Editing sites and sectors on page 107. Generate a rapid planning analysis, ensuring that you choose the HSPA carrier, and view the results. See Chapter 7: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for W-CDMA on page 131.
Step 2
Step 3
In this release of Mentum Planet, only the rapid planning analysis is available for HSPA.
215
216
10.
Chapter 10: Creating Scrambling Code Plans
Creating Scrambling Code Plans

This chapter describes how to use the Scrambling Code Planning tool to allocate scrambling codes to sectors in your network.
Understanding scrambling code planning Workflow for scrambling code planning Creating a scrambling code plan Defining general scrambling code plan settings Defining scrambling code plan exceptions Working with scrambling code planning results
217
Understanding scrambling code planning

Downlink scrambling codes are used to separate sectors within a W-CDMA network. The Scrambling Code Planning tool enables you to allocate scrambling codes automatically based on distance or interference. When you create a scrambling code plan, each sector is assigned a scrambling code. The scrambling code is made up of a group code, which is the primary scrambling code, and a secondary code. There are 512 primary scrambling codes available for each carrier. For each primary code, there are 15 secondary codes.
Workflow for scrambling code planning

Step 1
Create a group of sites that you will use for your neighbor list and scrambling code planning. See Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Create a neighbor list using the group of sites. See Chapter 12, Working with Neighbor Lists, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. If you are planning by interference, create an interference matrix using the group of sites. See Chapter 11, Working with Interference Matrices, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Define scrambling code planning settings and generate a plan. See Creating a scrambling code plan on page 218.
Step 2 Step 3
Step 4
Creating a scrambling code plan

The Scrambling Code Planning tool enables you to allocate scrambling codes while minimizing interference using either of the following methods:
By Distancereuses scrambling codes with the aim of maximizing the distance between reused scrambling codes. This method assumes that the greater the distance is between reused codes, the less interference will occur. This is a quick and useful method for planning macrocells and areas with a low site density. By Interferencereuses scrambling codes with the aim of minimizing interference between sectors that share the same scrambling code. This method provides a more exact plan in that it also considers information from an interference matrix. This
218
Creating Scrambling Code Plans CDMA User Guide
method is useful for planning microcells and areas with a high site density.
To create a scrambling code plan

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click W-CDMA Analyses and choose Scrambling Code Planning Tool. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors for which you want to generate the plan and click Continue. If you have sectors in your project that are not W-CDMA sectors, a dialog box is displayed identifying the sectors. These sectors will not be included in the plan. The Scrambling Code Planning dialog box opens.
3 4
Define the general settings. See Defining general scrambling code plan settings on page 220. Optionally, define exceptions for the plan, including illegal carriers and sectors that cannot share scrambling codes. See Defining scrambling code plan exceptions on page 222.
219
Click Generate. The Scrambling Code Planning tool creates and displays a plan in table format that lists the sectors in the plan and provides information about the assigned scrambling codes.
To apply the scrambling code plan to your project, choose File Commit Plan. The scrambling codes are assigned to each sector, and are displayed on the Implementation panel of the Sector Settings dialog box.
Defining general scrambling code plan settings

To create a scrambling code plan, you must choose the planning algorithm that you want to use, and specify the carriers to plan. You must also choose a neighbor list. If you are using the By Interference method of planning, you must specify an interference matrix and define advanced settings.
To define general settings

1 On the Settings tab of the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, from the Planning Algorithm list, choose one of the following methods for planning scrambling codes:
By Distanceplans codes by maximizing the distance between reused codes By Interferenceplans codes by using an interference matrix to minimize the interference between sectors that use the same code
2 3
In the Plan Name box, type a name for the scrambling code plan. From the W-CDMA Carriers list, choose a carrier for which to plan. If you choose All Carriers, the same scrambling code is applied to all carriers in a sector.
220
If you want to use a neighbor list as input to the scrambling code plan, from the Neighbor List list, choose which one to use. The neighbor list should include the group of sites for which you are creating the plan. The algorithm will not assign the same code to two neighbors. If neighbor information is missing for any sites that you are planning, a scrambling code plan is still created, but a warning message is displayed, identifying the sectors with missing neighbor information.
If you chose the By Interference planning method, from the Interference Matrix list, choose the interference matrix to use for the plan. This option is not available if you are planning by distance. If you have already generated a plan or have loaded a previously saved plan and want to keep the scrambling codes that have already been assigned, enable the Keep Existing Codes check box. If you do not enable this check box, any codes already assigned are replaced. You can review or modify the plan before deciding whether to keep the existing codes. For more information, see Working with scrambling code planning results on page 224.
If you are planning by interference, in the Advanced Interference Settings section, do any of the following:
Use the Quality/Speed slider to choose a value between Fast and Best to define the balance between quality and speed that you want to use when producing the scrambling code plan. Choosing a value closer to Fast means that the plan is created using fewer iterations. This is useful if you want to fine-tune a plan, for example, to check the effects of changing a threshold value. Choosing a value closer to Best means that the plan is created using more iterations, which produces a higher quality plan and takes more time. In the Random Seed box, type a number for random seed. This number enables you to start the plan from a different point, which can result in slightly different results when the plan is run. You can run the same plan repeatedly using different random
221
seed numbers and then choose the version that gives you the best result.
In the Ignore Interference Less Than (%) box, type a percentage value below which interference will be ignored in planning. Use this option to filter out very low interference values that are not significant and that would slow down the planning process.
To define exceptions, click the Exceptions tab. For more information on defining exceptions, see To define scrambling code planning exceptions on page 223.
To generate the plan, click Generate. The Scrambling Code Planning tool creates and displays a report in table format that lists the sectors in the plan and provides information about the scrambling codes assigned to each sector.
Defining scrambling code plan exceptions

You can define exceptions for the entire network, one or more groups of sites, one or more sites, or one or more sectors in a site. Scrambling code exceptions are:
illegal scrambling codes (codes that cannot be used for a chosen sector, site, group of sites, or network) sectors that cannot share the same scrambling code
Once you generate a scrambling code plan, you can view details about illegal codes and relationships between sectors by clicking the Statistics tab and choosing Exceptions from the Statistics Selection list.
222
To define scrambling code planning exceptions

1 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, click the Exceptions tab.
If you have an existing exceptions file that you want to use as a starting point, choose File Load Exceptions, navigate to the folder that contains the file and click Open. In the Site Selection section, from Selection Type list, choose one of the following options:

Networkapplies illegal codes to all sites in your project. Site Groupsapplies illegal codes to one or more groups of sites. Sitesapplies illegal codes to one or more sites. The sites that appear in the Sites list are the sites in the group that you chose in Step 2 in To create a scrambling code plan on page 219. If you choose this option, you must choose one or more sites from the Sites list. Sectorapplies illegal codes to one or more sectors. The sites that appear in the Sites list are the sites in the group that you chose in Step 2 in To create a scrambling code plan on
223
page 219. If you choose this option, you must choose a site from the Sites list and one or more sectors from the Sectors list. 4 In the Illegal Scrambling Codes section, do one of the following:
If you want to make a scrambling code illegal for the groups, sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the code in the Available Codes list and click >>. If you want to make an illegal code available for the groups, sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the code in the Illegal Codes list and click <<. If you want to define sectors that cannot share the same scrambling code as the groups, sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the sector in the Available Sectors list and click >>. If you want to make a sector available to share codes with the groups, sites, or sectors that you chose in Step 3, choose the sector in the Illegal Sectors list and click <<.
In the Illegal Sectors for Code Sharing section:
If you want to save exceptions, choose File Save Exceptions, and then in the Save SCP Exceptions dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the file and click Save.
Working with scrambling code planning results

Once you generate a scrambling code plan, you can modify the scrambling code index assigned to a sector and view statistics about the plan. The scrambling code index is related directly to the scrambling code, and is typically used for manual planning to simplify the planning process.
To modify the scrambling code index assigned to a sector
In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, on the Plan tab, click in the Scrambling Code Index box for the sector that you want to modify and type the new value. The scrambling code value updates automatically.
224
To view statistics for a plan

The statistics available for a plan include information about the distance between reused codes, the amount of interference between reused codes, and the number of times a code index was assigned. 1 2 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, click the Statistics tab. From the Statistics Selection list, choose the type of statistics to view. For more information on each type of statistics, press the F1 key.
To open a plan in Excel
In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, choose File Export to Excel. The plan opens in an Excel spreadsheet.
To save a plan
By default, scrambling code plans are saved to the <project>/SCP folder. 1 2 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, choose File Save Plan To File. In the Save Scrambling Code Plan dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the plan, type a name for the file in the File Name box and click Save.
To load a plan
If you want to view or continue working with a plan that you have saved, you can load the plan. 1 2 In the Scrambling Code Planning dialog box, choose File Load Plan From File. In the Load Scrambling Code Plan dialog box, navigate to the scrambling code plan that you want to load and click Open.
225
226
11.
Chapter 11: Generating W-CDMA Reports
Generating W-CDMA Reports

This chapter describes how to design and generate reports about data in your W-CDMA network.
Understanding W-CDMA reports Predefined report designs Workflow for generating W-CDMA reports Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design Designing a W-CDMA report Generating a W-CDMA report Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers
227
Understanding W-CDMA reports

A report is a table of data in HTML or Excel format that provides information about your network. You can design, preview, save, and generate reports. You can include the following types of data in a report:
general dataapplies to all technologies enabled in your network. You can include the following types of general data in your report: cell equipment datadata about the sectors in the project (you can choose W-CDMA, cdma2000, or TDMA/ FDMA) antenna data subscriber data data generated using the layer statistics tool W-CDMA-specific dataapplies only to W-CDMA. You can include the following types of W-CDMA-specific data in your report:

Monte Carlo simulation data W-CDMA analysis layer statistic data cdma2000-specific dataapplies only to cdma2000. You can include the following types of cdma2000-specific data in your report:

Monte Carlo simulation data cdma2000 analysis layer statistic data You can design and generate a report or you can generate a report using one of the predefined report designs provided with Mentum Planet. For details on predefined report designs, see Predefined report designs on page 230.
When you design a report, you define the types of data to include, and then choose the specific items within each type to include. The following sections provide details about the types of W-CDMA-specific data available for reports.
W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data

The Monte Carlo simulation data available for reports is divided into four categories:
Carrier-sectorthe types of power received by the carriers and sectors listed in the report, for example, total power, in-cell
228
Generating W-CDMA Reports CDMA User Guide
power, CPICH power, traffic channel powers, and other channel powers
Carrier-sector-mobiledata on a carrier-sector basis about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handover state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits System-mobilesystem-level data about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handover state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits Throughputprimary and secondary downlink and primary uplink throughput data for sectors, carriers, and subscriber types
The data for each category is based on the average of the operating points generated during the Monte Carlo simulation. For overview information on operating points, see Generating operating points and subscriber information on page 151. For details on each operating point, see Appendix C: W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format on page 525.
Using more than one type of data in a report
You can create a report using one or more types of data. If you choose to use more than one type, you may need to specify how you want the information to be related by choosing a key column for both the parent and the child table. In general, this is handled automatically for reports with similar data, but for some combinations, you will need to specify the relationship. For a row in the child table to reference a row in the parent table, the chosen key columns for both tables must contain matching data values. If they do not, the rows are omitted from the resulting report. For example, if you add carrier-sector-mobile data to carrier-sector data, and you choose Site Id as the key column for both tables, then the resulting table contains a row for each Site Id that exists in both tables.
W-CDMA analysis layer data

After you generate W-CDMA analysis layers, you can calculate statistics for an analysis layer using information from a clutter grid file, a traffic map, or a user-defined filter.
229
The statistics generated include the analysis area and a percentage value, and any additional columns created by the applied traffic map, clutter, or filter. For more information, see Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers on page 250.
Using report data to help in W-CDMA network analysis

You can use the data in a report to help you interpret and adjust the factors influencing coverage and performance in your W-CDMA network. In a typical W-CDMA analysis, you would generate a report using data from an initial Monte Carlo simulation for additional information about the analysis. If you determine that the simulation requires more runs, you can append more runs to the simulation and generate another report to view the results.
Predefined report designs

A set of predefined report designs is provided for you to use to generate reports quickly and easily. Each predefined report design comprises two files:
a .wrp file, which identifies the columns included in the report. These files are stored in the Reports\WCDMA folder in your project. an Excel template file, which formats the information. These files are stored in the Reports\exceltemplates folder in your project.
The Excel files contain macros that create appropriate column names and provide other functions, for example, the carrier-sector report contains a macro that converts values from mW to dBm for easier interpretation and comparison. You can view the raw data for any report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the Excel report. The following sections describe the predefined report designs.
System-mobile-simple report
This report provides a row for users served for each subscriber type and environment combination. Columns are color coded. Dark blue indicates general information, such as site and sector ID. Purple indicates served users. Light blue indicates users that are not served. Figure 11.1 shows a portion of an example system-mobile-simple report.
230
Figure 11.1 Example system-mobile-simple report
Carrier-sector-mobile report
This report shows users served on a per-sector basis. This report uses the same color scheme as the system-mobile-simple report.
Carrier-sector
This report provides a summary of the powers per sector for each site/sector/ subscriber type/environment combination.
System-mobile
This report provides a pivot table in Excel that enables you to click and drag items to create the set of columns that you want to view. It also provides pie charts for the available statistics.
Throughput
This report provides a row for throughput for each site/sector/subscriber type/ environment combination.
Columns in predefined reports

Table 11.1 describes the columns available for predefined reports and identifies the reports in which the column appears.
231
Chapter 11 CDMA User Guide Table 11.1 Columns in predefined reports System-mobile-simple Carrier-sector-mobile
Site Id Sector Id Site Sector Id Carrier Name Channel Name Subscriber Type Service Quality Environment Primary Downlink Throughput Secondary Downlink Throughput Primary Uplink Throughput Secondary Uplink Throughput Percentage of Maximum Downlink Pooled Throughput Average Achieved Rate for Downlink Primary Subscribers
Name of the site. Name of the sector. Combined site and sector name. Automatically assigned carrier name. User-defined carrier name. Name of the subscriber type. Name of the service. Name of the quality. Name of the environment. Downlink throughput as primary. Downlink throughput as secondary (handover). Uplink throughput as primary. Uplink throughput as secondary (handover). Downlink throughput as a percentage of the maximum downlink pooled throughput. Average achieved rate for Downlink Primary Subscribers.
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
232
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Generating W-CDMA Reports CDMA User Guide Table 11.1 Columns in predefined reports (continued) System-mobile-simple Carrier-sector-mobile
Average Achieved Rate for Downlink Secondary Subscribers Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Primary Subscribers Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Secondary Subscribers Throughput on HSDPA Average Achieved Forward Rate for HSDPA Subscribers Primary HS-DSCH Downlink Throughput Primary Rel 99 Downlink Throughput Secondary Rel 99 Downlink Throughput Primary A-DCH Uplink Throughput Secondary A-DCH Uplink throughput Primary Rel 99 Uplink Throughput Secondary Rel 99 Uplink Throughput
Average achieved rate for Downlink Secondary Subscribers. Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Primary Subscribers. Average Achieved Rate for Uplink Secondary Subscribers. Throughput achieved on HSDPA. Average Achieved Forward Rate for HSDPA subscribers. HS-DSCH Downlink throughput as primary. Rel 99 Downlink throughput as primary. Rel 99 Downlink throughput as secondary. Uplink throughput on A-DCH channels as primary. Uplink throughput on A-DCH channels as secondary. Rel 99 Uplink throughput as primary. Rel 99 Uplink throughput as secondary.
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
233
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Chapter 11 CDMA User Guide Table 11.1 Columns in predefined reports (continued) System-mobile-simple Carrier-sector-mobile
HSDPA Scheduler Gain Downlink Captured Subscriber Throughput
Scheduler Gain. The downlink captured subscriber throughput is calculated by multiplying the number of served subscribers by the service data rate and by the packet call activity factor. Number of subscribers not served for any reason. Number of subscribers not served for any reason. Number of subscribers not in handover. Number of subscribers in softer handover. Number of subscribers in soft handover. Number of subscribers in softer-soft handover. Number of subscribers in soft-softer handover. Number of subscribers in soft-soft handover. Number of subscribers in softer-softer handover. Number of subscribers in four-server handover. Number of subscribers in five-server handover. Number of subscribers in six-server handover. Number of subscribers in seven-server handover. Total number of subscribers who have been served.
5 5
Not Served Dropped Not in Handover Softer Handover Soft Handover Softer Soft Handover Soft Softer Handover Soft Soft Handover Softer Softer Handover 4 Way Handover 5 Way Handover 6 Way Handover 7 Way Handover Served
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
234
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Served on HSDPA Non-negotiated
Number of subscribers served on a HSDPA carrier. The number of users served where the Uplink is served at the highest available bearer rate, and Downlink is negotiated to a lower rate from the highest available. The number of users served where the Downlink path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Uplink is at the highest available bearer rate. The number of users served where the Uplink path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Downlink is at the highest available bearer rate. The number of users served where both the Uplink and Downlink paths have been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate. Total number of subscribers who have been served by repeaters on the sector as primary. Number of subscribers in handover where a repeater on this sector is the handover server. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the downlink. Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors. A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit.
5 5 5 5
Downlink Negotiated
5 5
Uplink Negotiated
5 5
Negotiated
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
Served by Repeater Handover with Repeater Mobile PA Limit
5 5
Uplink Noise Rise
235
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
DownlinkChannel Element Limit
Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the downlink. The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the Uplink. The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call. Number of Rel 99 subscribers not served due to the maximum Rel 99 subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the downlink. Number of HSDPA subscribers not served due to the maximum HSDPA subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the downlink. Number of subscribers on the downlink not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius. Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell. Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes being available for Rel 99 traffic on the downlink. Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient PA power at the best server.
5 5
Uplink Channel Element Limit
5 5
Rel 99 User Limit
5 5
HSDPA User Limit
5 5
Cell Radius Limit Speed Limit Throughput Limit Primary Dropped Due to Rel 99 Code Primary Dropped Due to PA
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5
236
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Primary Dropped Due to CPICH Primary Dropped Due to DPCH Primary Dropped Due To HS-SCCH Handover Dropped Due to Downlink CE Handover Dropped Due to Uplink CE Handover Dropped Due to Code Handover Dropped Due to PA Handover Dropped Due to DPCH Used Uplink Channel Elements Required Uplink Channel Elements Used Downlink Channel Elements
Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient CPICH Ec/Io from the best server. Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient voice power. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power being available for the HSSCCH channel in primary. Number of handover connections refused during downlink analysis due to insufficient handover channel elements. Number of handover connections refused during Uplink analysis due to insufficient handover channel elements. Number of handover connections refused due to insufficient channel codes. Number of handover connections refused during downlink analysis due to insufficient PA power. Number of handover connections refused during downlink analysis due to insufficient voice power. Number of Uplink channel elements used. Number of Uplinkchannel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements. Number of Downlink channel elements used.
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
237
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Required Downlink Channel Elements Total Downlink PA Limit
Number of Downlink channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or CPICH to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscribers target. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes being available for Rel 99 on the downlink. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient CPICH power on the downlink. The CPICH power is caused by the maximum CPICH power/fixed CPICH power being insufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power on the downlink to meet the subscribers Eb/No target. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power being available for the HS-SCCH channel. Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers.
5 5 5
Downlink Rel 99 Code Limit CPICH Power Limit
5 5
5 5
DPCH Power Limit
5 5 5
HS-SCCH Limit
Prev Total Rel 99 Rcv Power_mW
238
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Current Total Rel 99 Rcv Power_mW
Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise. Total power received from subscribers on the final iteration. Output power of the CPICH channel. Output power of the sync channel. Output power of the paging channel. The activity factor for the HS-DSCH channel. For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, the maximum transmit power for the downlink shared channel. For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, the power of the High Speed Shared Control Channel. For HSPA and Rel99 & HSPA sectors, the combined power required for the E-AGCH (E-DCH Absolute Grant Channel), E-RGCH (E-DCH Relative Grant Channel), and the E-HICH (E-DCH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel). Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise. Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation. In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor.
Total Rel99 InCell Power_mW CPICH Power_mW Sync Power_mW Paging Power_mW HS-DSCH Activity Factor (%) HS-DSCH Power_mW
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
HS-SCCH Power_mW HSUPA Control Power_mW
Current Rel 99 Rcv Power_mW Rel 99 In Cell Power_mW Attenuated Power_mW
5 5 5
239
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Total DPCH Power per Run_mW Average DPCH Power per Subscriber_mW Max DPCH Power per Channel_mW Min DPCH Power per Channel_mW DPCH Noise Rise Total Noise Rise Rx Eb_No DPCH Load DPCH Load_Percentage Load_Percentage Total Load Total Load_Percentage Frequency Re-use Efficiency
Total power of all best server voice channels. This value includes the voice activity factor. Average power of a single voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor. Maximum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor. Minimum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor. Noise rise on the uplink. Total noise rise on the uplink. Eb/No on the uplink. Sector load on the downlink. Sector load on the downlink as a percentage. Uplink load given as a percentage. Total sector load. Total sector load as a percentage. Frequency re-use efficiency given as a percentage, equal to: (in cell interference) / (total interference)*100
5 5
5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5
240
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Other Cell Interference Factor F-Factor Mean Rel 99 Required Receive Power Standard Dev Rel 99 Required Receive Power
Other-cell interference factor (OCIF) given in a linear form, equal to: (other cell interference) / (own cell interference) F-factor given as a linear term, equal to: (own cell interference) / (total interference)
5 5 5 5
Mean value of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the uplink.
Standard deviation of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the uplink.
Workflow for generating W-CDMA reports

Step 1 Step 2
Generate a Monte Carlo simulation. See Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149. If you want to include W-CDMA analysis layer statistics in a report, do the following:
Generate W-CDMA analysis layers. See W-CDMA analysis layers on page 159. Generate statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers and add them to the Report Designer. See Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers on page 250.
Step 3
Optionally, design a report. See Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design on page 242 or Designing a W-CDMA report on page 243.
241
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Step 4
Generate a report using a predefined report design or using the report design that you created. See Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design on page 242 or Generating a W-CDMA report on page 249.
Generating a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design

Using predefined reports removes the need for you to design a report before generating it. The predefined report designs use templates that are in Excel format. When you create a new project, the predefined report designs are automatically copied into the Reports folder for the project. If you are using an existing project and want to use the predefined report designs, you will need to copy all of the folders in the Mentum Planet 4\global\Reports folder to the Reports folder in your project. Each report contains macros that format the data. You can view the raw data used to create any predefined report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the report.
Modifying a predefined report design

If you want to modify a predefined report design, you can modify the Excel template without making changes to the report design (the .wrp file), but if you modify the report design, you need to modify the Excel template (i.e., if you remove a column by clearing the check box on the Design tab of the Report Designer, you need to delete it from the Excel template as well). You should only modify the Excel template if you are familiar with Excel. To modify the report design, you need to load it into the Report Designer and modify it. See To modify an existing W-CDMA report design on page 249.
To generate a W-CDMA report using a predefined report design

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand W-CDMA Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports. In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report design that you want to generate and click OK. For details on the predefined reports that are available, see Predefined report designs on page 230.
242
From the Select Output Format list, choose Excel and click OK. The report is generated and opens in Excel.
You can also generate reports for a group of sectors or for a flag condition by doing the following: To generate reports for a group of sectors, right-click a group in the Sites category in the Project Explorer and choose Generate Reports. To generate reports for sectors that have been assigned a flag condition, enable the flag condition in the Project Explorer, right-click the Flags node, and choose Generate Reports. In either case, you must choose the analysis to use in the Select Data dialog box.
Designing a W-CDMA report

The Report Designer enables you to create an overall design for a report before you generate it. You can customize the data that in the report and define the output format of the report. After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the operating points are automatically available in the Report Designer. If you want to use layer statistics in a report, you must manually add the data to the Report Designer. For more information, see Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers on page 250. The Report Designer enables you to preview the report before you save it or generate it. Previewing a report enables you to customize the data or output settings until you are satisfied with the result. Once you are satisfied with the design, you can save it until you want to generate the report. Report designs are stored in the Reports folder of your project. You can also load and modify report designs in the Report Designer even after you have generated reports. This option is useful, for example, if you want to add layer statistics data to an existing report that only contains Monte Carlo operating points.
To design a W-CDMA report

1 Choose Data Design Report. The Report Designer opens.
243
On the Data tab, in the Available Data section, expand one of the following nodes and choose the type of W-CDMA data to add to the report:
Cell Equipmentcontains data about sector settings. For more information, see Chapter 5, Configuring and Placing TDMA/ FDMA Sites in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide, Chapter 5: Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites on page 83, and Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites on page 329. Additional information can be found in Appendix E: Import and Export Tables in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Antennacontains data about the antenna patterns in the project. For more information, see Chapter 3, Working with Antenna Patterns, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Subscriberscontains data about the subscriber information in the Subscriber Manager. For information on the columns available in this report, see the Subscriber_Equipment_Types worksheet and the Subscriber worksheet in Appendix E: Import and Export Tables in the Mentum Planet User Guide. <analysis name>contains the following categories of data:
Carrier-sectorcontains mean values from per-sector operating points. For more information, see W-CDMA
244
Monte Carlo simulation data on page 228 and Persector operating points on page 528. Carrier-sector-mobilecontains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data on page 228 and Per-subscriber type operating points on page 529. System-mobilecontains mean values from sub-category operating points. For more information, see W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data on page 228 and Sub-category operating points on page 526. Throughputcontains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see W-CDMA Monte Carlo simulation data on page 228 and Per-subscriber type operating points on page 529. Layer Statisticscontains statistics from a W-CDMA analysis layer. Layer statistics will only appear in the Available Data section if you have calculated them and added them to the report design. For more information, see Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers on page 250.

Type a description for the data in the Edit Description for the Data section, and click the right arrow. The data is added to the Selected Data section. To add more data to the report, repeat Step 2 and Step 3. If the Relation Selector dialog box is displayed, do the following:
4 5
To define the data from a parent table, do the following:
From the Select Parent Table list, choose the table that contains the rows to be referenced by the child table. From the Select Key Column From Parent Table list, choose the column in the parent table that contains the
245
data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables. To define the data from a child table, do both of the following: From the Select Child Table list, choose the table that contains the rows that you want to be referenced by the parent table. From the Select Key Column From Child Table list, choose the column in the child table that contains the data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables. Click OK to close the Relation Selector dialog box.

To display a preview of the report, click Preview. The report design is displayed in a Web browser.
To define the data columns for a W-CDMA report

1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Design tab.
To change the name of a column, click in the Column Label box and type a name.
246
To include or exclude columns from the report, do any of the following:
To exclude a single column, clear the check box in the Show column. To exclude all columns, click Clear All. To include all columns, click Show All.
To change the order of the columns, choose one or more columns and click the up arrow or down arrow. To choose a column, click the column number. To display a preview of the report, click Preview. The report design is displayed in a Web browser.
To define the export settings for a W-CDMA report

1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Output tab.
247
In the Select Export Destination section, choose one of the following formats from the Format list:
Excelthe report is opened in Microsoft Excel. Using Microsoft Excel, you can save the report in .xls format. To use this option, you must have Microsoft Excel installed. HTMLthe report is saved in HTML (.htm) format. If you choose this option, you can choose, from the Output list, whether to save the report to a file or open it in a Web browser. MapInfothe report is saved in a MapInfo (.tab) file
In the Export Settings section, define the settings that are specific to the type of format that you chose.
If you chose Excel in Step 2, you can define the sheet name (the name of the first tab in the Excel file), template file name, and macros to use. Typically, you would use these fields if you have designed a custom Excel template and want to use it for your report data. If you are modifying a predefined report design, you can choose the predefined Excel template that corresponds to the data that you are including in the report (i.e., if you are including carrier-sector data in your report, you should choose the carriersector Excel template). If you chose HTML in Step 2, you can define HTML-specific export settings, including the file to be used for the report header and footer. If you want to use the header and footer provided with Mentum Planet, do the following: Click Browse next to the Header Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Header.htm file in your project folder and click Open. Click Browse next to the Footer Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Footer.htm file in your project folder and click Open. If you chose MapInfo in Step 2, you can define MapInfo-specific settings. No template files are provided with Mentum Planet for this option.

For more information on the settings in this section, press the F1 key. If you do not define custom settings, the default settings will be used. 4 To define output settings for another format, repeat Step 2 and Step 3.
248
To save the W-CDMA report design

1 2 3 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File Save As. In the Save Report dialog box, type a name for the report in the Report Name box. From the Report Category list, choose W-CDMA, and click OK. The report design will be saved in the Reports\WCDMA folder of your project. Report designs are saved with the file extension of .wrp.
To modify an existing W-CDMA report design

1 2 3 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File Load. In the Open Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to open, and click OK. In the Report Designer, modify the settings of the report design. For more information on these settings, see To design a W-CDMA report on page 243.
To delete a W-CDMA report design

1 2 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File Remove. In the Remove Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to delete, and click Remove.
Generating a W-CDMA report

After you have designed and saved a report design in the W-CDMA category, you can use the Generate Report dialog box to generate multiple reports simultaneously.
249
To generate a W-CDMA report

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand W-CDMA Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports. In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to generate. From the Select Output Format list, choose the format for the report output. The output settings for each format are defined on the Output tab of the Report Designer and saved in the report design that you are generating (see To define the export settings for a W-CDMA report on page 247). You can output the report in any of the three formats. 4 Click OK. The report is generated and displayed or saved in the output format that you chose.
2 3
Calculating statistics for W-CDMA analysis layers

You can calculate statistics on the individual W-CDMA analysis layers that you have generated. You can calculate statistics based on the entire numeric grid (.grd) file, an area grid, or a selection in the Map window. You can further customize the statistics based on a clutter grid file, traffic map, or a user-defined filter.
250
After you calculate statistics, you can add them to a new or existing report design.
When you calculate layer statistics, they are automatically displayed in Microsoft Excel. In order to use the Layer Statistics Analysis tool, you must have Microsoft Excel installed.
To calculate W-CDMA layer statistics

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, choose the analysis layers that you want to add to the report, right-click one of the analysis layers and choose Statistics. The Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box opens. 2 3 To manually add additional analysis layers to the list, click Add Layer, navigate to the file that you want to add, and click Open. In the tree view, choose Analysis Settings. The Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box opens.
251
On the Analysis Settings panel, choose one of the following from the Analysis Area list:
Current Windowstatistics are generated based on the area displayed in the Map window Entire Layerstatistics are generated based on the area defined in the W-CDMA analysis layer(s) used Selected Rectanglestatistics are generated for the area that is enclosed by the selected rectangle in the Map window. You can use the MapInfo rectangle tool to create a rectangle. For more information, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide. Areastatistics are generated based on an area grid. For more information, see Creating area grids in Chapter 14, Working With Grids, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
5 6
To remove bins with null values from the analysis layer calculations, enable the Exclude Null Values check box. To generate additional statistics, broken down by a classification, enable the Use Classified Grid check box, click Browse to navigate to the file, choose the file and click OK. The default classified grid file is the clutter grid file defined for the project. Any classified grid can be used to perform different kinds of statistical analysis. For example, to produce a statistical breakdown for each sector, use a best server layer as the classification grid. This breaks the statistics down by best server area.
7 8
To generate traffic statistics, enable the Use Traffic Map check box and choose a traffic map from the Traffic Map list. To filter the analysis area based on a grid file, enable the Apply Area Filter check box and do the following:
To define the area raster, click Browse, navigate to the grid file, and click OK. To define the condition for the filter, type an expression in the Condition box. For example, choosing the SignalStrength.grd file and defining the expression v > 100 would only consider pixels within the analysis area that have a signal strength greater than 100.
For more information on creating expressions, press the F1 key.
252
To discard statistical results that only contain zero values, enable the Discard Result That Only Contains Zero Statistics check box. With this check box enabled, records where all columns contain zero values will be removed from the statistical report.
10 From the Export Format list, choose one of the following formats:
Excelstatistics will be displayed in Microsoft Excel when they are generated. Htmlstatistics are generated in an HTML (.htm) file and stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\Html folder in the project. There will be one .htm file for each layer for which you are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically. MapInfo Tablestatistics are generated in MapInfo (.tab) file and stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo folder. There will be one .tab file for each layer for which you are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically. To display the files, see To display W-CDMA layer statistics in table format on page 255.
11 If the Layers node in the tree view does not contain layers, click Add Layer, choose the numeric grid (.grd) file that you want to add, and click Open. 12 In the tree view, expand Layers and choose the analysis layer for which you want to obtain statistics. The Layers panel opens to display layer information about the data type, resolution, and the area.
253
13 If you want to define classification settings for the analysis layer, define any of the available settings in the Classifications section. The settings that are available in this section are dependent on the data type of the analysis layer (classified or numeric). Do any of the following:
In the Classifications box, choose the classification for the analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified. To split the classification by site and sector names, enable the Split Classification to Get Site and Sector Names check box. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified. To define the data ranges for which to calculate statistics, type the threshold values in the Threshold Definition box, separated by semi-colons. The default thresholds are set by equally dividing the range of Zmin and Zmax values contained in the chosen analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is numeric. In the Classification Name box, type a name for the classification in this box. This option is available for both the classified and numeric data types.
254
14 Click Calculate Statistics. The settings in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box are saved automatically for use the next time you calculate layer statistics.
You can also access the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box by choosing Analysis Layer Statistics.
To display W-CDMA layer statistics in table format

If you saved your statistics in MapInfo (.tab) format, you can view them in a Map window. 1 2 Choose File Open Table. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo folder of your project and choose the MapInfo (.tab) file that you want to display. From the Preferred View list, choose Browser. Click Open. The layer statistics table opens in a new Browser window.
3 4
To add W-CDMA layer statistics to a report design

1 After the statistics have been calculated, in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box, click Design Report. The Report Designer opens, with the layers in the Available Data section. 2 3 Design the report using the instructions provided in Designing a W-CDMA report on page 243. Generate the report using the instructions provided in Generating a W-CDMA report on page 249.
255
256
Section 2: cdma2000
Section 2
cdma2000
This section explains how to use the cdma2000 technology provided with Mentum Planet. For information about W-CDMA, see Section 1: W-CDMA on page 11.
12.
Chapter 12: Overview of cdma2000
Overview of cdma2000
This chapter provides an overview of cdma2000 and presents a typical workflow for cdma2000 planning.
Understanding cdma2000 technology cdma2000 features Workflow for cdma2000 network planning Suggested reading
259
Understanding cdma2000 technology

Due to the complex nature of Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) networks, you should be familiar with CDMA technology and basic network design principles before you start working with Mentum Planet and the cdma2000 technology. cdma2000 networks support a range of different services (e.g., speech, web browsing, email, and video) and service levels. As a result, planning a cdma2000 network is more complex than designing other second-generation voice-centric communication systems. All signals within a CDMA network share the same bandwidth because each signal is spread across the entire 1.25 MHz channel. Signals are distinguished from each other by a unique channelization code (a Walsh code) that can be detected only by the equipment to which a specific signal is directed. Although a coded signal is broadcast to all users on the forward link, the users to whom the signal is not directed receive the undesired signals (or a portion thereof) as interference. This interference includes energy from nonorthogonal signals broadcast from the same serving site and signals directed at users served by another site. Interference levels within CDMA networks fluctuate according to the number and location of users. The amount of internal and external interference across the network determines network capacity (i.e., the number of calls or sessions that the network can support is inversely proportional to the amount of interference). On the reverse link, users communicating with a site cause in-cell interference. Some of these users have their transmitted power controlled by the site and will generally be involved in controlling the downlink power. Other users who are in second, or greater levels of handoff, will likely have their equipment power controlled by a different site, typically the site that is providing the strongest pilot signal. Interference is also caused by signal energy received at the site receiver from users who are communicating with other sites (i.e., out-of-cell interference). In addition to in- and out-of-cell interference on the reverse link, front end noise and foreign noise are present. Mentum Planet enables you to simulate, assess, and balance the power and interference levels associated with cdma2000 networks in your effort to provide superior coverage, capacity, and quality of service.
260
Overview of cdma2000 CDMA User Guide
cdma2000 features
Mentum Planet enables you to plan and assess the coverage and performance of your multi-layer (2G and 3G) and multi-technology networks using features described in the following sections.
Multi-technology planning features

Mentum Planet enables you to define a cdma2000 configuration simultaneously with TDMA/FDMA configurations. The Subscriber Manager enables you to effectively plan your network with a diverse mix of subscribers and usage types. You can group the service, bearer, quality, and session requirements of each subscriber into subscriber types, which are used when you analyze the network.
cdma2000 analyses
You can generate analyses using one of two methods:

Monte Carlo rapid planning
Monte Carlo
The Monte Carlo option enables you to perform a detailed analysis of the network using Monte Carlo simulation techniques to analyze a set of randomly generated points (i.e., subscribers) distributed according to traffic maps. For more information, see Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399.
Rapid planning
The rapid planning option provides a faster alternative for generating analysis layers based on user-defined levels of network loading on the forward and reverse links. The simulation runs only once, and does not generate the detailed operating points that the Monte Carlo simulation generates. This option is useful when you want a quick overview of your network. You can then use the Monte Carlo option for a more detailed view. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379.
cdma2000 analysis layers
Analysis layers are generated for both the Monte Carlo and rapid planning options. Analysis layers enable you to compare and query layers of
261
information for details on interference, coverage, and handoff. For example, the generated analysis layers can help you to determine:

pilot coverage reverse link interference forward link interference throughput handoff states and constraints path balance between the forward link and the reverse link
You can generate analysis layers for the entire network or for a particular geographic region within the network. For more information, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409.
cdma2000 reports
The Report Designer enables you to view data from antenna patterns, sector settings, Monte Carlo simulations, and cdma2000 analysis layers in a report. You can output reports to a Microsoft Excel (.xls) file, MapInfo (.tab) file, or HTML (.htm) file. You can also calculate statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers and obtain per-pixel information about cdma2000 analyses. For more information, see Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483.
PN offset planning
The PN Offset Planning tool enables you to efficiently allocate PN offset codes to sectors in your network. It also enables you to manage PN offset plans and to apply a plan to a group of sites. For more information, see Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans on page 465.
Workflow for cdma2000 network planning

The workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order. Before you begin this workflow, you should review the list of Mentum Planet activities listed in Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. You should also read the Understanding... sections in each chapter for an overview of the planning process.
262
Overview of cdma2000 CDMA User Guide
Step 1 Step 2
Create a project. See Chapter 13: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000 on page 265. Define your cdma2000 network configuration as follows:
Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you plan to analyze. For general procedures for working with traffic maps, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Define subscribers using the Subscriber Manager. See Chapter 15: Defining cdma2000 Subscribers on page 291.
Step 3
Optionally, edit the propagation models supplied with Mentum Planet. See Chapter 4, Working with Propagation Models, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Configure and place sites. See Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites on page 329. Optionally, analyze survey data or tune propagation models. See Chapter 4, Working with Propagation Models, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Optionally, if you have purchased Capesso, optimize your sites using the workflow described in the Capesso online Help. Generate a rapid planning or Monte Carlo analysis and view results. See:
Step 4 Step 5
Step 6 Step 7
Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379 Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399 Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483
Step 8 Step 9
Optionally, plan PN offsets. See Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans on page 465. Optionally, create coverage maps and FCC Service Area Boundary reports, see Chapter 15, Generating Reports, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
263
Suggested reading
Holma H., A. Toskala. HSDPA/HSUPA for UMTS: High Speed Radio Access for Mobile Communications, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006. Laiho, J. , A.Wacker, T. Novosad. Radio Network Planning and Optimization for UMTS, 2nd Edition, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006. Nawrocki, Maciej J., Mischa Dohler, A. Hamid Aghvami, Understanding UMTS Radio Network Modelling, Planning and Automated Optimization, John Wiley and Sons Ltd., 2006. Kim, Kyoung Il. Handbook of CDMA System Design, Engineering, and Optimization, Prentice Hall, Inc., 1999. Lee, Jhong Sam & Leonard E. Miller. CDMA Systems Engineering Handbook. Artech House Publishers, 1998. Yang, Samuel C. CDMA RF System Engineering. Artech House Publishers, 1998.
264
13.
Chapter 13: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000
Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000

This chapter explains how to create a Mobile Technology project. Once you have created a project, you can define network settings and carrier settings, as described in the following chapters.
Understanding Mobile Technology projects Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project Gathering project information Creating a project for cdma2000 Opening a project Converting cdma2000 projects from previous versions Creating a default settings file for cdma2000
265
Understanding Mobile Technology projects

In Mentum Planet, a project defines which elevation, clutter, and site file to use for analyses. You need to create a Mobile Technology project before you can define network and carrier settings, place sites, or generate analysis layers. For detailed information on projects, see the Mentum Planet User Guide. When you create a mobile technology project, you can design a network that supports a variety of technologies, including W-CDMA, cdma2000, and TDMA/FDMA. Once you have created a Mobile Technology project, you must specify that you want to use cdma2000 technology and define cdma2000 network, subscriber, and sector settings.
Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project

Step 1 Step 2
Gather technical information to support the project. See Gathering project information. Create the Mobile Technology project. See Creating a project for cdma2000 on page 266.
Gathering project information

To create a Mobile Technology project, you must have a digital elevation model (DEM) file and, optionally, a clutter file. The results of network analyses will be more accurate and complete if you start with as much information as possible. It is recommended that you also have the following:
technical information about sites and sectors, such as location, power, azimuth, tilt, and twist manufacturers electronic antenna patterns
Creating a project for cdma2000

The Project Wizard leads you through the process of creating a project and, by default, is automatically displayed upon startup of Mentum Planet. If you want Mentum Planet to automatically open the last project, instead of the Project Wizard, in the Startup Options section of the User Preferences dialog box, choose the Open Most Recent Project option. See Defining User Preferences in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
266
Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000 CDMA User Guide
You can use remote project folders to store and access Mentum Planet project data. For example, you can use shared project folders for the following types of project files to conserve disk space on your local computer:

bin files signal (field) strength files prediction view files (CDMA technologies only)
By default, these files are saved in the local project folder. If you use shared project folders, the project files are stored in the shared folders, instead of the local project folder. The shared folders must have read/write access permissions for all Mentum Planet users accessing the shared folders.
If you are using shared folders and do not enable the corresponding check box in the Sharing section of the Advanced Options tab in the Project Settings dialog box, the shared path is not stored in Data Manager when you check in the project. For any Data Manager users who perform a Get on the project, all data will be stored within their local project folder.
You can choose to use a workspace to save your Map window settings, although this is not required. For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To create a project for cdma2000

1 Start Mentum Planet. By default, the Project Wizard opens when you start Mentum Planet. To use the wizard at any other time, choose File New Project. 2 3 Click Next on the first page of the Project Wizard. In the Mobile Technology dialog box, choose a cdma2000 default settings file and click OK. When you choose a default settings file, default network settings, including appropriate spectrum, are automatically applied to the settings in the Network Settings dialog box and cdma2000 is enabled on the Network Technologies panel. You can modify these settings after you create the project. The default settings are based on defined standards for the technology. These standards are available from various organizations. For CDMA technologies, this list includes 3GPP2 (http://
267
www.3gpp2.org), TIA/EIA (http://www.tiaonline.org) and ANSI (http:// www.ansi.org). 4 5 6 7 Follow the pages of the Project Wizard and supply the appropriate information to create your project. Click Finish. The Project Settings dialog box opens. On the Data tab, type a project description in the Description box. In the Project File box, type a name for the project file or accept the default. By default, the folder name specified in the Wizard is used as the .dBp file name. 8 If you want to use a workspace, enable the Use a Workspace check box. For more information on workspaces, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. 9 If you want to update the workspace file automatically each time you close a project, enable the Workspace Autosave check box. With both the Use a Workspace and Workspace Autosave check boxes enabled, the specified workspace will be automatically saved when you close a project. When you re-open the project, the project will be displayed exactly as it appeared when you last closed the project. 10 Click the Folders tab. 11 If you want to change the default paths for bin, signal strength, prediction view, or settings files, for any of the following boxes, click Browse, navigate to the shared folder, and click OK.

Bin<project>\bin folder, used for prediction files Signal Strength<project>\SignalStrength folder, used for field strength files Prediction View<project>\PredictionView folder, used when you generate a CDMA Monte Carlo simulation GlobalProgram Files\Mentum Planet 4\Global folder, used for default settings files
12 If you intend to use the Data Manager with shared project files, in the Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab, and in the
268
Sharing section, enable the check boxes for each of the file types that reference shared project data. For information about the other options on the Advanced Options tab, press the F1 key. For more detailed information, see Defining output settings in Chapter 8, Generating Predictions, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. For information about the CDMA Analysis Optimization settings, see Optimizing cdma2000 analyses on page 418. 13 Click OK to save your Mentum Planet project. The Project Explorer opens, docked at the left edge of the application window.
When you create a project, a set of default propagation model files is copied to the Model folder located within the project folder. Each propagation model references a default Clutter Property Assignment (.cpa) file containing settings appropriate for the model. Ensure that the clutter properties defined for the propagation model are set for the clutter grid file you specify in the Project Settings dialog box. For information on creating a default settings file, see Creating a default settings file for cdma2000 on page 270. To open the Project Settings dialog box once a project is open, choose Edit Project Settings, or click the Project Settings button on the Analysis toolbar.
Opening a project
You must close an open project before opening a new one. Only projects you have recently worked with appear in the Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box.
To open a project
1 Choose File Open Project. The Open Mentum Planet Project dialog box opens.
269
2 3
If you want to see the paths in the Most Recently Used Projects list, enable the Show Path check box. Do one of the following:
Choose a project in the Most Recently Used Projects list and click Open. Click Browse, locate the project you want to open and then click Open.
If you are opening a project that contains predictions from an earlier version of Mentum Planet, see Opening and closing projects in Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Converting cdma2000 projects from previous versions

If you need to convert a project created using a previous version of Mentum Planet cdma2000 (AIIM) or Planet 2.8 or Planet DMS, contact customer service. See Contacting Mentum on page 3.
Creating a default settings file for cdma2000

When you create a project, you are prompted to choose a default settings (.gsm) file. Mentum Planet includes default settings files for common technologies. You can, however, create a custom default settings file that will automatically appear in the Mobile Technologies list. A default settings file for cdma2000 contains the settings that are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, such as information about which technologies are enabled in your network and how the spectrum is allocated. When you open a project, the values contained in the cdma2000 default settings file are loaded in the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box.
To create a default settings file for cdma2000

1 Define the network settings. For more information, see Chapter 14: Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration on page 273.
270
Export the network settings to a network settings (.gns) file to the Mentum Planet 4\global\GSM\DefaultSets folder. For more information on how to export a network settings file, see Exporting and importing Mobile Technology network settings files in Chapter 3, Defining Network Technologies and Services, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.
In the Mentum Mentum Planet 4\Global\GSM\DefaultSets folder, copy any one of the existing default project settings (.gsm) files and rename it. You must retain the .gsm extension. This will become the new default settings file.
4 5
Open Notepad or any other ASCII text editor. Open the default settings file you created in Step 3 and edit the network settings parameter to refer to the network settings file you created in Step 2. For example:
[Network Settings] Default Settings File=myNetworkSettings.gns
Do not modify any other parameters in the file. 6 Save the default settings file. The default settings file will be listed in the Mobile Technology dialog box when you create a project.
271
272
14.
Chapter 14: Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration
Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration

This chapter describes how to define a cdma2000 network configuration.
Understanding cdma2000 network configuration settings Workflow for defining a cdma2000 network configuration Defining network operators for cdma2000 Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 Defining cdma2000 network settings
273
Understanding cdma2000 network configuration settings

cdma2000 network configuration settings enable you to define spectrum and operators for your cdma2000 network. In addition, you can configure carriers and define other system-level settings. For each carrier, you can define priorities (preference weightings) and soft thresholds, which are used in conjunction with sector settings to allocate subscribers to carriers during network analyses. You can also define EV-DO settings, which are used for EV-DO analyses, if you have purchased an EV-DO license. If you want to model other technologies, you can enable them and define spectrum and other settings. If you chose a default cdma2000 settings file when you created the project, cdma2000 is automatically added to the Network Technologies panel in the Network Settings dialog box, and spectrum and carriers are allocated. In addition to cdma2000, you can add other technologies as required. For more information on adding other technologies, see Chapter 3, Defining Network Technologies and Services, and Chapter 4, Defining Network Configuration, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide. When you enable technologies, you can assign colors that apply to each technology. You can also assign colors to other network operators in the same or neighboring geographic areas. These colors enable you to graphically display how the spectrum is divided when you allocate portions of the spectrum to each technology. For more information, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 on page 276.
Workflow for defining a cdma2000 network configuration

Step 1 Step 2
Define network operators in your network. See Defining network operators for cdma2000 on page 275. If required, allocate spectrum and assign carriers to cdma2000. See Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 on page 276. Define general, correlation model, power control, and carrier settings for cdma2000. See Defining cdma2000 network settings on page 279.
Step 3
274
Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration CDMA User Guide
Defining network operators for cdma2000

Network operators are the companies that share the same or neighboring geographic area. One operator, the Home operator, is included by default. This operator represents the network of the company for which you work. On the Spectrum Allocation panel of the Network Settings dialog box, different colors are used to identify the technology type and the network operators. The home operator is not assigned a color, but uses the color that has been assigned for the technology. Additional operators are assigned a unique color to visually indicate the division of the available spectrum. For more information, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 on page 276.
To define network operators for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Network Settings. The Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box opens, with the Network Technologies panel selected by default. One or more technologies will be enabled, depending on the default settings file you chose when you created the project.
If you want to change the color for a technology, in the Technologies table, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK.
275
3 4 5
To add a network operator, click Add below the Network Operators table. If you want to rename the operator, click in the Name column for the operator and type a new name. If you want to change the color for an operator that you have added, click the Browse (...) button in the Select Color column, choose the color that you want in the Color dialog box and click OK. You cannot assign a color to the Home operator. The color assigned for the technology is used for the Home operator.
You can also access the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box by clicking the Network Settings button on the Mobile Technology toolbar.
Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000

Spectrum allocation involves assigning bands to technologies and network operators, and defining the spectrum range and carriers for each band. This section describes how to allocate the spectrum and define carriers for cdma2000. If you chose a default cdma2000 settings file when you created the project, spectrum is automatically allocated and carriers are assigned, but you can modify the spectrum and add new bands as required. For more information on allocating spectrum and defining carriers for other technologies, see Chapter 4: Defining Network Configuration in the TDMA/ FDMA User Guide.
276
Spectrum allocation for cdma2000

cdma2000 technology can occupy more than one band. This type of configuration is necessary when the technology occupies spectrum in separate bands or blocks of spectrum within one band, but not contiguous carrier numbers. You can define as many as 15 bands.
If you have more than one band defined for cdma2000, and you want to generate predictions that include carriers from two different bands, you need to ensure that your sectors are configured correctly. For more information, see Considerations for multi-band networks on page 330.
If the band is assigned to the Home operator, you must define

the technology for the band the start and end downlink frequencies, which must be within the range allowed for cdma2000 within your area the starting carrier number, which corresponds to the first carrier at the start of the allocated band
If a band is assigned to another network operator (i.e., a competitor), you can only assign the start and end downlink frequencies, not the technology or the carriers.
When you assign carriers to technologies across multiple bands, you must ensure that the carrier numbers are unique to each technology; you cannot allocate the same number for a technology twice. For example, you can have carrier number 1 in cdma2000 and carrier number 1 in GSM, but you can only have carrier number 1 in cdma2000 once.
cdma2000 carriers
Carriers are the frequencies that carry signals for each band. When you add a technology band, a new set of carriers is added automatically and spaced along the band. You assign carriers when you define cdma2000 sectors for your project. For more information, see Defining cdma2000 sector settings on page 343.
277
To create a new cdma2000 technology band

1 In the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, choose Spectrum Allocation in the tree view.
2 3
On the Spectrum Allocation panel, click Add. A new band is added to the list. If you want to allocate spectrum to another network operator, choose the operator from the list in the Operator column. The operators in the list are the ones that you defined on the Network Technologies panel (see Defining network operators for cdma2000 on page 275). The default operator is the Home operator. If you allocate spectrum to an operator other than the Home operator, you can view the spectrum assigned to the operator, but not the carriers or technologies. This enables you to visually model the ranges of spectrum that belong to your competitors or other adjacent operators.
4 5 6
In the Band Name column, type a name for the band, or accept the default. In the Downlink Center Frequency column, type a value in the Start and End boxes to indicate the lower and upper frequencies for the band. In the Carrier Start column, type the starting carrier number for the band, or accept the default. The Carrier End column updates automatically based on the carrier spacing defined for cdma2000.
278
7 8 9
In the Technology Type column, choose cdma2000 from the list. To add another band, click Add, and repeat Step 3 to Step 7. Click Refresh Carriers. The carriers required for each technology band are automatically added to the Carriers list on the Carrier tab of the cdma2000 panel of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.
The frequency values entered in the Start and End boxes in the Downlink Center Frequency column are the center frequencies of the first and last carriers in the list you are allocating. The Spectrum graph shows the actual spectrum occupied by all these carriers. Therefore, the start frequency displayed in the graph is half the carrier bandwidth lower than the center frequency defined for the first carrier, and the end frequency is half the carrier bandwidth higher than the center frequency defined for the last carrier in the table.
Defining cdma2000 network settings

After you have allocated spectrum and defined carriers for your network, you can define the cdma2000 network settings. These settings are described in the following sections.
General settings for cdma2000

The general settings enable you to view the spreading chip rate of the system, and to define
the pilot pollution margin, which is used to determine pilot polluters when generating analyses. Servers outside of this range are not considered polluters. interference settings for other systems. These values are used to account for interference that is not specifically modeled in Mentum Planet.
You can also choose curves for pilot factor mapping and usage factor mapping. The pilot factor mapping and usage factor mapping are combined in
279
the Pilot - Pollution Index layer. The Pilot - Pollution Index layer shows the proportion of traffic likely to be affected by pilot pollution, providing a lesser weighting to areas where pilot pollution may exist but the affected traffic is low. The curves are used as follows:
Pilot Factor MappingThis curve maps pilot factors to pilot ratios. The pilot factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1. Typically, if the pilot ratio exceeds 7 dB, establishing a pilot is unlikely. If it is less than 7 dB, establishing a pilot is more likely. The pilot factor is high (close to one) if establishing a pilot in a bin is unlikely, and low (close to zero) if establishing a pilot is likely. Usage Factor MappingThis curve maps usage factors to user densities. The usage factor is a non-dimensional factor from 0 to 1 that is determined for each bin in the analysis area. The usage factor is high (close to one) in bins where the need to establish a pilot is high, and low (close to zero) in bins where the need to establish a pilot is low.
You can edit the usage and pilot curves to modify the relationship between the X- and Y-axes. This relationship affects the final calculated Pilot Pollution Index values. Adjusting the usage and pilot curves enables you to model possible changes to your network or isolate any factors causing pilot pollution. For example, if you move the usage curve to the right, higher user density/average user density ratio values must be met before the bins are considered to be areas where the need for pilot coverage is high.
The X-axis of the usage factor curve is in milli-Erlangs per km2. If you have assigned a traffic map with values in subscribers per km2 to any subscriber types, the values will be converted to Erlangs per km2 before the usage factor curve is applied.
Correlation model settings for cdma2000

The correlation model settings enable you to define settings for modeling fading. You can define settings for the following two types of correlation models for slow fading of signals:
Angularuses a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. The correlation factor is based on the angular separation of the two sectors at the mobile. The correlation factors are used in the calculation of
280
handover gain and in the generation of fading signal values. For more information on the calculations used to determine the angular correlation factor, see Using a correlation model to model slow fading on page 540.
Non-angularuses correlation factors for co-site sectors and non co-site sectors
For more information on slow fading, see Slow fading on page 539.
Power control settings for cdma2000

The power control settings enable you to define power control errors that you can simulate during an analysis (see To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000 on page 424). Power control errors are caused by delays of power control commands and power control step, and can affect network performance. For more information on how effective power controls can control interference, see Controlling interference on page 538.
Carrier settings for cdma2000

The carrier settings enable you to define the power amplifier (PA) threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings for the carriers that you created on the Spectrum Allocation panel. The PA threshold, noise rise, and preference weightings are soft thresholds. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA threshold or noise rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If there are no more carriers, the traffic will exceed the soft limits rather than be blocked. For more information on how to define carriers, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 on page 276. You can define the standard that is assigned to each carrier:
IS-95the carrier supports Interim Standard 95 (IS-95) traffic only. Traffic on this carrier will be limited to bearers with radio configurations RC1 and RC2. 1xRTTthe carrier supports single carrier (1x) radio transmission technology (1xRTT). Traffic on this carrier is permitted in all radio configurations. EV-DOthe carrier supports Evolution - Data Only (EV-DO) traffic (IS-856).
281
PA Threshold
The PA Threshold value is a soft target. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached. The PA Threshold does not apply to EV-DO carriers.
To define general settings for cdma2000

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Network Settings. In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000. The cdma2000 panel opens with the General tab selected by default.
In the Pilot Pollution Margin box, type a value to define the power-tointerference (Ec/Io) margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a Pilot signal will interfere with the desired signal, or accept the default. Type a value in the Reverse Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the reverse link. Type a value in the Forward Other System Interference box to define the noise contributed by other systems on the forward link.
4 5
282
In the Best Ec Threshold box, type a value to define the threshold for the Pilot - Best Ec Server analysis layer. This value is used only for the Pilot - Best Ec Server analysis layer. The analysis layer shows the best server at each location where the Ec is above this value. For more information on analysis layers, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409.
In the Pilot Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve:
Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use, and then click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a Pilot Factor Mapping curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
The Pilot Factor Mapping curve is used to determine the likelihood of establishing a pilot for each bin in the analysis area. 8 In the Usage Factor Mapping section, do one of the following, or accept the default curve:
Click Browse, navigate to the curve file that you want to use, and then click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a Usage Factor Mapping curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
The Usage Factor Mapping curve is used with the Pilot Factor Mapping curve to determine the Pilot Pollution Index analysis layer. 9 Do one of the following:
To define correlation model settings for cdma2000

1 2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000. On the cdma2000 panel, click the Correlation Model tab.
283
On the Correlation Model tab, do one of the following:
To use an angular correlation model, choose Angular from the list, and type values in the boxes in the Parameters table. For more information on these parameters and the associated equation, see Slow fading on page 539. To use a non-angular correlation model, choose Non-Angular from the list, and type values in either of the following boxes in the Parameters table:
Inter-site Correlation Factorthe correlation factor for signals arriving from co-site sectors or carriers, which can be other sectors within a site or other carriers within a sector Intra-site Correlation Factorthe correlation factor for signals arriving from sectors at different sites Do one of the following:
284
To define power control settings for cdma2000

1 2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000. On the cdma2000 panel, click the Power Control tab.
Type a value in either of the following boxes to define the power control deviation:
Reverse Power Control Deviationthe standard deviation of the reverse signal due to power control errors Forward Power Control Deviationthe standard deviation of the forward signal due to power control errors
Type values in either of the following boxes to define the power control error:
Mean Reverse Power Control Errorthe mean reverse signal error due to power control errors. Mean Forward Power Control Errorthe mean forward signal error due to power control errors. Click OK to save your settings and close the Network Settings dialog box. Choose another item in the tree view. Click another tab.
285
To define carrier settings for cdma2000

1 2 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA and choose cdma2000. On the cdma2000 panel, click the Carrier tab.
For each carrier listed in the Carrier column, type values in any of the following columns:
Channel Namean optional user-defined channel name. By default, the Channel Name is the same as the Carrier. If you type user-defined channel names in the Channel Name column, they will be used throughout Mentum Planet instead of the Carrier. PA Thresholdthe target percentage of the power at the power amplifier for all sectors assigned to the carrier. For more information, see PA Threshold on page 282. For information on assigning carriers to sectors, see To assign carriers to sectors on page 347. Noise Risethe noise rise target for all sectors assigned to the carrier. This value is a soft target. When you generate an analysis, subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the Preference Weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all
286
available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.
Preference Weightingsa relative weighting value for the carrier that represents the distribution of preferred use for the carriers listed in the Carrier column. When you assign weightings for carriers, the Preference column will automatically update to display the percentage of use for each carrier. If you assign a preference weight of 0, it does not mean that the carrier will not carry any traffic, but that it is the least preferred carrier. EV-DO carriers are considered separately from IS-95 and 1xRTT carriers.
For more information on the Carriers table, press the F1 key. 4 From the Standard column, choose the type of 3GPP cdma2000 carrier:

IS-95 1xRTT EV-DO
For more information, see Carrier settings for cdma2000 on page 281. If you choose EV-DO, an EV-DO node is created under the cdma2000 node in the Network Settings tree view. 5 Do one of the following:
To define EV-DO network settings for cdma2000

The EV-DO panel is only available if you assigned EV-DO to one or more carriers on the cdma2000 Carriers tab. For more information, see To define carrier settings for cdma2000 on page 286. You must have a license to generate EV-DO analyses. For more information on EV-DO analyses, see Chapter 20: Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers on page 455. 1 In the tree view of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, expand CDMA, then expand cdma2000 and choose EV-DO. The EV-DO panel is displayed with the EV-DO General tab selected.
287
From the EV-DO Revision list, choose one of the following:

Rev. 0supports the EV-DO IS-856 Rev. 0 standard. Rev. Asupports the EV-DO IS-856 Rev. A standard
If there is no suitable EV-DO bearer for the chosen revision, a compatible EV-DO bearer from the other revision will be used. 3 In the EV-DO Pilot Pollution Margin box, type a value to define the power-to-interference (Ec/Io) margin, relative to the best server, within which a pilot signal will interfere with the desired signal, or accept the default. In the EV-DO Traffic Classes section, enable any of the following options:
Conversationalcircuit-switched traffic such as voice or video conferencing Interactiveinteractive applications, such as Web browsing Streamingstreaming video Backgroundemail, telemetry
These options identify the QoS traffic classes to be carried by EV-DO carriers.
288
In the DRC Gain To Handoff State Map table, modify the DRC Gain value for any of the handoff states or accept the defaults. The DRC Gain value is relative to the power of the reverse pilot channel. The DRC Gain value is used to calculate the power of the reverse DRC channel. Handoff state for EV-DO is defined on the reverse link only.
Click the Forward Data Rates tab.
7 8
In the Available column, enable any of the forward data rates that you want to have available for use. If you want to change the Ec/Nt value for a data rate, type a new value in the Ec/Nt column. The Ec/Nt value is the ratio of pilot channel chip energy to total spectral noise density, which comprises sector-to-sector interference, thermal noise, and noise power from other networks. The mobile constantly measures Ec/Nt in order to predict the highest achievable data rate for the packet. In an EV-DO forward link simulation, this value is calculated for each bin. The default values are the required Ec/Nt to achieve 1% packet error rate (PER).
289
290
15.
Chapter 15: Defining cdma2000 Subscribers
Defining cdma2000 Subscribers

This chapter describes how to use the Subscriber Manager to define the subscribers in your network. Subscribers are categorized into types, which are used when you generate an analysis of your cdma2000 network. Creating subscriber types that account for the possible variations of subscribers enables you to generate reliable and comprehensive analyses of your cdma2000 network.
Understanding cdma2000 subscribers Importing and exporting subscriber information Workflow for creating cdma2000 subscriber types Defining clutter types for cdma2000 Defining cdma2000 bearers Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 Defining session types for cdma2000 Defining quality types for cdma2000 Defining service types for cdma2000 Defining subscriber types for cdma2000
291
Understanding cdma2000 subscribers

The characteristics of subscribers are defined using the categories in the Subscriber Manager. You can create a diverse mix of subscribers by defining different services, quality types, and user equipment types and assigning them to subscriber types. Subscriber types are used with Monte Carlo and rapid planning analyses. Rapid planning analyses can also use a nominal subscriber, which contains a subset of the subscriber information. The nodes within the Subscriber Manager represent building blocks for subscriber types:
Subscriber Typesconsolidate the information from the other nodes in the Subscriber Manager into various combinations to represent the mix of subscribers in your network. Servicesare the applications that a subscriber uses. You can define circuit-switched services and packet-switched services. EV-DO can only be used with packet-switched services. Qualitiesdefine the guaranteed and maximum data rates of a service. Session Typesmodel the stream of packets which is used to calculate the effective amount of time that a subscriber uses a packet-switched service. You can assign session types to packetswitched service types. Subscriber Equipment Typesrepresent the types of mobile equipment that are available in your network. Bearersrepresent traffic channels representing the various cdma2000 1xRTT and EV-DO Radio Configurations, and are assigned to subscriber equipment types. For EV-DO, only reverse bearers need to be defined. Clutter Typesenable you to define the characteristics of the environments in which services are used. Typically, a Clutter Type includes one or more clutter classes.
For each subscriber type, you must choose a subscriber equipment type and traffic map. You can define multiple usage types, each of which comprises weightings to spread subscribers within the four different environments, a quality, and a service type. Figure 15.1 shows how the information related to subscriber types is organized hierarchically. This hierarchy is reflected in the workflow for
292
Defining cdma2000 Subscribers CDMA User Guide
defining subscriber types. For example, you need to define bearers (or use the defaults) before you define subscriber equipment bands, because you need to assign bearers to subscriber equipment bands. For details on the workflow, see Workflow for creating cdma2000 subscriber types on page 295.
Subscriber Types
Subscriber Equipment Types
Usages (defined as part of Subscriber Types)
Technology Bands
Environments
Services
Qualities
(defined for each Clutter Type and weighted per Usage)
Bearers
Clutter Types
Session Types
Figure 15.1 Subscriber Manager information hierarchy
For a detailed example of how to define a subscriber type, see Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 on page 323. This example shows you how to define usages, explains the effect of weighting, and describes how the settings that you specify for the subscriber type translate into a real-world scenario. Mentum Planet provides a set of default items for the Subscriber Manager, including bearers, clutter types, services, and subscriber types. To use the defaults, you must import subscriber settings using the Import Wizard. See Importing and exporting subscriber information on page 294.
cdma2000 subscriber types and rapid planning

If you are generating a rapid planning analysis, you can use the subscriber types defined using the Subscriber Manager or you can use a nominal subscriber. Rapid planning uses only a small subset of the information in the Subscriber Manager. Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics quickly, rather than investing the time required to define detailed subscriber types using the Subscriber Manager. For more
293
information on defining a nominal subscriber, see Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning on page 388.
Importing and exporting subscriber information

You can import or export subscriber data using Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. In order to simplify the process of subscriber creation, you can use predefined subscriber worksheets to set common subscriber values. Pre-defined templates are located in the Subscriber Data folder within a project folder.
As illustrated in Figure 15.1 on page 293, subscriber types consist of many inter-related elements. In order for the import of pre-defined subscriber types to be successful, all elements must be defined. Before using the pre-defined templates, review the details in the Readme.txt file located in the Subscriber Data folder.
To import pre-defined subscriber information

1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import. The Import Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard, see Chapter 13, Working with Network and Project Data, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. 2 On the File Location page, do the following:

Choose Microsoft Excel. Click the Browse button, navigate to the Subscriber Data folder located within the project folder, choose the pre-defined templates you want to use and click Open.
3 4
Click Next. On the Data Selection page, enable the check boxes next to the data you want to import and click Finish.
294
To import or export subscriber information

When you export data, an Excel Spreadsheet is created that contains subscriber settings divided into different worksheets. 1 Right-click a node in the Subscriber Manager and choose Import or Export. The Import Wizard or Export Wizard opens. For information on how to use the Import Wizard or Export Wizard, see Chapter 13, Working with Network and Project Data, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. 2 Follow the prompts in the Wizard.
Workflow for creating cdma2000 subscriber types

Step 1
Generate traffic maps for the services and area that you want to analyze. For information on creating traffic maps, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. If required, define clutter types. See Defining clutter types for cdma2000 on page 296. If required, define bearers and then define subscriber equipment types, assigning bearers to the technology bands for each type. See

Step 2 Step 3
Defining cdma2000 bearers on page 301 Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 on page 309
Step 4
If required, define session types, and then define service types, assigning session types to packet-switched services. See
Defining session types for cdma2000 on page 311 Defining service types for cdma2000 on page 316
Step 5
If required, define quality types. See Defining quality types for cdma2000 on page 314.
295
Step 6
If required, create subscriber types. See Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 on page 323.
To simplify the creation of subscriber types, you can import default subscriber settings and then modify the settings as required. See Importing and exporting subscriber information on page 294.
Defining clutter types for cdma2000

Clutter types are groupings of clutter classes contained in the clutter grid. For more information, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Grouping clutter classes simplifies your workflow by enabling you to define characteristics only once for the type (rather then once for each clutter class in the clutter grid). For example, you could create a type called Populated Areas - Low Density, and assign the clutter classes Suburban, Town, Village, and Semi-Rural to it. For each clutter type, you can define the characteristics of the environments within that clutter type. The available environments are:

Outdooropen air environments Indoorbuildings or structures (normally representing areas where single wall penetration is required) Deep Indoorin-building areas where two-wall penetration is required, or dense buildings where higher than normal penetration losses are experienced Vehicularmoving vehicles
You can enable one or more of the environments for a clutter type. Environments are used when you define usage types for a subscriber type (see Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 on page 323 for details). For each usage type, you can define a weighting indicating the amount of time that usage type occurs in each environment (for example, you could define a business subscriber who uses voice service in an outdoor environment 10% of the time). For all of the environments, you can define the penetration loss and the required fast fading margin. For the Vehicular environment, you can also define the speed at which the vehicle is traveling. Figure 15.2 shows a sample clutter file, and shows how example clutter types could be applied to the clutter classes in the file. In the figure, the Village and Suburban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - Low Density
296
clutter type, and the Urban and Dense Urban clutter classes are grouped into the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type. Figure 15.2 also provides example settings for each clutter type. These settings are typical of urban and suburban environments.
Village
Dense urban Urban
Suburban Clutter type: Populated Areas - Low Density Outdoor fast fading: 6 dB penetration loss: 0 dB Indoor fast fading: 0 dB penetration loss: 9 dB Deep Indoor not enabled Vehicular fast fading: 4 dB penetration loss: 6 dB speed: 50 km/h Figure 15.2 Examples of clutter types Clutter type: Populated Areas - High Density Outdoor fast fading: 7 dB penetration loss: 0 dB Indoor fast fading: 0 dB penetration loss: 11 dB Deep Indoor fast fading: 0 dB penetration loss: 22 dB Vehicular fast fading: 3 dB penetration loss: 6 dB speed: 30 km/h
When you run a Monte Carlo simulation, if an environment does not apply to a particular type of clutter (for example, in Figure 15.2, the deep indoor environment does not apply to the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type), the simulation will not place any subscribers in that type of clutter in that environment. In the example in Figure 15.2, no subscribers would be
297
using services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - Low Density clutter type, but you could have subscribers using services in a deep indoor environment in the Populated Areas - High Density clutter type. When you assign clutter classes to a clutter type, each clutter class inherits the settings that you defined for the clutter type. The cdma2000 Simulation tool will use default settings, shown in Table 15.1, for clutter classes that are not assigned to a clutter type.
Table 15.1 Default environment settings Setting Fast fading margin Penetration loss Speed Outdoor 0 dB 0 dB N/A Vehicular 0 dB 7 dB 50 km/h Indoor 0 dB 10 dB N/A Deep Indoor 0 dB 20 dB N/A
For Downlink Orthogonality, the default value is 100%, and for Slow Fading Standard Deviation, the default value is 7 dB.
To define clutter types for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Clutter Types and choose New. The Create New - Clutter Type dialog box opens.
298
2 3 4
In the Name box, type a name for the clutter type. In the Comments box, type a description for the clutter type. To define the orthogonality factor for the clutter type, type a value in the Downlink Orthogonality box. A value of 100% represents perfect orthogonality. To define the standard deviation for slow fading of the clutter type, type a value in the Slow Fading Standard Deviation box. This value is used to model the shadowing from obstacles that cannot be handled by a propagation model. Slightly higher values (approximately 8 dB) may be appropriate for high density urban areas, lower values (approximately 6.5 dB) for open areas.
299
Enable any of the following check boxes to choose environments for the clutter type and define the fast fading margin and penetration loss specific to the environment:
Enable Outdoorenables the outdoor environment for the clutter type Enable Vehicularenables the vehicular environment for the clutter type Enable Indoorenables the indoor environment for the clutter type Enable Deep Indoorenables the deep indoor environment for the clutter type
For more information on the settings associated with these environments, press the F1 key. 7 If you enabled the Vehicular environment, type a value in the Vehicular Speed box or accept the default. The speed is used in conjunction with the sector settings to determine whether a subscriber will be served by a sector. Subscribers that exceed the maximum speed for a sector will not be served by the sector. For more information, see Quality settings for cdma2000 on page 346. 8 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing clutter type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the clutter type and choosing Edit.
To assign clutter classes to clutter types for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Clutter Types and choose Assign Clutter Classes. The Assign Clutter Classes dialog box opens.
300
Choose a clutter type from the Clutter Types list, and then choose one or more clutter classes from the Unassigned Clutter Classes list, and click Assign. The clutter classes in the Unassigned Clutter Classes list are defined in the clutter grid file for the project. For more information, see Chapter 1, Getting Started with Mentum Planet, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. The cdma2000 Simulation tool will use default settings for any unassigned clutter classes.
Click Save and then click Close.
To unassign clutter classes from a clutter type, choose a clutter class under a clutter type node in the Clutter Types section, and click Unassign. You can create a new clutter type by clicking New in the Assign Clutter Classes dialog box. To modify the properties of the new clutter type, click Edit. The Edit - Clutter Type dialog box opens.
Defining cdma2000 bearers

Bearers represent the traffic channels in terms of their service data rate and dedicated bearers in terms of their channel data rate. Bearers are displayed under the Bearers node in the Subscriber Manager and are assigned to
301
subscriber equipment types. A default set of bearers is supplied with Mentum Planet, but you can define additional bearers or modify any of the default bearers. The following sections provide information about cdma2000 bearers. For information about W-CDMA bearers, see Defining W-CDMA bearers on page 58. If you intend to generate an analysis using EV-DO carriers, you must define at least one EV-DO reverse link bearer. See To define EV-DO bearers on page 307.
cdma2000 bearers
Standard cdma2000 bearers are configured with

direction (reverse or forward) radio configuration service data rate signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) to frame erasure rate (FER) mapping table for both fundamental and supplemental channels forward link channel elements required for the fundamental channel and supplemental channels forward link traffic channel power offsets
Bearer Eb/No to FER
The Eb/No to FER mapping is defined using a curve that can be created or edited using the Curve Editor. When you generate analysis layers, this mapping is used to calculate the Forward Service FER value from the Forward - Eb/No analysis layer. For information on the Forward - Eb/No layer and the Forward Service FER value, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409. To ensure that borderline Eb/No values are accounted for, the points you define for the curve should exceed the Eb/No values that you are interested in analyzing. If values generated by the analysis exceed your defined range, they will be represented by the last defined point. The Curve Editor interpolates values linearly, based on Eb/No and FER pairs. The FER values are calculated as follows:
For Eb/No values greater than the highest point in the curve, the FER at that highest point is assigned. In the example in
302
Figure 15.3, for Eb/No values over 8.7 dB, a FER value of 0% is assigned.
For Eb/No values defined in the range of the curve, the Curve Editor linearly assigns a FER value based on the two nearest values, above and below. In the example in Figure 15.3, an Eb/ No value of 4.3 dB is assigned a FER value of 12%. For Eb/No values less than the lowest point in the curve, the FER at the lowest point is assigned. In the example in Figure 15.3, for Eb/No values less than -2.3 dB, a FER value of 90% is assigned.
Figure 15.3 Curve Editor displaying the linear relationship between Eb/No and FER
Supplemental channels
cdma2000 supports the modeling of supplemental channels. As many as seven supplemental channels are supported per fundamental channel for RC1 and RC2 (IS-95B only) and as many as two for radio configurations RC3 to RC5. Supplemental channels are allocated to a call as needed to send a burst of data. They are not handed off. When you define cdma2000 bearers, you can choose the radio configuration and define the data rate for the bearer such that supplemental channels are automatically allocated as required. For example, if you choose RC1 with a data rate of 9.6 kbps, only one fundamental channel
303
is allocated. If you choose a data rate of 19.2 kbps, one fundamental channel and one supplemental channel are allocated. When you generate analysis layers, supplemental channels are taken into consideration. For example, if a mobile is transmitting using a fundamental and a supplemental channel, the power used is greater than if only a fundamental channel were in use.
To define cdma2000 bearers

For information on defining EV-DO bearers, see To define EV-DO bearers on page 307.
1 2
In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Bearers and choose New. In the New Bearer dialog box, from the Select the Type of Bearer Required list, choose cdma2000 Bearer, and click OK. The Create New - cdma2000 Bearer dialog box opens.
304
3 4 5
In the Name box, type a name for the bearer. In the Comment box, type a description for the bearer. In the Direction section, choose one of the following options to define the direction of the bearer:

Reverse Forward
Typically, you would create a set of two bearers: one for the reverse link and one for the forward link. 6 In the Radio Configuration section, choose the traffic channel transmission format that applies to the bearer. The configurations that are available depend on whether you choose Reverse or Forward in the Direction section (see Step 5). For the reverse link, you can choose from RC1 to RC4, and for the forward link, you can choose from RC1 to RC5. These are standard cdma2000 radio configurations with a spreading rate of 1. Radio configurations with a spreading rate of 3 are not supported. 7 From the Service Data Rate list, choose the service data rate for the traffic channels. The Number of Supplemental Channels box updates automatically to show the number of supplemental channels that will be assigned to support the data rate that you specified. The Channel Data Rate box updates automatically to take into account the applicable Forward Error Correction (FEC) Convolutional Coding rate dictated by the standard that is applied to the service data rate. 8 From the Technology Type list, choose the type of technology for the bearer. The only technology available for the bearer is cdma2000. 9 In the Fundamental Eb/No to FER Mapping section, do one of the following:
305
10 If you are defining a forward link bearer, in the Fundamental Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer. This number represents the number of channel elements required by the fundamental channel for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network). The number of channel elements that each sector can support is defined on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box. 11 In the Supplemental Eb/No to FER Mapping section, do one of the following:
Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to FER curve and click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to FER curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
You must choose an Eb/No to FER curve for supplemental channels, even for bearers that do not need a supplemental channel. 12 If you are defining a forward link bearer, type values for the following:
Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offsetthe maximum power correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a persector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates. Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offsetthe minimum power correction value to be applied for the bearer. This box, in conjunction with the Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a persector basis to account for the different power requirements of bearers or services with different data rates. Supplemental Channel Elements the number of supplemental channel elements used by the bearer. This number represents the number of channel elements required by the Supplemental channel(s) for the given Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements does not necessarily map directly to the number of traffic channels (depending on the hardware in your network).
306
13 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing bearer from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the bearer and choosing Edit.
To define EV-DO bearers

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Bearers and choose New. In the New Bearer dialog box, from the Select the Type of Bearer Required list, choose cdma2000 1xEV-DO Bearer, and click OK. The Create New - cdma2000 1xEV-DO Bearer dialog box opens.
In the EV-DO Revision section, choose one of the following:

Rev. 0enables the data rates supported by IS-856 Revision 0 Rev. Aenables the data rates supported by IS-856 Revision A
Voice over IP (a Conversational Traffic QoS Class used with a packetswitched service) is allowed only with EV-DO Rev. A.
307
From the Service Data Rate list, choose the rate for user data carried by the data channel or accept the default. The Service Data Rate must be within the Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate and the Maximum Uplink Data Rate of the associated Quality types. For more information, see Defining quality types for cdma2000 on page 314.
In the Data Channel Gain box, type a value to define the gain for the data channel or accept the default. The default value will change, depending on the Service Data Rate you chose in Step 4.
From the Technology Type list, choose the type of technology for the bearer. The only technology available for the bearer is cdma2000. In the Pilot Ec/Nt to Data PER section, do one of the following:
Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Pilot Ec/Nt to Data PER curve and click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Pilot Ec/Nt to Data PER curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
The Pilot Ec/Nt to Data PER curve relates to both the data channel and the pilot channel. This curve, along with the Required Uplink FER/PER of the data channel (specified for the service in the Subscriber Manager), determine the Required Pilot Channel Ec/Nt at the base station receiver for each users reverse link signal in order to guarantee the desired PER on the data channel. 8 In the Site Channel Elements box, type the number of channel elements used by the bearer for the reverse link. This number represents the number of channel elements required by the site for the chosen Service Data Rate. The number of channel elements that each sector can support is defined on the Hardware panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. 9 Click OK.
308
Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000

The Subscriber Manager enables you to group the mobile equipment types in your network into subscriber equipment types. When you create a subscriber equipment type, you can define subscriber equipment technology band types that contain information about the performance of subscriber equipment for a particular technology and band. For example, you could create a subscriber equipment type that contains five subscriber equipment technology bands that represent the capabilities of the mobile on each of the bands. For more information on creating technology bands, see To create a new cdma2000 technology band on page 278.
To define subscriber equipment types for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Subscriber Equipment Types and choose New. The Create New - Mobile Equipment dialog box opens. 2 3 4 In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber equipment type. In the Comments box, type a description for the subscriber equipment type. Click OK.
To define subscriber equipment bands for cdma2000

When you define subscriber equipment bands, you define the characteristics of the band, and then assign bearers to it. If you assign multiple bearers to the equipment band, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, the most efficient bearer that meets the quality requirement of the service for the subscriber type will be used for each individual subscriber in the analysis. The most efficient bearer is determined by the radio configuration with the most efficient coding scheme (for example, RC4 will be chosen over RC3). If multiple bearers are available with the chosen radio configuration, then the bearer with the highest data rate is used. 1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, expand Subscriber Equipment Types, expand an equipment type, right-click Technology Bands and choose New. The Create New - Mobile Equipment Technology Band dialog box opens.
309
To define the transmit power, type a value in the following boxes:
Maximum Transmit Powerthe maximum transmit power at the power amplifier output Minimum Transmit Powerthe minimum transmit power at the power amplifier output
In the Maximum Active Servers box, type a value to define the maximum number of handover servers in the active set (i.e., the number of rake fingers) supported by the equipment type. In the Antenna Gain box, type a value to define the antenna gain. In the Receiver Noise Figure box, type a value to define the noise figure of the receiver. In the Body Loss (Voice) box, type a value to define the body loss for voice traffic. In the Body Loss (Data) box, type a value to define type a value to define the body loss for data traffic.
4 5 6 7
310
From the Technology Band list, choose the band for this equipment type. Technology bands are defined in the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. For more information, see Defining cdma2000 network settings on page 279.
If the mobile equipment type supports HSDPA, enable the HSDPA Active check box and choose a terminal category from the HSDPA Terminal Category list. To assign a bearer to the equipment type, choose a bearer from the Available list and click Add. The bearer is added to the Assigned list. To unassign a bearer from the equipment type, choose a bearer from the Selected list and click Remove. The bearer is added to the Available list.
10 In the Bearers section, do either of the following:
11 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber equipment technology band from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the subscriber equipment technology band and choosing Edit.
Defining session types for cdma2000

Session types are used to characterize the size and distribution of sessions in your network. A session defines the characteristics of a subscribers use of a packet-switched service (for example, e-mail or Web browsing), and consists of one or more packet arrivals. Once you create session types, they can be assigned to packet-switched services. For more information on packetswitched services, see Defining service types for cdma2000 on page 316. For packet-switched traffic, the distribution of packets during simulation impacts how queued traffic is modeled. Packet-switched sessions use the traffic model recommended by the European Telecommunications Standard Institute (ETSI) to model packet traffic. This model is described in UMTS 30.03 version 3.2.0, Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS): Selection procedure for the choice of radio transmission technologies of the UMTS, which is available at http:// www.etsi.org. Figure 15.4 shows how a packet call is modeled using this traffic model. The horizontal axis represents the time elapsed, and the vertical lines represent
311
individual packets. The arrival of several packets in a burst is called a packet call, and the arrival of these packet calls is called a packet service (or packetswitched) session. The reading time is the amount of time that a user spends studying data before making another packet call.
Packet timeout Individual packet First packet arrives at base station buffer Interarrival time between packets Reading time Last packet arrives at base station buffer
Packet calls
Time
Packet service session Figure 15.4 Packet service session
When you define session types using the Session Type dialog box, the following values in the dialog box refer to the ETSI model:

Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc) Mean Reading Time (Dpc) Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd) Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd) Packet Timeout
Values used in the ETSI model are displayed in brackets following the label. For example, Mean No. of Packet Calls refers to the Npc value in the ETSI model.
To define session types for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Session Types and choose New. The Create New - Session Type dialog box opens.
312
2 3 4
In the Name box, type a name for the session type. In the Comments box, type a description for the session type. To define the packet settings, type a value in any of the following boxes (see Figure 15.4 for details about how these values are modeled):
Mean No. of Packet Calls (Npc)the mean number of packet calls in a packet service session Mean Reading Time (Dpc)the mean reading time between packet calls in seconds. Mean No. of Packets Within a Packet Call (Nd)the mean number of packets in a packet call Mean Interarrival Time Between Packets (Dd)the mean interarrival time between packets Packet Timeoutthe time between the last packet in a packet call and the designated end of the packet call (i.e., before the reading time starts)
In the Packet Size Distribution section, choose an option to model the distribution of packet sizes:

Paretouses a Pareto distribution model Poissonuses a Poisson distribution model
313
To define the packet size based on distribution type, do one of the following:
If you chose Pareto as the distribution type, type a value in all of the following boxes to define the packet size: Packet Size Alphathe Alpha packet distribution parameter for Pareto distributions Minimum Packet Sizethe minimum size of a packet Maximum Packet Sizethe maximum size of a packet If you chose Poisson as the distribution type, type a value in the Mean Packet Size box to define the mean packet size.

Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing session type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the session type and choosing
Edit.
Defining quality types for cdma2000

When you define the usages for subscriber types, you can specify the quality for each usage. The quality type defines two levels of throughput in each direction for the service assigned to the usage. Each quality type contains settings for the guaranteed and maximum data rates of the service. When you generate an analysis, if the guaranteed data rate is not available at a location, then the service is not available at that location.
To define quality types for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Qualities and choose New. The Create New - Quality dialog box opens.
314
2 3 4
In the Name box, type a name for the quality type. In the Comment box, type a description for the quality type. To define the reverse link data rate, type values in any of the following boxes:
Guaranteed Uplink Data Ratethe guaranteed reverse link data rate required by the quality type Maximum Uplink Data Ratethe maximum reverse link data rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Uplink Data Rate.
The guaranteed uplink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the uplink. If a bearer with a rate that falls between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served. In an EV-DO analysis, however, Mentum Planet always attempts to serve subscribers at the highest possible data rate on the downlink. 5 To define the forward link data rate, type values in any of the following boxes:
Guaranteed Downlink Data Ratethe guaranteed forward link data rate required by the quality type Maximum Downlink Data Ratethe maximum forward link data rate required by the quality type. This value cannot be lower than the value specified for the Guaranteed Downlink Data Rate.
The guaranteed downlink data rate is used in a Monte Carlo analysis to determine a suitable bearer for the downlink. If a bearer with a rate that
315
falls between the guaranteed and maximum data rate is not available, the subscriber cannot be served. 6 7 In the Traffic QoS Class section, choose the traffic class that applies to the quality and its associated data rates. Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing quality type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the quality type and choosing Edit.
Defining service types for cdma2000

Service types are the applications that your subscribers are using. You can define the following types of services:
Circuit-switched (such as voice)these types of services are delay intolerant, and require dedicated bearers Packet-switched (such as Web browsing)these types of services have various levels of delay tolerance, from delay intolerant to delay tolerant. The delay-intolerant services require dedicated bearers, while the delay-tolerant services will use shared bearers if available in the technology.
To define circuit-switched service types for cdma2000

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Services and choose New. In the New Service dialog box, choose Circuit Switched Service from the list, and click OK. The Create New - Circuit Switched Service dialog box opens.
316
3 4 5
In the Name box, type a name for the circuit-switched service type. In the Comments box, type a description for the circuit-switched service type. In the Erlangs per Subscriber box, type a value to define the number of Erlangs generated by each subscriber type associated with this service. During a Monte Carlo analysis, when subscribers are distributed using the traffic map associated with the subscriber type, this value determines the number of subscribers that are distributed per service. For example, a value of 1 in this box results in one subscriber distributed for each subscriber in the traffic map. A value of 0.5 results in half the number of subscribers that are in the traffic map being distributed.
To define the percentage of time that traffic is transmitted in a direction, type values in either of the following boxes:
Uplink Activity Factorthe percentage of time reverse link traffic is actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF. Downlink Activity Factorthe percentage of time forward link traffic is actually transmitted. During the balance of time, the link is OFF.
317
To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes:
Uplink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit control overhead for reverse link traffic Downlink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit control overhead for forward link traffic
The Uplink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically based on the Uplink Activity Factor and Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead. The Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead is calculated as a percentage of the Uplink Activity Factor and then added to the Uplink Activity Factor. For example, if the Uplink Activity Factor is 50% and the Uplink Retransmit and Control Overhead value is 2%, then the Uplink Channel Activity Factor is 51 = (50+50*0.02). The Downlink Channel Activity Factor updates automatically in the same way, based on the Downlink Activity Factor and Downlink Retransmit and Control Overhead. 8 To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box. Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited. You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority overrides the service priority. 9 To define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered, type a value in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box. The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a Monte Carlo or rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for the Forward - Best Server, Reverse - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers. For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less forward link service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector forward link service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including Pilot - Best Ec/Io.
318
10 To define the maximum FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:
Required Uplink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the reverse link Required Downlink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the forward link
11 To define the number of circuits from one server that are available to the subscriber type associated with this service type, type a value in the Number of Downlink Connections box. For cdma2000, this value is typically 1. 12 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing circuit-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the circuit-switched service type and choosing Edit.
To define packet-switched service types for cdma2000

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Services and choose New. In the New Service dialog box, choose Packet Switched Service from the list, and click OK. The Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box opens.
319
3 4 5
In the Name box, type a name for the packet-switched service type. In the Comments box, type a description for the packet-switched service type. In the Input Load section, do one of the following to define the mean input load:
To define the mean input load in kilobits per hour, choose the Kilobits/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section. To define the mean input load in sessions per hour, choose the Sessions/Hour option and type a value in the box at the right of the section. To define the mean input load in Erlangs per subscriber, choose the Erlangs/Subscriber option and type a value in the box at the right of the section.
These values represent the average input load over a sustained period, not a peak or instantaneous load.
320
From the Session Type list, choose a session type for this service type. For more information on session types, see Defining session types for cdma2000 on page 311.
In the Symmetry section, do one of the following to define the primary and non-primary traffic on the channel:
Choose the Uplink option as the primary direction of traffic, and then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and nonprimary directions. Choose the Downlink option as the primary direction of traffic, and then type in the Link Asymmetry Factor box a multiplier to define the asymmetry factor between the primary and nonprimary directions.
The asymmetry factor defines the relationship between primary traffic and non-primary traffic. For example, choosing Downlink as the primary direction and defining an asymmetry factor of 0.1 would set the reverse link traffic to be 0.1 times that of the primary forward link direction. 8 To define the overhead factor for retransmit and control of traffic, type values in either of the following boxes:
Uplink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit and control overhead for reverse link traffic Downlink Retransmit and Control Overheadretransmit and control overhead for forward link traffic
To define the priority of the service type, type a value in the Priority box. Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority, and indicate the order in which services are allocated resources when network capacity is limited. You can also assign a priority to subscriber types. If you assign a priority to a subscriber type, and enable the Use Priority check box for the subscriber type, when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the subscriber type priority will override the service priority for that subscriber type.
10 To define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered, type a value in the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box. The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a Monte Carlo or rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for
321
the Forward - Best Server, Reverse - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers. For a Monte Carlo analysis, increasing this value may mean that some locations with discrete subscribers will no longer be regarded as covered. The discrete subscribers not being served will cause less forward link service power to be transmitted by the sector. Because the sector forward link service power is an input to the layer generation, the decrease in power will affect many layers, including Pilot - BestEc/Io. 11 To define the FER/PER at which this service is able to function, type values in either of the following boxes:
Required Uplink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the reverse link Required Downlink FER/PERthe required FER/PER at the forward link
12 To define the number of circuits from one server that are available to the subscriber type associated with this service type, type a value in the Number of Downlink Connections box. For cdma2000, this value is typically 1. 13 If you want to view information about the reverse link and forward link channel activity factors, click Illustration. The Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box opens. This dialog box enables you to choose bearers that could potentially be assigned to this service. When you choose a bearer, the fields update to show the values that would be used in an analysis for this service type if the bearers were to be used for this service.
322
14 From the Uplink Bearer and Downlink Bearer lists, choose the bearers for which you want to view statistics. The other fields in the dialog box automatically display values depending on reverse link bearer and forward link bearer that you choose. The bearers that you choose in the entries in the Illustration window are for illustration purposes only. They do not affect the analysis. 15 Click Close to close the Packet Switched Service Illustration dialog box. 16 Click OK to close the Create New - Packet Switched Service dialog box.
You can modify the properties of an existing packet-switched service type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the packet-switched service type and choosing Edit.
Defining subscriber types for cdma2000

Subscriber types are defined by:

the subscriber equipment used the traffic map on which the subscriber type is based the different kinds of services that a subscriber uses and the quality that applies to each service the environments where the usage takes place
The information contained in a subscriber type is used when you generate Monte Carlo simulations or analysis layers.
The total number of subscribers is defined by the traffic map and scaling, not by the number of usage types or environments. The total number of subscribers for each subscriber type is spread across the usage types and environments defined for the subscriber type. Example
You might create a subscriber type called Advanced Business that represents subscribers who use mobiles as their primary business tools. The subscribers represented by this type use their mobiles for everything from downloading email to placing cellular calls. After you create the usage types, you can assign a ratio to determine the proportion of the traffic that is in each of the
323
available environments. In addition, you can set the service type and quality type for each usage type. For example, if you set up four usage types for the Advanced Business subscriber type, you could assign the weightings, service types, and quality types shown in Table 15.2.
Table 15.2 Example usage type settings Usage type 1 2 3 4 Indoor 5 1 2 2 Deep Indoor 5 2 2 2 Outdoor 5 1 4 4 Vehicular 5 0 0 0 Service type Voice Video WWW Email Quality type 12.2kbps_Conversational 64kbps_Streaming 144kbps_Interactive 12.2kbps_Background
In this example, the total weighting value calculated across all usage types is 40. Therefore, the Advanced Business subscriber type uses Usage 1 50% of the time, Usage 2 10% of the time, Usage 3 20% of the time, and Usage 4 20% of the time.
To create a subscriber type for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Subscriber Manager category, rightclick Subscriber Types and choose New. The Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box opens.
324
2 3 4
In the Name box, type a name for the subscriber type. In the Comment box, type a description for the subscriber type. In the Traffic Scaling box, type a value to define how much traffic should be scaled up or down from the traffic map associated with the subscriber type. Values greater than 1.0 indicate a greater number of subscribers of this type than the value indicated in the associated traffic map.
If you want to define the priority in which the subscriber is served or provided with the best level of service when network capacity is limited, enable the Use Priority check box and type a priority value in the Priority box. Priorities are defined in decreasing order, with 0 being the highest priority. If you enable this check box, when you run a Monte Carlo analysis, this subscriber is served according to the priority that you define. If you do not enable this check box, the traffic is allocated according to the priority set
325
for the services, which is defined in the Priority box for both circuitswitched and packet-switched services. 6 In the Variance section, choose one of the following options to define the variability of the number of subscribers generated by different Monte Carlo runs:
Meanthe same mean number of subscribers will be used on every run. Poissona Poisson distribution of subscribers will be used. User Definedchoose this option to define a custom Poisson distribution with modified variability. A value of 1 is a standard Poisson distribution.
From the Subscriber Equipment Types list, choose the equipment type of the subscriber type. For more information on creating a subscriber equipment type, see Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 on page 309.
From the Traffic list, choose the traffic map that you want to associate with the subscriber. You can only choose traffic maps in subscribers/km2 or Erlangs/km2. Traffic maps in Kbps/km2 are not valid. The type of traffic map that you choose affects the service types that are available in the usage types section. Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For information on generating and adding a traffic map to the project, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Define usage types as described in To define usage types for cdma2000 on page 327.
10 Click OK.
You can modify the properties of an existing subscriber type from the Subscriber Manager by right-clicking the subscriber type and choosing Edit.
326
You can create traffic maps using the information defined in the Subscriber Manager. The traffic maps combine the voice and packet usages for all defined subscriber types. For more information, see Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To define usage types for cdma2000

1 2 3 In the Create New - Subscriber Type dialog box, click New. A new row is created in the table. Click in the Short Name box and type a description for the usage type. The description can be up to eight characters in length. To define the weighting ratio for each clutter type, click in each of the following boxes and type values or accept the defaults:
Indoor Weightingthe weighting for indoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type Deep Indoor Weightingthe weighting for deep indoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type Outdoor Weightingthe weighting for outdoor usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type Vehicular Weightingthe weighting for vehicular usage as a ratio between this and other usage types defined for a subscriber type
Values must be positive integers. For more information, press the F1 key or see Example on page 323 for information about how the weighting numbers are used. 4 Click in the Service box and choose a service type for the usage type from the list. Packet-switched and circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map with an output format of subscribers/km2 from the Traffic list. Only circuit-switched services are available if you chose a traffic map in Erlangs/km2 from the Traffic list. For more information about circuitswitched and packet-switched service types, see Defining service types for cdma2000 on page 316.
327
Click in the Quality box and choose a quality type for the usage type from the list. For more information about quality types, see Defining quality types for cdma2000 on page 314.
6 7
To add another usage type, repeat Step 1 to Step 5. Click OK.
328
16.
Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites
Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites

This chapter describes how to configure and place a cdma2000 site, define sector settings specific to cdma2000, and globally edit cdma2000 sector properties. Once you have defined the cdma2000 network configuration, you can configure and place the sites in your network.
Understanding cdma2000 sites and sectors Considerations for multi-band networks Workflow for configuring and placing cdma2000 sites Creating cdma2000 sites Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors Defining cdma2000 sector settings Editing sites and sectors Deleting sites Viewing cdma2000 carrier assignment and interference information
329
Understanding cdma2000 sites and sectors

When you define the sectors in a site, you need to define the following settings specific to cdma2000 technologies:
Carrier assignments (see To assign carriers to sectors on page 347) Hardware settings (see Hardware settings for cdma2000 on page 344) Resource settings (see Resource settings for cdma2000 on page 344) Implementation settings (see Implementation settings for cdma2000 on page 344) Quality settings (see Quality settings for cdma2000 on page 346) Power settings (see Power settings for cdma2000 on page 347)
For more information about general site and sector properties, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. For information about TDMA/FDMA site and sector properties, see Chapter 5, Configuring and Placing TDMA/FDMA Sites, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.
Considerations for multi-band networks

If your network is configured with multiple bands (see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 on page 276), and you want to generate different predictions for carriers on two different bands, you need to do the following:
configure two different sectors, with same location and azimuth, but different antenna patterns and propagation models (see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide) assign a carrier from one band to one sector and the second band to the second sector (see To assign carriers to sectors on page 347) when you generate the analysis, include both sectors
330
Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites CDMA User Guide
In the area where both sectors can serve subscribers, the subscribers that are served by each sector will depend on the carrier preference weightings, and the PA power and noise limits. For more information, see To define carrier settings for cdma2000 on page 286. This gives you the flexibility of simulating different scenarios, for example:
If all carriers have the same preference weightings, subscribers will be allocated equally between the two sectors, except for an area at the fringe where only the stronger sector can work, until the PA power and noise limits are reached. At this point, subscribers will be allocated to the remaining carrier or carriers. Carriers on the weaker sector could be given a zero preference weighting, so that only the stronger sector will be allocated subscribers until the PA power and noise limits are reached. Any additional subscribers would then be allocated to the weaker sector. In this case, more users in the fringe area could be blocked.
Workflow for configuring and placing cdma2000 sites

Step 1 Step 2
Define the network configuration. See Chapter 14: Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration on page 273. Configure and place cdma2000 sites. See Creating cdma2000 sites on page 331.
Creating cdma2000 sites

This section describes how to configure and place cdma2000 sites using a new site configuration. You can also create and place sites based on an existing site configuration. For more information, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To create a cdma2000 site

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose New. In the Site Configuration dialog box, choose the Create a New Configuration option, and click Continue. The Site Properties dialog box opens.
331
3 4 5
Click the Site tab, and type a prefix for the site in the Site ID box. If you want to add additional site information, type additional identifiers or descriptions in the Site UID, Site Name, or Site Name 2 boxes. Define the remaining site settings. General site settings are described in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
6 7
Click the Sectors tab, and then click in the Technology field and choose cdma2000 from the list. Define the remaining general sector settings. General sector settings are described in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. If you want to calculate the radiated power for a sector, you must place the site first. Complete this procedure and then see Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors on page 333.
On the Sectors tab, click Add Sector to add as many sectors to the site as required. If you define cdma2000 sector settings before adding other sectors, the settings that you used for the last sector will be automatically applied to the new sectors that you add.
Click the Site tab and do either of the following to place the site:

Click in the Map window to add a site at that location. Enable the Manual Entry check box, choose the coordinate units from the Units list, type the coordinates in the X/Long and Y/Lat boxes, and click Place Site.
The created site is displayed in the Map window and a site with the name <Site>_1 is added to the Sites category in the Project Explorer. 10 If you want to use the configuration again, choose File Save Configuration As, type a name for the site configuration (.dsc) file in the File Name box, and click Save. Site configuration files are stored in the Config\GSM subfolder of the project folder. For more information on using an existing site configuration, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. When you save the .dsc file, the settings for individual sectors (defined in the Sector Settings dialog box) are not saved.
332
11 When you have finished placing sites, click Close.

You can edit the properties of a single site after you place it. In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site and choose Edit. In the Site Properties dialog box, edit the properties, click Apply, and then click Close.
Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors

The Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to calculate the radiated power for a sector based on the power output of the sectors power amplifier (PA) plus or minus system gains and losses. You can also use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box to define settings for specific sites, sector groups, or flags. For more information, see Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors on page 339. The value for ERP or EIRP on the Sectors tab of the Site Properties dialog box is the same as the value for Pilot EIRP in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box. The ERP or EIRP values on the Sectors tab are read-only and are calculated as shown in Equation 16.1.
Pilot EIRP = First carrier pilot power + Antenna boresight gain + Forward link losses and gains Equation 16.1 Pilot EIRP calculation
If a sector has EV-DO and 1xRTT or IS-95 carriers, the first carrier refers to the first 1xRTT or IS-95 carrier. If a sector has only EV-DO carriers, the Pilot EIRP equation is modified as shown in Equation 16.2.
Pilot EIRP = First carrier PA power + Antenna boresight gain + Forward link losses and gains Equation 16.2 Pilot EIRP equation for sectors with EV-DO carriers only
When you generate predictions, the power value used is the value in the ERP or EIRP box for the sector.
Losses and gains

The Base Station Link Budget tool enables you to define specific losses and gains for the sector and updates the total power for the sector using these values.
333
For both the forward link and reverse link, a default antenna gain value is added based on the antenna type assigned to the sector. You cannot modify this value. All new sites are also given a default Feeder value on both the forward link and the reverse link to account for cable and connector losses. A default BTS Noise Figure is assigned to the reverse link to account for base station receiver noise gain. You should modify the BTS Noise Figure according to the hardware manufacturer's specifications. You can add additional losses and gains as required. Because the Friis noise formula (see Equation 16.3) is used to calculate the Reverse Noise Figure, the order of the items on the Base Station Losses & Gains tab in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box must match the hierarchy of the sector hardware (see Figure 16.1 and Figure 16.2). By default, the BTS Noise Figure is always the last item in the list.
Antenna Antenna Feeder Tail Tower Mounted Amplifier (TMA) Feeder Feeder Tail BTS Amplifier Figure 16.1 Example sector hardware configuration
The hardware configuration shown in Figure 16.1 would be represented in the Base Station Link Budget dialog box in Mentum Planet as shown in Figure 16.2.
334
Figure 16.2 Example Reverse Losses & Gains settings
The Reverse Composite Noise Figure (Composite System Noise Figure (NFs)) is calculated as follows, using the Friis noise formula:
f4 1 fn 1 f2 1 f3 1 f s = f 1 + ------------ + ------------- + -------------------- + + --------------------------------------------G1 G1 G2 G1 G2 G3 G1 G2 G3 G( n 1 ) Equation 16.3 Reverse Composite Noise Figure calculation Where:
All terms are in their linear form.

fs
is the Composite System Noise Factor (linear ratio). is the Composite System Noise Figure.
NF s = 10 log 10 f s f1 fn
is the Noise Factor of individual elements (linear ratio). is the numerical gain of individual elements (linear ratio).
G1 Gn
Note that a loss (in dB) is taken as negative gain:

G = 10
G ( db ) --------------10
335
Chapter 16 CDMA User Guide f = 10

NF ( db ) ------------------10
So, for passive elements:

1 f = --G
Some subscriber-related settings must be configured in the Subscriber Manager. For more information see Defining subscriber equipment types for cdma2000 on page 309. If you are using an Excel spreadsheet to import base station link budget settings, you must use the Index column to specify the order of the items in the Losses and Gains list. For more information, see Importing and exporting project data in Chapter 13, Working With Network and Project Data, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To calculate base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site for which you want to modify the base station link budget settings, and choose Edit. In the Site Properties dialog box, click the Sectors tab. Click in the ERP or EIRP box of the sector you want to modify, and then click the Base Station Link Budget (...) button. The Base Station Link Budget dialog box opens with the Reverse tab selected.
2 3
336
Do one of the following to choose the carrier(s) to which you want to apply the settings:
If you want to apply the settings to a single carrier, choose a carrier from the Carrier list. If you want to apply the settings to all carriers on the sector, enable the Apply the Same Settings to All Carriers check box.
On the Base Station Losses & Gains tab, do the following to modify the Feeder settings or accept the defaults:

From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain. If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal noise associated with the gain.
To modify the BTS Noise Figure value, type a value in the Noise Figure box.
337
Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the reverse link:

Click Add. From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain. If the type is a gain, in the Noise Figure box, type the thermal noise associated with the gain. If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains.
To remove an item from the Reverse tab, choose the item and click Remove. The Reverse Composite Noise Figure box at the bottom of the Base Station Link Budget dialog box updates to reflect the loss, gain, and noise figure values.
Click the Forward tab at the bottom of the Base Station Losses & Gains tab and do the following to modify the Feeder value for the forward link, or accept the default:

From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain.
10 Do the following to define any additional losses and gains for the forward link:

Click Add. From the Type list, choose Loss or Gain. In the Name box, type a name for the loss or gain. In the Value box, type a value for the loss or gain. If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains.
11 To remove an item from the Forward tab, choose the item and click Remove. The Total EIRP and Pilot EIRP boxes update to reflect the loss or gain values.
338
12 To modify power information for the sector, type values in any of the following boxes:
PA Powerthe power at the power amplifier. When you change this value, the Pilot % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to Pilot Power. The Total EIRP box updates automatically to reflect the new Total EIRP for the power amplifier. You can also modify the PA power on the Hardware panel of the Sector Settings dialog box. See To define hardware settings on page 348. The two boxes are interdependent. Changes in one location are reflected in the other location. Pilot Powerthe power of the pilot channel. When you change this value, the Pilot % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to Pilot Power and the Pilot EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 16.1 on page 333. Pilot % of PA Powerthe pilot power as a percentage of PA power. When you change this value, the Pilot Power updates automatically to reflect the new ratio and the Pilot EIRP box updates automatically based on Equation 16.1 on page 333. Total EIRPthe total PA power for the sector (calculated as PA Power + Forward link losses and gains). When you change this value, the PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the change and the Pilot % of PA Power box updates automatically to reflect the new ratio of PA Power to Pilot Power.
13 Click OK. The ERP or EIRP value is updated for the sector.
Globally editing base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors
The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool enables you to define base station link budget settings and apply them to specific sites, sector groups, or flags. You can add, remove, update, and reorder base station link budget settings. For example, you could use the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool with a newly created project to define a common set of losses and gains according to the hardware used most often in your network. Using these
339
common settings as a base, you could then define individual or unique sector settings as required. Before using the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) tool, you should be familiar with the Base Station Link Budget tool. For more information, see Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors on page 333.
The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box is not technology-dependent and will update all of the sectors you choose with the same settings. Depending on the options you choose, existing settings may be lost.
To globally edit base station link budget settings for cdma2000 sectors
1 In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:
To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget. To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites, right-click and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget. To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the group and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget. To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags, and choose Global Edit Base Station Link Budget.
The Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box opens, displaying the Uplink/Reverse settings for the first sector in the group, the first sector with the specified flag condition, or the first sector chosen in the Project Explorer.
340
From the Action list, choose the type of action that you want to perform:
Insertadds additional losses/gains in the order specified, but leaves existing settings intact. Removeremoves any losses/gains that match the specified name/order. You can choose to exclude individual losses/gains. Replacereplaces the values for the specified losses/gains. Updateupdates values for losses/gains that match the specified name/order. You can choose to update the name, the associated value, or both.
You can only choose one action each time you apply changes to the base station link budget settings. If you want to perform multiple actions, use the Apply button each time you define settings for a specific action. If you choose another action before applying the new settings, the changes for the current action will be lost.
341
If you chose either Remove or Update in Step 2, choose one of the following filters from the Action Options list:
By Name & Orderremoves/updates only existing losses/ gains that match both the name and specified order. By Name Onlyremoves/updates only existing losses/gains with the same name. By Order Onlyremoves/updates only existing losses/gains that match the specified order. If you chose Insert, Remove, or Replace in Step 2, and you want to add an item, click Add, then from the Type list choose Loss or Gain, type a name in the Name box and a value in the Value box. If you are adding a gain, a type a value in the Noise Figure box. You can add additional losses/gains as required. If you chose Remove in Step 2, enable the check box beside each item that you want to remove. If you chose Replace in Step 2, modify the values for the losses/ gains that you want to replace as required If you chose Update in Step 2, enable the check box and modify the values for each field that you want to update.
On the Uplink/Reverse tab, do any of the following.
The options that are available will depend on the action that you chose in Step 2. 5 6 7 If required, use the Move Up or Move Down buttons to change the order of items in the list of losses and gains. If required, click the Downlink/Reverse tab and repeat Step 2 to Step 5. Do one of the following:
To apply your changes and exit from the Global Edit (Base Station Link Budget) dialog box, click OK. To apply your changes and choose a new action from the Action list, click Apply and repeat Step 3 to Step 7.
342
Defining cdma2000 sector settings

For each site in your project, you need to define cdma2000 sector settings. The first step in defining sector settings is assigning the carriers to the sector. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 on page 276. After you assign carriers to sectors, you can define sector settings for each carrier as described in the following sections. The sector settings that are available will be slightly different, depending on the type of carrier.
Figure 16.3 cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box showing the Hardware panel
343
Hardware settings for cdma2000

Hardware settings enable you to define the equipment for the sector, including channel elements, noise figure, throughput, and link loss. A channel element is a logical controller on a channel element card or server that controls and routes data for services in the cdma2000 network. The number of channel elements required per service depends upon the amount of throughput the service needs and the vendors equipment. Services that require higher throughput may need more channel elements. As part of the hardware settings, you can also activate a specific technology for a sector and, in this way, conserve network resources by offering only those services needed. For example, if a sector is serving a sparsely populated area you can activate only R99 even though the carrier is both R99 and HSDPA. For more information, see To define hardware settings on page 348.
Resource settings for cdma2000

Resource settings enable you to define how best to allocate sector resources so that the maximum number of subscribers are served. Mentum Planet considers the traffic channel limitations as well as the uplink and downlink elements defined per carrier in the network analysis. For more information, see To define sector resources on page 349.
Implementation settings for cdma2000

Implementation settings enable you to define PN offset planning settings and noise rise and traffic power settings for rapid planning.
PN offset planning settings
When you define PN offset planning settings, you can manually enter a value for PN offset and you can specify search window sizes for the active neighboring sets of sectors. Allocating PN offsets manually (i.e., without the assistance of PN offset plans and the PN offset planning tool, described in Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans on page 465) involves assigning a PN offset value to one or more sectors that are to be included in the PN offset plan and if required, changing the associated search window settings. The PN offset for a sector (a value from 0 to 511) corresponds to a starting point in a PN offset index. If you plan to assign PN offset values to sectors manually, you must specify enough separation between time shifts to avoid interference between sectors.
344
Search window sizes are set using an index value, which corresponds to a window size in chips. For more information on PN offset planning, see Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans on page 465. The valid index values and corresponding window sizes (in chips) are shown in Table 16.1.
Table 16.1 Search window settings Index Value 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Window Size (Chips) 4 6 8 10 14 20 28 40 60 80 100 130 160 226 320 452
Rapid planning settings
Rapid planning provides a quick method of generating analysis layers, as an alternative to the Monte Carlo simulation. It also provides the ability to create layers for a given network or sector loads. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379. The rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel are used when layers are generated using the rapid planning option. Unlike the Monte Carlo method, which obtains many values required to compute analysis layers from the operating points file, the Rapid Planning
345
method does not generate an operating points file. Instead, the Rapid Planning method derives most of the values required to compute analysis layers from the Powers panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. The Current Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power values are the two exceptions; to determine these values, the Reverse Noise Rise and Forward Total Traffic Power values should be manually defined for the sector.
If you do not define these values manually, you can enable the Override All Cell Loads option on the System panel of the Analysis Settings dialog box, and define values for Forward Available Traffic Power and Reverse Load. For more information, see To define rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 on page 386.
The Reverse Noise Rise value is used to calculate equivalent Current Total Receive Power, which is required to compute all reverse link analysis layers. The Forward Total Traffic Power is used to calculate Total Traffic Transmit Power, which is used to compute most pilot and reverse link analysis layers. The Current Total Receive and Total Traffic Transmit Power are also used to compute the Other - Path Balance layer. For more information, see To define implementation settings on page 351.
Quality settings for cdma2000

Quality settings enable you to define settings related to the quality of service for the sector, including, among others, the maximum number of subscribers, maximum speed of vehicular subscribers, and the handover margin. The maximum speed assigned to the sector is used to determine whether subscribers in a vehicular environment will be served by the sector. Vehicular subscribers have an expected speed associated with them depending on the clutter class in which the service is being provided. This speed is defined when you create clutter types (see Defining clutter types for cdma2000 on page 296). Subscribers in all environments other than vehicular are assigned a fixed speed of 3 km/h. If the vehicular subscriber speed exceeds the maximum, then the subscriber is not served by the sector. This enables you to ensure that fast-moving subscribers are not served by certain sectors (for example, microcells). The maximum speed is used when you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, During the random pattern generation phase, if a randomly generated subscriber has an associated speed that exceeds the sector limit, the subscriber will not be served by the sector.
346
For more information, see To define quality settings on page 352.
Power settings for cdma2000

Power settings enable you to define the power requirements for the sector, including the limits for pilot power, control channels, and traffic power. For more information, see To define cdma2000 power settings on page 353.
To assign carriers to sectors

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, double-click a site. The Site Properties dialog box opens. In the Site Properties dialog box, on the Sectors tab, click cdma2000 Settings. The Carriers panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box opens by default. 3 In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check boxes next to the carrier IDs that you want to assign to the sector. Only the technology bands that are assigned the cdma2000 technology are displayed in this section. When you enable a carrier, the carrier is added to the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box tree view. For more information on defining bands and carriers, see Allocating spectrum and defining carriers for cdma2000 on page 276. 4 Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
347
To define hardware settings

1 2 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Hardware. On the Hardware panel, in the Throughput Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:
Maximum Pooled Forward Throughputthe maximum throughput for all traffic on the same carrier of the site Maximum Packet Throughputthe proportion of the maximum throughput that is allowed for packet sessions (not applicable to EV-DO carriers) Maximum Circuit Throughputthe proportion of the maximum throughput that is allowed for circuit sessions (not applicable to EV-DO carriers)
The sum of the maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput can exceed 100%, but within the analysis, the total of maximum packet throughput and maximum circuit throughput cannot total more than 100%. Throughput for an analysis is calculated using the number of subscribers carried multiplied by the rate used for each subscriber modified by the activity factor (which is dependent on the bearer used for the service). 3 In the Base Station Link Budget section, if you want to modify any of the values, click Base Station Link Budget. The values shown in this section are read-only, and are calculated using the Base Station Link Budget tool. For information on using the Base Station Link Budget tool, see Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors on page 333. 4 Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
If you open the Base Station Link Budget tool from the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, the carrier displayed is the carrier from which the tool was launched. If the carrier is an EV-DO carrier, the Pilot Power column and the Percentage column are read only columns.
348
To define sector resources

1 2 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Resources. On the Resources panel, in the Walsh Codes section, type a value in the Maximum Number of Codes box to define the maximum number of codes that can be allocated to traffic channels. Walsh Codes are not applicable to EV-DO carriers. 3 In the Reverse Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:
Total Available For The Sitedisplays the number of channel elements available. Total Dedicated For The Sectordisplays the number of channel elements dedicated for the sector. Primary (Per Sector)the number of channel elements assigned to this carrier on this sector for primary traffic. Primary traffic consists of the subscribers with this sector designated as the best server. Primary Pooled (Per Site)the number of channel elements pooled for this carrier for all sectors on this site for primary traffic. You can combine primary and pooled channel elements, or use only one or the other. If you want to specify that all of the channel elements on the site are pooled, type 0 in the Primary (Per Sector) box and type the total number of channel elements in the Primary Pooled (Per Site) box. When you generate an analysis, when this number has been reached, new calls for this sector will be blocked. Additional For Handoffthe number of channel elements allocated for handoff for all sectors on the site for this carrier. For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handoff, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handoff, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handoff are available.
For EV-DO carriers, channel elements are accounted for on the reverse link and for 1xRTT and IS-95 carriers, channel elements are accounted for on the forward link. For details on how these values are used to
349
calculate the Total Available For the Site and Total Dedicated For the Sector values, press the F1 key. 4 In the Forward Channel Elements Per Carrier section, type values in any of the following boxes:
Total Available For The Sitedisplays the number of channel elements available. Total Dedicated For The Sectordisplays the number of channel elements dedicated for the sector. Primary (Per Sector)the number of channel elements assigned to this carrier on this sector for primary traffic. Primary traffic consists of the subscribers with this sector designated as the best server. Primary Pooled (Per Site)the number of channel elements pooled for this carrier for all sectors on this site for primary traffic. You can combine primary and pooled channel elements, or use only one or the other. If you want to specify that all of the channel elements on the site are pooled, type 0 in the Primary (Per Sector) box and type the total number of channel elements in the Primary Pooled (Per Site) box. When you generate an analysis, when this number has been reached, new calls for this sector will be blocked. Additional For Handoffthe number of channel elements allocated for handoff for all sectors on the site for this carrier. For example, if 39 channel elements are available at a site for primary traffic and the system is expected to support 30% handoff, then 12 channel elements should be added to the site, reserved for handoff, for a total of 51 channel elements for that site. A new user is blocked if all 39 channels are busy, even if any or all of the 12 channels reserved for handoff are available.
350
To define implementation settings

1 2 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Implementation. If you want to assign PN offset information to the sector to generate a PN offset plan, do the following:
If you want to assign a specific PN offset value to this sector, in the PN Offset box, type a PN offset value. For more information on PN offsets, see Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans on page 465. Edit the PN offset search window sizes or accept the defaults:
SRCH_WIN_Aan index value corresponding to the size of the search window associated with the set of active and candidate pilots SRCH_WIN_Nan index value corresponding to the size of the search window associated with the set of neighbor pilots
The valid index values and corresponding window sizes (in chips) are shown in Table 16.1 on page 345. 3 Beside the Scheduler Gain Curve box, do one of the following to define the BTS scheduler gain:
Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the scheduler gain curve, and click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create a scheduler gain curve and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
If you do not assign a Scheduler Gain curve, Mentum Planet assumes that there is no gain.
351
In the Rapid Planning section, define the settings for rapid planning:
Reverse Noise Risethe noise rise in the receiver, above the thermal noise floor, generated by traffic links. Forward Total Traffic Powerthe total traffic transmit power for the sector. Forward Activity Factorfor EV-DO sectors, the average ratio of non-idle traffic slots to the total number of traffic slots.
For information on how these values are used, see Rapid planning settings on page 345. 5 Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
To define quality settings

1 2 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Quality. On the Quality panel, in the Quality Parameters section, type values in any of the following boxes:
Pilot Detection Thresholdthe minimum pilot signal-to-noise ratio (Ec/Io) value required for adding a pilot to the active set. If no pilot signal has an Ec/Io above the pilot detection threshold, when a subscriber attempts a connection, the call will be refused. Maximum Noise Risethe maximum noise rise permitted for the sector. This value is used to limit the number of users in a system based on noise rise. Mac Index/Maximum Users (Per Sector)the maximum number of instantaneous users permitted at the sector, or, for EV-DO sectors, the maximum number of active users permitted. T Dropthe threshold value for removing a pilot from the active set. If a pilot has an Ec/Io that falls below the T Drop value, it is removed from the active set. If the pilot signal is above the T Drop threshold, then it is a candidate for the active set. The number of servers in the active set is limited to the value defined in the Maximum Active Servers box in the relevant Mobile Equipment Technology Band. For example, if the number of active servers is set to three and the fourth server is within the T Drop threshold, then the fourth server is a polluter.
352
This value is used when generating pilot pollution analysis layers. For more information on pilot pollution analysis layers, see Pilot analysis on page 409.
Maximum Intra-Site Serversthe maximum number servers from the same site that are permitted for this sector Maximum Cell Radiusthe maximum cell radius permitted for this sector Maximum Speedthe maximum speed permitted for this sector
To define cdma2000 power settings

1 2 3 In the tree view of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box, expand the carrier that you want to define and choose Powers. On the Powers panel, from the Transmit Power Parameters In list, choose the unit in which the transmit power settings are defined. In the Absolute Power Values section, type a value in the Total PA Power box to define the maximum power output by the sector's power amplifier (PA). The Total PA Power value and the PA Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget calculations. For more information, see Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors on page 333. EV-DO carriers use all of the PA power for the pilot whereas 1xRTT and IS-95 carriers use only a portion of it. 4 To define pilot power, do one of the following (not applicable to EV-DO carriers):
To define a fixed value for the pilot power, type a value in the Fixed Pilot Power box. The Fixed Pilot Power value and the Pilot Power value in the Link Budget dialog box are interdependent. Changes to this value will affect link budget
353
calculations. For more information, see Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors on page 333.
To automatically optimize pilot power, enable the Optimize Pilot check box and define the range of Pilot values in the Maximum Pilot Power and Minimum Pilot Power boxes.
If you choose to optimize pilot power, the analysis calculates the required pilot power to ensure that all the users achieve the required Ec/Io (Monte Carlo analyses only). 5 In the Control Powers (Relative to Pilot Power) section, type values in the following boxes (not applicable to EV-DO carriers):
Relative Sync Powerthe synchronization channel power relative to the pilot power Relative Paging Powerthe power for the paging channel and other overhead channels relative to the pilot power. Other overhead channels include the broadcast control, quick paging, common power control, and common assignment channels.
In the Traffic Power Limits (Relative to Max Pilot Power) section, type values in the following boxes (not applicable to EV-DO carriers):
Maximum Traffic Channel Powerthe maximum service power for a single traffic channel relative to the maximum pilot power. Note that it is also possible to define the Maximum Traffic Channel Power for individual bearers (excluding EV-DO bearers) using the Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset value in the Edit - cdma2000 Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer. Minimum Traffic Channel Powerthe minimum service power for a single traffic channel relative to the maximum pilot power. Note that it is also possible to define the Minimum Traffic Channel Power for individual bearers (excluding EV-DO bearers) using the Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset value in the Edit - cdma2000 Bearer dialog box, accessible from the Subscriber Manager category in the Project Explorer.
In the Other User Interference section, type a value in the Average Reverse ACK Interference Power box to define the interference for the acknowledgement (ACK) channel.
354
For EV-DO carriers, in the Idle Transmission Attenuation box, type a value to define the idle transmission power from the PA during traffic time slots to be used when the sector has no served subscribers. Click OK to save your settings or choose another item in the tree view.
Editing sites and sectors

You can edit individual sites or you can use the Global Editor to edit one or more sites.
To edit a site
In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click on the site that you want to edit and choose Edit. Click the Edit Site button on the Site toolbar and then click in the Map window on the site that you want to edit.
The Site Properties dialog box opens. 2 3 If there is more than one site at the chosen location, choose the site you want to edit from the Editing Site list. Do one of the following:
Modify any of the site properties and save them as a new configuration if required. For information, see Creating cdma2000 sites on page 331. Load an existing configuration by choosing File Open Configuration.
4 5
Click Apply to update your project. Click Close.
To globally edit cdma2000 sectors

You can easily edit cdma2000-specific sector properties for individual carriers assigned to sites in your project or for a particular group of sites using the cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box. You can also add or remove carriers from sites. The cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box is different from the standard Global Edit dialog box that you can use with other technologies because it only contains settings that are specific to cdma2000. For more information on the
355
standard Global Edit dialog box, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
If you are modifying the cdma2000 power values, you have the option of viewing data in dBm or Watts. However, if you want to modify the Average PRACH Interference Power, you will only be able to use the full range of values available for the field if you are using the dBm option. If you prefer to use Watts, you can use the Watts option when you are modifying other power values, and then change the units to dBm before modifying the value for PRACH.
In the Project Explorer, do one of the following:
To edit all sites, in the Sites category, right-click Sites and choose Global Edit cdma2000. To edit one or more sites, in the Sites category, choose the sites, right-click and choose Global Edit cdma2000. To edit the sites in a group, in the Sites category, right-click the group and choose Global Edit cdma2000. To edit sites selected by flag condition, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions you want, right-click Flags and choose Global Edit cdma2000.
The cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box opens.
356
In the Sector Selection section, choose one of the following options:

Allapply changes to all sectors Current Selectionapply changes to the sectors that are selected in the Map window. For more information, see the Choosing sites section in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Groupapply changes only to sectors in group chosen from the list
357
In the Carrier Selection section, choose one of the following options from the Action list for each carrier ID that the changes affect:
Modify Existingmodify the sector settings for existing carriers Modify/Createadd a new carrier to the sector and modify the sector settings for existing carriers Deletedelete this carrier from the sector Do Not Modifydo not modify the sector settings for this carrier
In the Cell Equipment Parameters section, enable the check box beside each setting that you want to update in the chosen table, click in the Value column and type a new value for each setting. Click Apply to update the settings and then click Close.
Deleting sites
You can delete sites using the Project Explorer or the Map window.
To delete a site
In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the site, choose Delete, and click Yes to confirm the deletion. In the Map window, choose the site, right-click and choose Delete, and then click Delete to confirm the deletion.
Viewing cdma2000 carrier assignment and interference information

Once you have created a project and assigned carriers to sectors, you can use the Carrier In-Map Display tool to view co-channel and adjacent channel interference in the Map window. You can also view carrier allocation information.
358
To view cdma2000 frequency assignment and interference information

1 On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the Carrier In-Map Display button, and then click in the Map window near the sector for which you want to view interference information. If you want to view only carrier allocation information, you can click anywhere in the Map window. The Carrier In-Map Display window opens with the Interactive tab open by default. The Sector ID box shows the name of the sector closest to where you clicked in the Map window and the Technology box displays the sector assigned to the sector. The display in the Map window updates to identify sectors in the Map window that are co-channel interferers with the selected sector. For each sector that is a co-channel interferer, the numbers of the carriers that cause co-channel interference are displayed in the Map window. For the selected sector, carrier information is displayed in red.
359
Do any of the following:
To view other types of interference in the Map window, from the View list, choose the type of interference that you want to view. The display in the Map window updates to show the interferers. To choose another sector for which to view interference information, click in the Map window near the sector. To display the results again for a sector that you selected previously, choose the sector from the Sector ID list.
If you want to view information in the Map window about frequency allocation, click the Sector Selection tab.
4 5
From the View in Map Window list, choose Carriers. From the Technology list, choose cdma2000. The list section of the dialog box updates to show all of the carriers assigned to the technology.
6 7
Choose one or more of the listed items to display in the Map window and click Display. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors for which you want to display the information.
360
If you want to choose a different group of sectors for which to display the selected information, click Update Selection, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose another group of sectors and click OK. If you want to clear the display, click Clear.
Visibility of the Carrier In-Map Display is affected by the same settings that control the visibility of site labels. If you cannot see the sector information in the Map window, see Displaying and formatting site labels in Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide for information about changing the appearance of labels.
361
362
17.
Chapter 17: Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 Sectors
Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 Sectors

This chapter describes how to add repeaters to cdma2000 sectors in your project.
Understanding cdma2000 repeaters Workflow for adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors Repeaters and cdma2000 predictions Locating repeaters in a Map window
363
Understanding cdma2000 repeaters

Repeaters are used to retransmit signals received from donor sectors to locations that have insufficient coverage. For example, repeaters can be used to extend coverage or fill in shadow areas caused by hills, large buildings, and other structures that obstruct signals. A repeater receives a signal from the donor antenna of a donor sector, and then amplifies and retransmits the signal through its service antenna. Repeaters are primarily used to reduce path loss without providing an increase in network capacity. Generally, repeaters add noise and amplify noise in the reverse, which can limit their effectiveness; however, a well placed repeater can reduce noise levels within a cdma2000 network and enhance the overall capacity. Implementing repeaters can be an efficient and cost-effective method of increasing the received signal strength for mobiles in an area without having to place additional sites. A repeaters power is defined by its Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP). EIRP measures the maximum radiated power in the direction of the maximum gain relative to an isotropic antenna (typically in the direction the antenna is pointing). The EIRP of cdma2000 repeaters is based on the pilot power of the first active carrier, and is calculated as shown in Equation 17.1.
Repeater EIRP = Pilot Power Lm + GD+ LD+ GR LR LS + GS
Equation 17.1 Repeater EIRP
If a sector has EV-DO and 1xRTT or IS-95 carriers, the first carrier refers to the first 1xRTT or IS-95 carrier. If a sector has only EV-DO carriers, the repeater EIRP is based on the sector PA power of the first EV-DO carrier, and is calculated as shown in Equation 17.1.
Repeater EIRP = Sector PA Power Lm + GD+ LD+ GR LR LS + GS
Equation 17.1 Repeater EIRP for EV-DO carriers Where:
Pilot Power is the pilot power of the first carrier from the cdma2000 Sector Settings of the donor sector. Lm is the masked path loss between the base station transmitter and the repeater.
364
Adding Repeaters to cdma2000 Sectors CDMA User Guide
GD is the repeater donor antenna gain. LD is the repeater donor antenna system loss (typically feeder loss). GR is the repeater gain. LR is the repeater loss. LS is the repeater service antenna system loss (typically feeder loss). GS is the repeater service antenna gain.
Repeaters and cdma2000 predictions

When you generate predictions for a sector that has one or more repeaters assigned to it, signal strength grid (.grd) files are generated for the sector and for each repeater. cdma2000 analyses use the separate predictions for the donor sectors and repeaters. A combined signal strength file is also generated, which merges the separate sector and repeater signal strength files. Combined signal strength predictions are used when the full coverage area of a sector is required, such as when you generate a traffic map or interference matrix, or analyze the interference between two sectors. After you have generated predictions for a sector, you can choose to view a prediction for the donor sector or individual repeaters. You can also view a combined prediction that displays the combined signal strengths of the donor sector and all of its repeaters. For information on generating and viewing predictions, see Chapter 8: Generating Predictions in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Workflow for adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors

Step 1 Step 2
Configure and place cdma2000 sites. See Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites on page 329. Add repeaters to sectors with insufficient coverage. See Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors on page 366.
365
Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors

To add a repeater to a sector, you must define general settings, such as the donor sector for which the repeater will retransmit a signal, and the location of the repeater. You must also define settings for service and donor antennas, predictions, repeater links, and carriers. You can add repeaters manually or you can import them from an existing file.
To add repeaters to cdma2000 sectors

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the sector to which you want to add a repeater, and choose Add Repeater. Click in the Map window in the location where you want to add the repeater. The Repeater Settings dialog box opens with the general settings panel selected by default.
In the Repeater-Site ID box, type a unique name for the repeater.
366
4 5 6
If you want to add additional information, such as the associated Site ID, in the Repeater-Site UID box, type an identifier or description. If you want to change the donor sector, choose a sector from the list. Do one of the following to define the status of the repeater:

To set the repeater as active, enable the Active check box. To set the repeater as inactive, clear the Active check box.
Inactive repeaters are not used for predictions or analyses. 7 If you want to change the symbol and color settings used to represent active or inactive repeaters in the Map window, in the Color/Symbol for All Repeaters section, click the Active or Inactive swatch, choose the font, font size, symbol, color, rotation angle, background, and effects, and then click OK. You can only change the symbol and color settings for the status (Active or Inactive) that you applied to the repeater in Step 6. The symbol and color settings will be applied to all Active or Inactive repeaters. 8 In the Repeater Connection Type section, choose one of the following options:
RFan antenna is used for communication between the donor sector and the repeater. Fibera fiber-optic link is used for communication between the donor sector and the repeater.
If you choose the Fiber option, the donor antenna settings do not apply (see To define donor antenna settings for repeaters on page 371). 9 If you want to place the service antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Service Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/ Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes. The values displayed by default correspond to the location that you clicked in the Map window in Step 2. 10 If you want to place the donor antenna according to precise coordinates, in the Donor Antenna Location section, type the coordinates in the X/ Longitude and Y/Latitude boxes. By default, the donor antenna and service antenna are placed at the same location.
367
11 Define the service antenna settings. See To define service antenna settings for repeaters on page 369. 12 If you chose the RF option in Step 8, define the donor antenna settings. See To define donor antenna settings for repeaters on page 371. 13 Define the repeater prediction settings. See To define repeater prediction settings on page 373. 14 Define the repeater equipment settings. See To define repeater equipment settings on page 375. 15 Define the repeater carrier settings. See To define repeater carrier settings on page 377. 16 Click Create to add the repeater to the sector, and then click Close to close the Repeater Settings dialog box. The repeater is displayed in the Sites category of the Project Explorer under both the Repeaters node and the chosen donor sector.
You can also change the status of a repeater by right-clicking a repeater node in the Project Explorer and choosing Activate Repeater or Deactivate Repeater.
368
To define service antenna settings for repeaters

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Service Antenna.
On the Service Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list. This is the pattern that the service antenna will use to retransmit the signal received from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.
369
If you are using an antenna pattern with electrical downtilt, from the Electrical Tilt list, choose the electrical downtilt pattern that you want to use. For information on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, Working with Antenna Patterns, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Type values in the following boxes:
Azimuththe horizontal direction the service antenna looks towards. An azimuth value of 0 degrees is true north, 90 degrees is east, 180 degrees is south, and 270 degrees is west. As you rotate clockwise, the azimuth increases. Tiltthe number of degrees that a service antenna is tilted upward or downward. A positive (+) tilt value points the antenna upwards, while a negative (-) tilt value points the antenna downwards. Twistthe number of degrees that a service antenna is twisted counter-clockwise or clockwise. A positive (+) twist value rotates the antenna counter-clockwise, while a negative (-) twist value rotates the antenna clockwise. Heightthe height of the service antenna from ground level. Use DEM Elevationsets the elevation height based on the repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file. Manual Entryenables you to define the elevation height for the repeater. Type the elevation height in the Elevation box. This option is useful if the repeater is being used as a microcell for indoor coverage.
In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:
7 8
In the System Losses box, type a value for the service antenna system feeder loss or any additional antenna system-related losses. Click Create to save your settings and add the repeater, or choose another item in the tree view.
370
To define donor antenna settings for repeaters

Donor antenna settings only apply if the repeater type is RF. If a fiberoptic connection is used between the donor and service antenna, the donor antenna settings do not apply. For more information, see To add repeaters to cdma2000 sectors on page 366.
In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Donor Antenna.
On the Donor Antenna panel, choose an antenna pattern from the Pattern list. This is the pattern that the donor antenna will use to receive the signal from the donor sector. The gain value is derived from the antenna pattern.
371
If you are using an antenna pattern with electrical downtilt, from the Electrical Tilt list, choose the electrical downtilt pattern that you want to use. For details on electrical downtilt antenna patterns, see Chapter 3, Working with Antenna Patterns, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
5 6
In the Height box, type the height of the donor antenna from ground level. In the Elevation section, choose one of the following options:
Use DEM Elevationsets the elevation height based on the repeater location and the project digital elevation model (DEM) grid file. This is the default option. Manual Entryenables you to define the elevation height for the repeater. Type the elevation height in the Elevation box. This option is useful if the repeater is being used as a microcell for indoor coverage.
In the System Losses box, type a value for donor antenna system feeder loss or any other antenna system-related losses. The Isolation box indicates the calculated value of isolation between antennas (masked path loss). For an accurate isolation value, the antenna patterns assigned to the repeater must have a full definition of the vertical pattern (all angles).
372
To define repeater prediction settings

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Predictions.
2 3
On the Predictions panel, choose a propagation model from the Propagation Model list. In the Number of Radials box, type the number of radials to be used in the prediction. Prediction calculations are performed along radial lines. A higher number of radials will produce more accurate results, but the calculation will take more time.
In the Propagation Distance box, type the maximum distance from the repeater for which the signal strength will be calculated.
373
In the Masked Path Loss from Donor box, type a value for the repeater amplifier system loss. Click Calculate, and in the Calculate Masked Path Loss dialog box, type a value for any other known losses in the Additional Losses box, choose the propagation model you want to use to calculate the path loss, and click OK. The value in the Masked Path Loss from Donor box is automatically updated.
For maximum accuracy, enter a measured value of pathloss in the Masked Path Loss From Donor box. The measured pathloss can be determined by measuring the signal strength with a known EIRP from the donor sector. If you choose to calculate the masked path loss, ensure you specify an appropriate model. The most appropriate propagation model will depend on the specifics of the environment between donor sector and the repeater donor antenna. If you suspect obstruction at the repeater location, choose a deterministic model with the correct receiver height. You may need to create a model specifically for repeater installations. Mentum Planet will not update the stored masked pathloss automatically, even if the current value is generated using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box. If there are changes to the network that would impact the pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, you must apply a new value to the repeater, either by manually entering a new value in the Repeater Settings dialog box or re-calculating the value using the Calculate Masked Pathloss dialog box.
374
To define repeater equipment settings

The gain of a repeater in Mentum Planet is maintained at a constant level. Any changes to the donor sector and repeater system that affect the power received by the repeater will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. For example, a change in the masked pathloss between the donor sector and the repeater, the donor sectors pilot power, or the antenna system at the donor sector which results in a change to the EIRP of the sector, will result in a similar change in the EIRP of the repeater. The EIRP value at the repeater will also change in line with a change in either of the repeaters antenna systems. As such, it is important to review repeater settings following any changes of this nature.
In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Equipment.
375
On the Equipment panel, do either of the following to define the repeater EIRP:
In the Power EIRP box, type the pilot EIRP based on the pilot power of the first carrier on the donor sector. The value in the System Loss box is updated based on the value you enter. In the Gain box, type a value for the repeater system gain. The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter.
3 4 5 6
In the System Loss box, type a value for the repeater system loss. The value in the Power EIRP box is updated based on the value you enter. In the Noise Figure box, type a value for the noise contribution of the repeater to the uplink. In the Forward Max Power Per Carrier box, type a value for the achievable limit of power for the carrier. In the Reverse Eb/No adjustment box, type a value for any adjustment that should be applied to the required Eb/No for signals through the repeater in the reverse path. This value can be used to take into account the effects of the fixed path of signals through the repeater, for example, to simulate the effect of a lack of diversity gain on repeated signals at the donor sector.
376
To define repeater carrier settings

1 In the tree view of the Repeater Settings dialog box, choose Carriers.
In the Carrier Assignment section, enable the check box beside each of the carriers that you want assigned to the repeater. All of the carriers assigned to the donor sector are enabled by default. Click Create to save your settings and add the repeater, or choose another item in the tree view.
To edit repeater settings

After you have added a repeater to a sector, you can edit the repeater at any time. 1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the tree view of the Sites category, expand the site and sector to which the repeater belongs. Right-click the repeater that you want to edit and choose Edit. The Repeater Settings dialog box opens.
377
3 4
If you want to change the donor sector (re-parent), choose a sector from the Donor Sector list. Modify the other repeater settings as required. For information, see Adding repeaters to cdma2000 sectors on page 366.
Click Apply and then click Close.

You can also access all of the repeaters in your project from the Repeaters node in the Sites category of the Project Explorer.
Locating repeaters in a Map window

You can use the Project Explorer to locate repeaters in a Map window.
To locate repeaters in a Map window
In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, right-click the repeater and choose Locate. The repeater is selected in the Map window.
378
18.
Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000
Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000

This chapter describes how to generate a rapid planning analysis and view results. A rapid planning analysis provides a quick simulation of your network. You can use the results of a rapid planning analysis to make adjustments to your project settings and then run a more detailed Monte Carlo analysis.
Understanding rapid planning for cdma2000 Understanding data rate negotiation Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000 Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 Generating analysis layers for flag-specific information Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers Deleting analyses
379
Understanding rapid planning for cdma2000

Rapid planning uses minimal settings to generate a set of analysis layers that you can use to analyze your network quickly. The analysis runs only once and generates analysis layers automatically (as opposed to a Monte Carlo analysis, for which you can generate layers automatically or as a separate step). A rapid planning analysis does not require as much time as a Monte Carlo analysis, but it also does not generate the detailed subscriber information that is generated with a Monte Carlo analysis. For more information on Monte Carlo simulations, see Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for cdma2000 on page 400.
Prediction view files for cdma2000 analyses

Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin. By default, prediction view files are created when you generate an analysis. Using prediction view files is optional. You can determine whether or not to use them by considering the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case. See Optimizing cdma2000 analyses on page 418 for more information.

The analysis layers that you can generate using rapid planning depend on whether you choose to use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager or a nominal subscriber. For more information on choosing subscribers, see Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning on page 388.
If you use subscribers defined using the Subscriber Manager, the layers available are the same as the analysis layers available when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation, with the exception of the Forward - Throughput and Reverse - Throughput analysis layers. Throughput layers are not available for rapid planning. If you use a nominal subscriber, the throughput layers are not available, and the Pilot - Pollution Index layer is also not available, because no traffic map is used in this kind of rapid planning analysis.
For details on each analysis layer, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409.
380
Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 CDMA User Guide

By default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 18.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates and that IS-95 is limited to cdma2000 radio configurations RC1 and RC2. It is also assumed that EV-DO traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background). Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.
Table 18.1 Data rate negotiation process for cdma2000 Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Voice (Circuit Conversational below 15 kbps) Circuit Conversational above 15 kbps) Circuit streaming IS-95 & 1xRTT & EV-DO Carried on 1xRTT), then on IS-95 (fixed rate) Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95 IS-95 & 1xRTT Carried on 1xRTT then on IS-95 (fixed rate) Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT ten within IS-95 1xRTT & EV-DO Carried on 1xRTT (fixed rate) Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT EV-DO Only Not carried
Not carried
Not carried
381
Chapter 18 CDMA User Guide Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Packet Conversational/ Streaming Packet or Circuit Interactive/ Background IS-95 & 1xRTT & EV-DO Negotiated within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Negotiated within EV-DO then within 1xRTT, then within IS-95 IS-95 & 1xRTT Negotiated within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Negotiated within 1xRTT then within IS-95 1xRTT & EV-DO Negotiated within 1xRTT Negotiated within EVDO then within 1xRTT EV-DO Only Not carried
Negotiated within EVDO

In the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 18.1 on page 381 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the EV-DO network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.

view coverage maps showing the coverage probability for different rates for one usage. In particular, you can view the Downlink - Bearer Coverage layer, the Downlink - Max Achievable Coverage layer as well as the Uplink - Bearer Coverage layer and Uplink - Max Achievable Coverage layer. review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sectormobile report. See Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483.
382
Workflow for generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

Step 1 Step 2
Define prediction view settings. See Optimizing cdma2000 analyses on page 418. Define rapid planning settings for the sectors that you want to include in your analysis. See To define implementation settings on page 351. If you want to use the same settings for a number of analyses, define default analysis settings. See Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings on page 383. Create a new rapid planning analysis. See Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 on page 384. Define the analysis settings and generate the analysis. See Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 on page 386. View the results of the analysis. See Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers on page 396.
Step 3
Step 4 Step 5
Step 6
Defining default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings

If you want to use the same settings for a number of rapid planning analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.
383
To define default cdma2000 rapid planning analysis settings

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Default cdma2000 Analysis Settings. Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK. For more information defining analysis settings, see the following sections:
Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 on page 386 Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning on page 388 Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000 on page 393
The Runtime Parameters settings in the Default cdma2000 Analysis Settings dialog box apply only to Monte Carlo analyses. For more information, see To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 on page 429.
Creating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the cdma2000 Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project.
A rapid planning analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the cdma2000 technology. If you want to perform analyses for carriers assigned to a TDMA/FDMA technology, you must create a TDMA/FDMA analysis under the TDMA/FDMA Analyses node. For more information, see Chapter 7, Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.
384
A Monte Carlo analysis takes more time than rapid planning, but generates detailed subscriber information that a rapid planning analysis does not. For more information on Monte Carlo analyses, see Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399.
To create a new rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose New Network Analysis. The cdma2000 Analysis dialog box opens.
2 3
In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis. In the Description box, type a description of the analysis.
385
From the Analysis Mode list, choose Rapid Planning and click OK. A new cdma2000 analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.
If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node, choose Select Sectors, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use, and click Continue. If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 on page 395.
To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node

If you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the cdma2000 Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project. 1 2 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the cdma2000_Analyses folder in the current project folder. In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses. The list of analyses updates to show the new analysis.
Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000

System settings enable you to define network characteristics that you want to simulation in your analysis (e.g., slow fading and soft handoff gain).
To define rapid planning system settings for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate. The cdma2000 Simulation dialog box opens. 2 In the tree view, choose System.
386
If you want to calculate soft handoff gain due to macro-diversity, enable the Use Soft Handoff Gain check box. If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handoff will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handoff gain is not taken into account for the reverse link analysis for the mobile.
From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer. The Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the third best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the third best server is causing any significant interference for the best server.
387
If you want to override the rapid planning settings on the Sector Settings Implementation panel for this analysis, enable the Override All Cell Loads check box and type values for the following:
Reverse Loadthe percentage of cell loading that you want to target for the reverse link Forward Available Traffic Powerthe percentage of available power for traffic that you want to target for the forward link cell loading. For example, a value of 75 means that only 75% of the available traffic power (i.e., PA power minus overhead power) is used in the analysis; a value of 100 means that all of the available traffic power is used. This parameter does not apply to EV-DO carriers. EV-DO Forward Activity Factorthe average ratio of nonidle traffic slots to the total number of traffic slots.
Typically, you would use the Override All Cell Loads option if you are doing nominal planning or network dimensioning. If you are optimizing an existing network using switch statistics, you would use the rapid planning settings on the Implementation panel for the sector. 6 Choose another item in the tree view.
Choosing subscriber types for cdma2000 rapid planning

When you choose subscriber types for a rapid planning analysis, you have two options:
You can choose a subscriber type that you have defined using the Subscriber Manager. For information on the Subscriber Manager, see Chapter 15: Defining cdma2000 Subscribers on page 291. You can choose the Nominal Subscriber type, which enables you to define basic subscriber characteristics for a simple rapid planning analysis. This option is available only for rapid planning.
The Monte Carlo planning option requires the detailed information provided by the Subscriber Manager.
388
To choose a defined subscriber type for cdma2000 rapid planning

1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view.
2 3 4
On the Subscribers panel, choose the Subscriber Manager option. Enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include in the analysis. Choose another item in the tree view.
To choose a nominal subscriber for cdma2000 rapid planning

Using a nominal subscriber enables you to define the minimum subscriber settings required to run a rapid planning analysis.
389
1 2
In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view. On the Subscribers panel, choose the Nominal Subscriber option.
390
On the Nominal Subscribers tab, in the Mobile Equipment section, define values for the following:
Max Transmit Powermaximum transmit power at the mobile power amplifier in the box. Antenna Gainthe antenna gain for the mobile equipment band type used by the nominal subscriber type Body Lossthe signal loss as a result of the proximity of objects located near the transmitter. Max Active Serversthe maximum number of handoff servers supported by the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use Noise Figure the noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type that the nominal subscriber type will use
In the Cell Edge Coverage Probability box, type a value to define the probability of coverage required for a subscriber or bin to be regarded as covered. The Cell Edge Coverage Probability value is used when you generate a rapid planning analysis to calculate service coverage for the Forward Best Server, Reverse - Best Server, and Other - Path Balance layers.
From the Environment list, choose one of the following environment types for the nominal subscriber:

Outdooropen air environments Indoorbuildings or structures Deep Indoordense buildings, such as office towers Vehicularmoving vehicles
In order to view results for a chosen environment, you must have specified the environment parameters in the New Clutter Type or Edit Clutter Type dialog box in the Subscriber Manager and you must have assigned the clutter classes to the appropriate clutter types. 6 Click the Nominal Bearers tab.
391
In the Forward Bearer section, define values for the following:
Required Forward Fundamental Eb/Nothe received signalto-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the fundamental channel for a given quality, such as FER, on the forward link. Required Forward Supplemental Eb/Nothe received signalto-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the supplemental channels for a given quality, such as FER, on the forward link. Forward Radio Configurationchoose the radio configuration to use for the forward link. You can choose from RC1 to RC5. These are standard cdma2000 radio configurations with a spreading rate of 1. Configurations with a spreading rate of 3 are not supported. For more information on the permitted radio configuration combinations for the forward and reverse link, see Table 15.2 on page 324.
Forward Service Traffic Ratethe data rate for the forward link. Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offsetthe maximum power correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber. This box, in conjunction with the Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a persector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.
Minimum Traffic Channel Power Offsetthe minimum power correction value to be applied for the nominal subscriber. This box, in conjunction with the Maximum Traffic Channel Power Offset, enables you to adjust the traffic channel power defined on a per-
392
sector basis to account for the different power requirements of services with different data rates.
Forward Fundamental Eb/No to FERdo one of the following:
Click Browse, navigate to the file that contains the Eb/No to FER curve, and click Open. Click Edit, and in the Curve Editor, create an Eb/No to FER curve, and click OK. For more information on the Curve Editor, press the F1 key.
For details about how the Eb/No to FER curve is used, see Defining cdma2000 bearers on page 301. 8 In the Reverse Bearer section, define values for the following:
In the Required Reverse Fundamental Eb/No box, type the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the fundamental channel for a given quality, such as FER, on the reverse link. In the Required Reverse Supplemental Eb/No box, type the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) required on the supplemental channels for a given quality, such as FER, on the reverse link. From the Reverse Radio Configuration list, choose the radio configuration for the reverse link. You can choose from RC1 to RC4. These are standard cdma2000 radio configurations with a spreading rate (SR) of 1. Configurations with a spreading rate of 3 are not supported. For more information on the permitted radio configuration combinations for the forward and reverse link, see Table 15.2 on page 324.
In the Reverse box, type the data rate for the reverse traffic.
Defining rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000

The analysis area is the area over which the analysis is computed. You have the option of using the full area covered by the analysis or defining boundaries to limit the analysis area. By limiting the analysis area, you can significantly reduce the computation time by eliminating all of the areas in which you are not interested.
393
To define rapid planning analysis area settings for cdma2000

1 2 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the tree view. On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:
Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictionsindicates that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions Use Analysis Boundsenables you to specify x and y coordinates to limit the extent of the simulation. Do one of the following: Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes Click Update Bounds With Active View if you have resized or zoomed your Map window. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window. Use An Analysis Gridenables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, Working with the Grid Manager, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.

Use An Area Gridenables you to choose a predefined area grid. For information on creating area grids, see Chapter 14, Working with Grids, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
394
Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

Before generating a rapid planning analysis, you must define the settings on each panel in the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box as described in Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 on page 386.
To generate a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000

1 2 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, click Analyze. If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis, and click Continue. In the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK. By default, the check boxes are enabled for all of the layers that you chose in the analysis layer filter. A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include the layers in the analysis.


1 2 3 4 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions that you want to use. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis and choose Select Sectors. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose Flags Filter and click Continue. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis you want to generate and choose Generate.
395
Define the analysis settings as described starting in Defining rapid planning system settings for cdma2000 on page 386, and then follow the procedure described in To generate a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 on page 395.
Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers

Once you have generated your analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.
To view cdma2000 analysis layers
In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis layer under the cdma2000 Analysis node and choose View. The analysis layer is displayed in the Map window.
To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the cdma2000 Analysis node, right-click an analysis layer, and choose Remove. You can obtain statistical and composite reports for the analysis layers using the Layer Statistics Analysis tool. For more information, see Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483.
Deleting analyses
To delete analyses

396
397
398
19.
Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000

This chapter describes how to generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma20000 and view results. A Monte Carlo analysis generates:
Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for cdma2000 cdma2000 analysis layers Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 Optimizing cdma2000 analyses Defining default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000 Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis Generating cdma2000 analysis layers Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers Analyzing pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors
information about sectors, carriers and subscribers in your network analysis layers
You can also generate a rapid planning analysis, which provides only analysis layers, but takes less time. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379.
399
Understanding Monte Carlo analyses for cdma2000

A Monte Carlo analysis uses Monte Carlo simulation techniques to determine the characteristics of your network over repeated runs. A run consists of the distribution of random numbers of subscribers throughout the analysis area in a random pattern, and an analysis of the reverse link and forward link. On the last run, operating points and discrete subscriber information are generated. Once the runs are completed, you can view the results and generate analysis layers (either automatically or as a separate step). Statistically, individual runs are of little value. However, over many Monte Carlo runs, the average result provides a realistic representation of network performance. The results are averaged to create the operating points that are used when you generate analysis layers. The following sections describe the phases of a Monte Carlo run and explain the methods for determining how many runs are required.
Monte Carlo phases

This section explains the phases of a Monte Carlo run:

placing subscribers in a random pattern reverse link and forward link analysis generation of operating points and subscriber information
Placing subscribers in a random pattern
Each run begins with the placement of subscribers in a random pattern throughout the analysis area. This pattern is created using input values from the carriers defined for the band and the subscribers defined in the Subscriber Manager. The random distribution pattern corresponds to the traffic map, and is an efficient method for establishing transmission patterns when the exact location of each subscriber cannot be established.
Analyzing the reverse link and forward link
The goal of the reverse link and forward link analysis phase is to determine the subscribers that can be served, taking into account the impact of each served subscriber on the network. The reverse link analysis begins by considering the subscribers in the simulation, then the serving sectors for each subscriber.
400
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 CDMA User Guide
The reverse link analysis
determines the best reverse link server that is also the best forward link server identifies the second and third best reverse link servers calculates the handoff gain based on the degree of correlation of the active serving sectors and adjusts the reverse link power accordingly calculates the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) and checks that the required coverage probability is achieved calculates the noise rise and checks that the limit is not exceeded on all sectors checks that the cell radius and speed limit are not exceeded calculates the required forward link power of the serving sector determines whether the received serving sector pilot power-tointerference ratio (Ec/Io) is above the target calculates the received signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) and checks that the required coverage probability is achieved checks that the channel element, user limit, PA power, throughput, and code limits are not exceeded
The forward link analysis

The analysis also checks the carrier soft limits for noise rise and PA threshold, as defined on the Carrier tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box. Subscribers will be allocated to carriers according to the preference weightings until either the PA Threshold or Noise Rise value is reached on a carrier. Then, subscribers will be distributed on carriers for which a threshold has not been reached. If, however, soft targets have been reached on all available carriers, then the analysis will carry subscribers until other hard limits defined in the sector settings are reached.
Generating operating points and subscriber information
On the last run, operating points and subscriber information are generated. Operating points provide detailed information about each sector, carrier, and subscriber type in the analysis. The operating points are averaged and stored. You can view the actual values (i.e., standard deviation and range) of the operating points by opening the operating points text (.txt) file that is stored in the cdma2000_Analyses folder of your project. For more information on
401
operating points, see Appendix F: cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format on page 547. You can also view the mean values of the operating points by designing a report using one of the following types of report data:

System-mobile Carrier-sector Carrier-sector-mobile Throughput
For more information, see Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483. Subscriber information provides details on the coverage status of subscribers (also known as discrete subscribers). Snapshots of each subscribers status are compiled on each run of the simulation. When the simulation is complete, the coverage status of each subscriber is displayed automatically in the Map window. The discrete subscriber information is also stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) that you can view. For more information, see Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 545. In order to get a visual snapshot of the results of data rate negotiation across the network, you can create a traffic map that highlights unserved subscribers. The unserved traffic maps are created using the discrete subscribers table that is generated during a Monte-Carlo analysis. See Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map on page 437.
Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs

Before you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, you must define the number of runs to complete. You have two options for determining the number of runs:

user-defined method convergence method
These options are defined on the Runtime Parameters panel of the cdma2000 Simulation tool dialog box, and are described in detail in the following sections. You can choose either the user-defined method, or the convergence method, or you can choose a combination of both methods. For more information on the Runtime Parameters panel, see To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 on page 429.
402
User-defined method
Using the Fixed Number of Runs option on the Runtime Parameters panel, you can define the exact number of runs to complete in the Monte Carlo analysis. You need to consider the minimum number of runs that will present an accurate model of the system; with too few runs, the results will not accurately reflect the distribution of subscribers within the network. Too many runs will not degrade the outputs of the analysis, but may take a long time. If the analysis does not achieve what you consider to be an accurate model of the network using the number of runs that you specified, you can generate additional runs. See To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for cdma2000 on page 439. The number of runs required to achieve a given level of accuracy can vary dramatically based on several factors, which include the following:
the number of bins in the analysis, which is directly proportional to the analysis area and resolution. The number of bins in the analysis has an impact as it will provide the number of potential points for subscribers. The more potential points for subscribers, the greater the likelihood of variation. the number of subscribers to be spread. This, coupled with the type of subscriber (for example, high data rate subscribers) and the traffic map, has potentially the greatest impact on the number of runs required. If you spread very few subscribers over a large area, then you need many runs to get a good statistical representation. If these subscribers are spread in a limited area, then fewer runs are likely required. the impact of each individual subscriber on the analysis, which is essentially the required Eb/No. Higher data rate subscribers create a bigger load and have a bigger impact in all respects. They are also are more likely to be served or not served. the potential variation in the locations of the subscribers in the analysis according to the assigned traffic maps. A flat traffic map will likely require more runs than a map where all of the subscribers are concentrated.
403
the number of sectors in the analysis. A greater number of servers, coupled with the potential for overlapping coverage areas, handoff regions, and gaps in coverage, results in a higher potential for different sectors providing service, and more runs being required.
In general, the greater potential variability then the greater the number of runs required to ensure a reasonable level of accuracy. It is often useful to do a single run first, especially for large analyses. A single run can identify obvious errors quickly, for example, incorrect PA power settings for a sector. To help determine whether additional runs are required, you view discrete subscriber information (see Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 on page 436) and you can generate reports to view the operating points. For more information on reports, see Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483.
Convergence method
The Convergence Achieved option on the Runtime Parameters panel enables you to have more refined control over the simulation process than the Fixed Number of Runs option. The distribution of subscribers is affected by the traffic density. The greater the traffic density, the fewer runs will be required. Using this approach, the runs continue until the convergence target is reached. After each run, the tool calculates the convergence factor (see Convergence factor calculation on page 405). When the convergence factor is equal to or less than the value that you define in the Convergence Achieved box, the runs are complete. To achieve results that are statistically valid, you must determine an appropriate Convergence Achieved value. If you specify a lower value (for example, 1%), more runs will be required for the solution to converge. A lower Convergence Achieved value generally requires a higher resolution digital elevation model (DEM) to ensure accurate results. If the DEM has low resolution, small variations in the interference calculations between runs might cause significant differences in the coverage area for a particular site. The Convergence Achieved option requires a minimum of three runs to complete.
404
Convergence factor calculation
The following calculations are used to determine the convergence factor during a run. First, the number of dropped users is calculated using Equation 19.1.
n Si i = 0 Mean number of dropped users = Sn = ------------------n Equation 19.1 Mean number of dropped users Where: S n
The divergence of consecutive values is continually calculated using the mean value. For example:
Divergence = Max { Sn 4,Sn 3,Sn 2,Sn 1,Sn } M in { Sn 4,Sn 3,Sn 2,Sn 1,Sn } Equation 19.2 Divergence of consecutive values Where: Max Min S n
is the maximum number of dropped users is the minimum number of dropped users
The Sn value from Equation 19.1 and the divergence value from Equation 19.2 are then used to determine the convergence factor, as shown in Equation 19.3.
( Divergence ) ( Sn ) 100 Equation 19.3 Convergence factor
405

By default, Mentum Planet implements data rate negotiation across your network. Data rate negotiation is the process of reducing the data rate for a connection from the maximum desirable rate, to the highest achievable rate, given the radio channel conditions at the time. The data rate negotiation process is illustrated in Table 19.1. It is assumed that bearers are available for each technology layer to carry the service at the required/negotiated rates and that IS-95 is limited to cdma2000 radio configurations RC1 and RC2. It is also assumed that EV-DO traffic classes are set as defaults in the network settings (Interactive and Background). Data rate negotiation is applied to both circuit and packet switched services.
Table 19.1 Data rate negotiation process for cdma2000 Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Voice (Circuit Conversational below 15 kbps) Circuit Conversational above 15 kbps) Circuit streaming IS-95 & 1xRTT & EV-DO Carried on 1xRTT), then on IS-95 (fixed rate) Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95 IS-95 & 1xRTT Carried on 1xRTT then on IS-95 (fixed rate) Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT ten within IS-95 1xRTT & EV-DO Carried on 1xRTT (fixed rate) Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT Symmetric negotiation within 1xRTT EV-DO Only Not carried
Not carried
Not carried
406
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 CDMA User Guide Available Technology Layers Service/QoS Combination Packet Conversational/ Streaming Packet or Circuit Interactive/ Background IS-95 & 1xRTT & EV-DO Negotiated within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Negotiated within EV-DO then within 1xRTT, then within IS-95 IS-95 & 1xRTT Negotiated within 1xRTT then within IS-95 Negotiated within 1xRTT then within IS-95 1xRTT & EV-DO Negotiated within 1xRTT Negotiated within EVDO then within 1xRTT EV-DO Only Not carried
Negotiated within EVDO

In the process of data rate negotiation, a subscriber may be downgraded to a second generation technology if conditions warrant. Table 19.1 on page 406 details the downgrade path.This is the last step in the data rate negotiation process. If a subscriber cannot receive service on the EV-DO network layer, then the subscriber is dropped based on the priority defined for the subscriber type.

view coverage maps showing the coverage probability for different rates for one usage. In particular, you can view the Downlink - Bearer Coverage layer, the Downlink - Max Achievable Coverage layer as well as the Uplink - Bearer Coverage layer and Uplink - Max Achievable Coverage layer. review statistics showing the number of subscribers carried at the maximum and the negotiated rates, and the average achieved rate per usage and per sector/carrier. In particular, you can examine the system - mobile report and the carrier - sector-
407
mobile report. See Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483.
create a traffic map from the un-served users based on a Monte Carlo analysis. See Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map on page 437. use the Grid Info tool or the Info tool to view details about the data rate negotiation. See Chapter 5: Working with the Grid Manager in the Grid Analysis User Guide. For information about the Info tool, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide. browse the discrete subscriber table for details about data rate negotiations. In particular, examine the following columns:
Block Reason. See Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 545. Achieved Downlink Rate. See Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 545. Achieved Uplink Rate. See Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 545. Negotiation State. See Negotiation States.
Negotiation States
You can generate a Monte Carlo analysis with discrete subscriber information. When you do so, the discrete subscriber table contains a Negotiation State column. There are five possible states:
Non-negotiateda subscriber who is carried at the maximum data rate on both the reverse link and forward link. Forward negotiateda subscriber who is carried where the forward link is at less than the maximum forward link data rate, but the reverse link is at the maximum data rate. Reverse negotiateda subscriber who is carried where the reverse link is at less than the maximum reverse link data rate, but the forward link is at the maximum data rate. Negotiateda subscriber who is carried where neither the forward link or reverse link are at the maximum data rates. Not Serveda subscriber can not be served.
408

Analysis layers are generated after the final Monte Carlo run. The following types of analysis layers are available to enable you to visualize and optimize the coverage of your network:

Pilot analysis Reverse link interference analysis Forward link interference analysis Handoff analysis Throughput analysis Path balance analysis EV-DO analysis (see Chapter 20: Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers on page 455)
cdma2000 analysis layers are stored in the cdma2000_Analyses folder of your project.
cdma2000 analysis layers are generated separately from TDMA/FDMA analysis layers. For more information on TDMA/FDMA analysis layers, see Chapter 7, Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers, in the TDMA/ FDMA User Guide.
Pilot analysis
Pilot analysis layers (see Table 19.2 on page 410) enable you to visualize pilot coverage and interference over the analysis area. As a subscriber becomes more distant from the serving site, the path loss increases, decreasing the pilot power (Ec). As the subscriber moves away from the serving site and closer to other sites, interference (Io) occurs. The boundary of pilot coverage varies due to load, environmental, and bearer conditions. Generating pilot analysis layers enables you to quantify this effect
409
by calculating the maximum propagation loss for a given load, environment, or bearer. For more information, see Pilot interference on page 537.
Table 19.2 Pilot analysis layers Layer Pilot - Best Server Description Displays the coverage area of each sectors pilot. The coverage area is based on achieving at least the Pilot Detection Threshold defined in the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. See To define quality settings on page 352. Identical to the Pilot - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the pilot Ec/Io at each bin based on the power limits defined in the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box (see To define cdma2000 power settings on page 353) rather than the Pilot Target Ec/Io value. See To define quality settings on page 352. Displays the coverage area of all the sectors within the analysis area Displays the second best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the third best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the fourth best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the fifth best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the sixth best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the seventh best pilot to be used if it is a candidate for the active set of sectors Displays the best server at each location where the Best Ec is better than the value defined in the Best Ec Threshold box on the General tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box, or null if the Best Ec is worse than the threshold value.
Pilot - Composite Best Server Pilot - Best Ec/Io
Pilot - Coverage Pilot - 2nd Server Pilot - 3rd Server Pilot - 4th Server Pilot - 5th Server Pilot - 6th Server Pilot - 7th Server Pilot - Best Ec Server
410
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 CDMA User Guide Table 19.2 Pilot analysis layers (continued) Layer Pilot - Composite Best Ec Server Pilot - Best Ec Pilot - Total Ec Description Identical to the Pilot - Best Ec Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the Ec (the energy received per chip) for the best pilot. Displays the total Ec for the pilots in the active set. The total Ec is computed as the sum of Ec powers of the pilots in active set. Displays the areas in your coverage region where pilot coverage is not sufficient. The Pilot - Pollution Index is a numeric grid (.grd) file that uses a percentage for each bin. Values closer to 100% indicate areas where pilot pollution and/or pilot coverage may be a problem. This index is created based on the number of users in an area (usage factor) and the probability of pilot pollution (pilot factor) in that area. High values occur when there is a low pilot-to-interference ratio and/or there is a high concentration of users in relation to the available signal strength. The usage factor is based on the traffic map and the usage factor curve defined in the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box and the traffic factor is based on the pilot factor curve define in the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box. Displays the difference in pilot Ec/Io between the best server and the server that you choose in the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer box on the System panel of the Analysis Settings dialog box. See To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000 on page 424 for details. Displays the number of pilot polluters at each bin. A pilot is a polluter if it is not a best or handoff server and its Ec/Io is within the Pilot Pollution Margin defined in the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box. See To define general settings for cdma2000 on page 282. Displays the worst pilot polluter at each bin.
Pilot - Pollution Index
Pilot - Delta Ec/Io
Pilot - Number of Polluters
Pilot - Worst Polluter
411
Chapter 19 CDMA User Guide Table 19.2 Pilot analysis layers (continued) Layer Pilot - Sum of Pilots minus Best Pilot Description Displays the total pilot signal strength within the network minus the best pilot signal strength. This indicates whether the best pilot is the primary component of the composite signal. In areas where there are too many different signals of similar strength, the signal-to-interference ratio will be too high and calls may be dropped. It is more effective for cdma2000 networks to have a dominant pilot signal throughout the desired coverage area. Displays the total downlink noise received at the mobile receiver. This value represents the downlink received signal strength including thermal noise. This layer applies to EV-DO carriers only. Displays the ratio of total Ec and received Io. Displays the total interference outdoors at the location of the receiver. Thermal noise is not included. This analysis layer does not take into account the penetration loss or the mobile antenna gain. This layer applies to EV-DO carriers only. Displays the in-cell to out-of-cell interference ratio based on the ratio of the signal energy from the best serving sector divided by the energy from all other sectors. The signal energy includes overhead channels as well as traffic channels. This measurement is always below zero (i.e., out-of-cell energy is greater than in-cell energy) at the edge of primary coverage. This layer applies to EV-DO carriers only.
Pilot - Received Io
Pilot - Total Ec/Io Pilot - Outdoor Io
Pilot - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference
412
Forward link interference analysis

Forward link interference analysis layers (see Table 19.3) enable you to determine the interference generated on the forward link connections in your network.
Table 19.3 Forward link analysis layers Layer Forward - Best Server Forward - Composite Best Server Forward - Coverage Probability Forward - Eb/No Description Displays the service channel coverage area for each sector Identical to the Forward - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the probability of forward link coverage at each bin. This value includes the fade margin. Displays the forward link service Eb/No at each bin without limiting it to the forward link target Eb/No. The cdma2000 analysis layer generation process assumes that perfect power control will cause the power to set itself at a level that will achieve the target Eb/No. See Controlling interference on page 538. Displays the frame erasure rate (FER) at each bin based on the FER to Eb/No curve defined in the cdma2000 Bearer dialog box. See Defining cdma2000 bearers on page 301. Displays the total forward link noise received at the mobile receiver. This value represents the forward link received signal strength including thermal noise. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - Received Io. Displays the total interference outdoors at the location of the receiver. Thermal noise is not included. This analysis layer does not take into account the penetration loss or the mobile antenna gain. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - Outdoor Io. Displays the in-cell to out-of-cell interference ratio based on the ratio of the signal energy from the best serving sector divided by the energy from all other sectors. The signal energy includes overhead channels as well as traffic channels. This measurement is always below zero (i.e., out-of-cell energy is greater than in-cell energy) at the edge of primary coverage. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference.
Forward - FER
Forward - Received Io
Forward link- Outdoor Io
Forward - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference
413
Chapter 19 CDMA User Guide Table 19.3 Forward link analysis layers (continued) Layer Forward link - i-Factor Description Displays the other-to-own cell interference ratio based on all other sectors and the in-cell signal strength. This layer is the reciprocal of the Forward - In Cell to Out of Cell Interference layer in linear form. For EV-DO carriers, this layer is called Pilot - i-factor. Displays the mean forward link throughput for each bin. Displays the coverage probability for each bearer specified in the analysis. Displays the maximum achieved data rates over the analysis area.
Forward linkThroughput Forward link- Bearer Coverage Forward link- Max Achievable Coverage
Reverse link interference analysis

Reverse link interference analysis layers (see Table 19.4) enable you to determine the interference generated on the reverse link connections in your network.
Table 19.4 Reverse link interference analysis layers Layer Reverse - Best Server Reverse - Composite Best Server Reverse - Coverage Probability Description Displays the reverse link coverage for each sector Identical to the Reverse - Best Server layer, except that for sectors with repeaters, the repeater and its donor are treated as one combined sector. Displays the probability of reverse link coverage at each bin. This value includes the fade margin.
414
Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 CDMA User Guide Table 19.4 Reverse link interference analysis layers (continued) Layer Reverse - Req Mobile EIRP Description Displays the EIRP values for a mobile at each bin that are required to close the reverse link. For a single channel, this is calculated as follows: Required EIRP = Required PA Power + Mobile Antenna Gain = Required Eb/No - Processing Gain + Penetration Loss + Masked Pathloss + Noise Rise + Composite Noise Figure + kTB For total required EIRP for fundamental and supplemental channels, the equation is: Total Required EIRP = fundamental required EIRP + (number of supplemental channels * supplemental required EIRP) The composite noise figure is taken from the link budget for the sector (and, optionally, the carrier). See Calculating base station link budgets for cdma2000 sectors on page 333. The required mobile EIRP will vary for different subscriber types. Reverse - Mobile EIRP Margin Reverse - Load Displays the difference between the maximum possible mobile EIRP and the actual required EIRP for each bin Displays the best server cell load for each bin. The load at a bin is the cell loading of the reverse link best server for that bin. Displays the mean reverse link throughput for each bin. Displays the coverage probability for each bearer specified in the analysis. Displays the maximum achieved data rates over the analysis area.
Reverse - Throughput Reverse - Bearer Coverage Reverse - Max Achievable Coverage
Throughput will only exist in areas where pilot coverage and path balance exists.
Handoff analysis
Handoff analysis layers (see Table 19.5) enable you to determine the handoff status of each sector included in an analysis. For more information on how handoff and soft handoff occur, see Appendix D: Modeling cdma2000 Networks on page 535.
415
All handoff calculations are based on the Handoff Margin value defined on the Quality panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see To define quality settings on page 352.
Table 19.5 Handoff analysis layers Layer Handoff - Status Description Displays the handoff state of each sector within the analysis area. The handoff states are: Not in handoff (N)there is only one available server Soft handoff (S)the subscriber is served by two sectors from two different sites Softer handoff (SS)the subscriber is served by two sectors from the same site Softer-Soft handoff (SS-S)the subscriber is served by three sectors. The subscribers best server and either the second or third best server is situated at one site and the remaining server is at another site. Soft-Softer handoff (S-SS)the subscriber is served by three sectors. The subscribers best server is situated at one site and the next two best servers are situated at another site. Soft-Soft handoff (S-S)all three servers are located at different sites Softer-Softer (SSS)the subscriber is served by three sectors, all from the same site 4 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by four sectors (irrespective of the sites) 5 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by five sectors (irrespective of the sites) 6 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by six sectors (irrespective of the sites) 7 Active Serversthe subscriber is served by seven sectors (irrespective of the sites) Displays the reverse link soft handoff gain at each bin. The gain is produced by the ability of the subscribers and sites to operate at a lower power value when engaged in soft handoff and still meet the system quality requirements for the FER. Displays the total number of serving sectors (i.e., the sectors in soft handoff) Displays the total number of serving sites (i.e., the sites where sectors are in soft handoff)
Handoff - Soft Handoff Gain
Handoff - Active Server Count Handoff - Active Site Count
416
Other analysis
The path balance analysis layer (see Table 19.6) enables you to determine whether coverage has been achieved on both the reverse link and forward link paths.
Table 19.6 Path balance analysis layer Layer Other - Path Balance Description Displays the balance between the forward link and reverse link. The forward link is considered covered at a bin if both pilot coverage and service coverage are achieved. Path balance is achieved when the probability of both the reverse link and forward link coverage is equal to or greater than the Cell Edge Coverage Probability value in the Circuit Switched Service or Packet Switched Service dialog box. See Defining service types for cdma2000 on page 316. The combined coverage probability for the forward link and reverse link (Forward - Coverage Probability layer and Reverse - Coverage Probability layer). For each pixel, the combined probability layer represents the minimum probability of the two layers.
Other - Combined Probability
Workflow for generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

Step 1
Ensure that you have defined a traffic map for the subscriber types that covers the same area as your Monte Carlo analysis. See Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 on page 323 and Chapter 10, Working with Traffic Maps, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Optionally, generate a rapid planning analysis. See Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379. Define prediction view settings. See Optimizing cdma2000 analyses on page 418. Create a new cdma2000 analysis. See Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 on page 422.
Step 2
Step 3 Step 4
417
Step 5
Define settings and generate a Monte Carlo analysis. See Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000 on page 424. View and interpret discrete subscriber information and operating points. See Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 on page 436 and Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483. If required, generate additional runs. See Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis on page 439. Define, generate, and view analysis layers. See
Step 6
Step 7 Step 8
Defining cdma2000 analysis layers on page 440 Generating cdma2000 analysis layers on page 442 Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers on page 443
Step 9
Generate statistical reports for analysis layers. See Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483.
Optimizing cdma2000 analyses

You can optimize analysis speed or disk space usage by choosing whether or not to use prediction view files. Using prediction view files is optional and your decision should be based on a consideration of the balance between analysis speed and disk space usage in your particular case. By default, when you generate an analysis, prediction view files are created. Prediction view files contain predicted signal strength values for all potential servers at each bin. Using prediction view files results in faster analyses because Mentum Planet only reads one file to access information about signal strength for all potential servers. If you do not use prediction view files, Mentum Planet opens individual prediction files to query signal strength. However, prediction view files occupy additional disk space and can take a significant amount of time to generate initially, especially if you are working with multi-resolution predictions over a large area.
418
Prediction view files work at a single resolution. If you are analyzing a large area with mostly low resolution data and small amounts of higher resolution data, the disk space requirements can be significantly higher than the combined disk space requirements of the prediction data if the analysis is carried out at the higher resolution. This is because the prediction view files will be created at the higher resolution over the entire area. Also, separate prediction views are created for each of the required analysis resolutions, which can further add to disk space requirements. For example, an area that is 100 km x 100 km with a 10-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 2 GB of disk space for prediction view files, whereas an area that is 200 km x 200 km with a 5-meter resolution and an average of 10 overlapping predictions requires approximately 32 GB of disk space for prediction view files.
To define CDMA Analysis Optimization settings

1 2 Choose Edit Project Settings. In the Project Settings dialog box, click the Advanced Options tab.
In the CDMA Analysis Optimization section, do the following to define the number of predictions considered at each location (especially in
419
calculating total forward link interference) and specify the maximum pathloss:
In the Maximum Number of Predictions box, type a value for the number of overlapping predictions considered at each location when you generate analyses. Limiting the number of overlapping predictions is useful in situations such as a dense urban area where there are thousands of overlapping predictions, but the total interference is dominated by a small number of the strongest signals. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it. In the Maximum Pathloss box, type a value for the maximum pathloss that will be considered (within the Maximum Number of Predictions restriction). This value enables you to exclude weak signals from your analyses. The default value in this box will provide good results. It is recommended that you do not change it.
Click OK.
Defining default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings

If you want to use the same settings for a number of Monte Carlo analyses, you can define default settings. When you create a new analysis, these defaults are automatically used.
420
To define default cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis settings

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Default cdma2000 Analysis Settings. Define the default settings that you want to use, and click OK. For more information defining analysis settings, see the following sections:
To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000 on page 424 To choose the subscriber types for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis on page 427 To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for cdma2000 on page 431 To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 on page 429
Defining default analysis layers for cdma2000

After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, nodes are created in the Project Explorer under the cdma2000 analysis name for the carriers, subscriber types, usage types, and environments that were included in the analysis. cdma2000 analysis layers are generated for each environment under the usage type. By default, all of the available cdma2000 analysis layers are generated. If you have a large project, to avoid lengthy generation times, you can omit layers that you do not need using the cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter. The cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter enables you to define a default list of analysis layers that will be available for all of the cdma2000 analyses that you create for the current project.
421
To define the default cdma2000 analysis layer list

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Analysis Layer Filter.
In the cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK. For more information on each analysis layer, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409.
Creating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

When you create a new analysis, it is displayed in the Project Explorer in the Network Analyses category under the cdma2000 Analyses node. You can create any number of analyses (rapid planning or Monte Carlo) for a project. Rapid planning is a quicker analysis method than Monte Carlo, but does not provide the detailed subscriber information that a Monte Carlo analysis does. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379.
A cdma2000 analysis enables you to perform analyses on carriers that have been assigned to the cdma2000 technology. If you want to perform analyses for carriers assigned to a TDMA/FDMA technology, you must create a TDMA/FDMA analysis under the TDMA/FDMA Analyses node. For more information, see Chapter 7, Generating TDMA/FDMA Analysis Layers, in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide.
422
To create a new Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose New Network Analysis. The cdma2000 Analysis dialog box opens.
2 3 4
In the Analysis Name box, type a name for the analysis. In the Description box, type a description of the analysis. From the Analysis Mode list, choose Monte Carlo, and click OK. A new cdma2000 analysis node is created in the Project Explorer.
If you want to choose the sectors to use for the analysis, right-click the analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node, choose Select Sectors, and then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to use and click Continue. If you do not choose the sectors to use for the analysis, you will be prompted to do so when you run the analysis. For more information, see To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 on page 435.
423
Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000

You define the settings for the Monte Carlo analysis using the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box. When you are satisfied with the settings, you can generate the analysis directly from this dialog box.
To define Monte Carlo system settings for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate. The cdma2000 Simulation dialog box opens. 2 In the tree view, choose System.
424
If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effect of power control imperfections or errors, on the System panel, enable the Simulate Power Control Errors check box. For more information on defining power control settings, see To define power control settings for cdma2000 on page 285. For general information on controlling interference using power controls, see Appendix D: Modeling cdma2000 Networks on page 535.
If you want to calculate soft handoff within the Monte Carlo simulation to limit macro-diversity soft handoff gain, enable the Use Soft Handoff Gain check box. If enabled, the PA power of mobiles in handoff will be reduced. If cleared, the calculated handoff gain is not taken into account for the reverse link analysis for the mobile.
If you want to perform statistical modeling of the effects of slow fading, enable the Model Slow Fading check box. For more information on slow fading, see How slow fading is modeled on page 517.
If you want to use IS-95 carriers first for services that use RC1 and RC2 bearers, enable the Prefer IS-95 Carrier for RC1, RC2 Traffic check box. By allocating IS-95 carriers first for services that use RC1 and RC2 bearers, more 1xRTT carriers can be allocated for services that use RC3RC5 bearers (not supported on IS-95). If you do not enable this check box, the allocation of carriers is based on the preference weightings defined on the Carrier tab of the Mobile Technology - Network Settings dialog box.
If you want to use the pilot Ec/Nt in the data rate layer generation or the coverage map layer generation on EV-DO carriers, enable any of the following check boxes:
Use pilot Ec/Nt for data rate layer generationthe pilot Ec/Nt is used in the calculation of the maximum achievable data rate layer. Idle slot transmission and early termination of multislot transmission are not modeled. When this check box is cleared, the forward Ec/Nt measured on the traffic channel is used. Use pilot Ec/Nt for coverage layer generationthe pilot Ec/Nt is used in the calculation of individual forward coverage
425
probability layers. Idle slot transmission and early termination of multi-slot transmission are not modeled. When this check box is cleared, the forward Ec/Nt measured on the traffic channel is used. 8 From the Nth Best Server for Delta Layer list, choose the server to compare with best server in the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer. The Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer displays the difference in Ec/Io between the best server and the Nth best server that you choose. For example, you can compare the Ec/Io levels between the fourth best server and the best server to determine if the signal from the fourth best server is causing any significant interference for the best server. 9 Choose another item in the tree view.
426
To choose the subscriber types for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis

1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Subscribers in the tree view.
2 3
On the Subscribers panel, enable the check boxes for the subscriber types that you want to include in the simulation. Choose another item in the tree view.
To define Simulation Area settings for cdma2000

The simulation area controls traffic spreading for Monte Carlo analyses.
427
In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Simulation Area in the tree view.
On the Simulation Area panel, choose one of the following options:
Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictionsindicates that the simulation area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis Use Analysis Boundsenables you to specify x and y coordinates to limit the extent of the simulation. Do one of the following:
Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes Click Update Bounds With Active View. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window. In the Simulation Resolution box, type a value for the resolution of the simulation.
428
For more information on this box, press the F1 key. 4 Choose another item in the tree view.
To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000

1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters in the tree view.
On the Runtime Parameters panel, in the Analysis Target section, do one of the following:
To enable the simulation to run a specific number of times, choose the Use Fixed Number of Runs option and type a value in the Number of Runs box. To enable the simulation to run until a convergence target is reached, choose the Use Convergence Achieved option and type a value in the Convergence Required box.
429
To enable the simulation to run until both the specified number of runs have completed and the convergence target has been reached, choose the Use Number of Runs and Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes. To enable the simulation to run until either the specified number of runs have completed or the convergence target has been reached (whichever comes first), choose the Use Number of Runs or Convergence Required option and type values in the Number of Runs and Convergence Required boxes.
For more information on these settings, see Defining the number of Monte Carlo runs on page 402. 3 In the Options section, do any of the following:
To collect information about discrete subscribers that you can display once the analysis is complete, enable the Collect Discrete Information check box. For more information on displaying discrete subscriber information, see Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 on page 436. To automatically generate cdma2000 analysis layers when the Monte Carlo runs are complete, enable the Automatically Generate Layers check box. By default, the analysis layers that are enabled in the cdma2000 Analysis Layer Filter dialog box are generated. If you do not enable this check box, you can still generate layers after the Monte Carlo runs are complete. For more information on generating analysis layers and the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box, see Generating cdma2000 analysis layers on page 442.
430
To define Monte Carlo Analysis Area settings for cdma2000

1 In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Analysis Area in the tree view.
431
On the Analysis Area panel, choose one of the following options:
Use the Combined Area of Selected Predictionsindicates that the analysis area is the full area covered by the signal strength predictions of the sectors selected for the analysis Use Analysis Boundsenables you to specify x and y coordinates to limit the extent of the simulation. Do one of the following: Type values in the X and Y coordinate boxes Click Update Bounds With Active View. The x and y coordinates update to show the bounds of the active Map window. Use An Analysis Gridenables you to choose a classified grid (.grc) file to limit the analysis area. The grid must have the same projection as the signal strength grids but can have any resolution. All null bins are considered part of the analysis area. You would typically choose this option if you have created a project area using the Trimmer tool that is smaller than your current project area and want to run the simulation for the smaller area only. This option is useful to ensure that the analysis area remains the same over repeated analyses. For more information on the Trimmer tool, see Chapter 5, Working with the Grid Manager, in the Grid Analysis User Guide.

432
Defining discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000

You can define different colors for each coverage state associated with a subscriber and for each subscriber type defined. Coverage states are:
Served, Not NegotiatedThe subscriber was served at the maximum data rate on both the forward link and reverse link. Served, Forward NegotiatedThe subscriber was served but the forward link was not at the maximum data rate although the reverse link was. Served, Reverse NegotiatedThe subscriber was served but the reverse link was not at the maximum data rate although the forward link was. Served, NegotiatedThe subscriber was served but neither the reverse link or forward link were at the maximum data rate. Mobile PA PowerThe subscriber was dropped because the mobile PA power was not sufficient to achieve the Eb/No target on the reverse link. Noise RiseThe subscriber was dropped because the mobile signal caused one or more sectors to exceed its noise rise limit. Channel ElementsThe subscriber was dropped because there were insufficient channel elements available on the serving sector. User LimitThe subscriber was dropped because the maximum user limit was reached on the serving sector. Sector PA PowerThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient PA power at the serving sector. Traffic PowerThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient traffic power on the forward link to meet the subscribers Eb/No target. Pilot PowerThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient pilot power on the forward link, which means that the pilot power was not sufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile. Unknown Drop StateThe subscriber was dropped for an unknown reason. Code LimitThe subscriber was dropped due to insufficient codes on the forward link.
433
Cell Radius LimitThe subscriber was dropped because he or she was outside of the maximum cell radius for the serving sector. Speed LimitThe subscriber was dropped because he or she exceeded the speed limit for the sector. Throughput LimitThe subscriber was dropped because the throughput limit for the serving site was exceeded.
To define discrete subscriber display settings for cdma2000

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Discrete Subscriber Preferences. The Discrete Subscriber Preferences dialog box opens.
434
If you want to change the color used for a coverage state, do the following:
Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the coverage state. In the Color dialog box, choose or define the color, and click OK.
If you want to change the properties for the symbol that is displayed in the Map window for a subscriber type, do the following:
Click the Browse (...) button in the Edit column for the subscriber type. In the Symbol Style dialog box, modify the symbol properties and click OK.
For more information on the Symbol Style dialog box, press the F1 key.
Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

Once you have finished defining settings for an analysis, you can generate it directly from the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box.
To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000

1 Define the settings on each panel in the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box as described in Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000 on page 424. In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, click Analyze. If you have not defined the sectors to use for the analysis, in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis, and click Continue. If you chose to generate layers automatically, in the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box, clear the check boxes for any layers that you do not want to generate, and click OK. A dialog box opens that shows the progress of the analysis. When the analysis is complete, the dialog box closes and the analysis node in the Project Explorer expands to include each subscriber type and carrier in the analysis. If you chose to generate layers automatically, the layers are generated and displayed in the Project Explorer under the analysis. If you did not
2 3
435
generate layers automatically, you can generate them as a separate step. See Generating cdma2000 analysis layers on page 442.
If you cancel an analysis generation before it has completed, the number of runs completed and the convergence level achieved (if applicable) are indicated at the bottom of the Runtime Parameters panel of the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box.
Adding an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node

If you have an existing analysis that was generated as part of another project (whether by you or by someone else) and you want to view it with your current project, you can add it to the project so that it appears under the cdma2000 Analyses node. The analysis should cover at least a portion of the same geographic area as your current project.
To add an existing analysis to the cdma2000 Analyses node

1 2 In Windows Explorer, copy the folder containing the analysis to the cdma2000_Analyses folder in the current project folder. In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click cdma2000 Analyses and choose Refresh Analyses. The list of analyses updates to show the new analysis.
Viewing discrete subscriber information for cdma2000

If you chose to collect information about discrete subscribers during the Monte Carlo simulation (see To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 on page 429), the status of each subscriber is automatically displayed in the Map window when the simulation completes. The coverage
436
states are displayed using the colors that you chose in the Discrete Subscribers Preferences dialog box.
If you generate multiple runs for a Monte Carlo simulation, the discrete subscriber information that is displayed automatically applies only to the last run. If you want to view discrete subscriber information that applies to all runs in a Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Display Discrete Subscribers. The Display Discrete Subscribers command will not work if you have cleared the Visible check box for the analysis in the Windows category of the Project Explorer.
The discrete subscriber information from each run of the analysis is stored in a MapInfo table (.tab file) in the cdma2000_Analyses folder of your project using the naming convention <AnalysisName>_<Run Number>. You can also display discrete subscriber information in a tabular form using a new Browser window. For more information on the columns and format of the table, see Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format on page 545.
To display discrete subscriber information for cdma2000 in table format

1 2 Choose File Open Table. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the cdma2000_Analyses folder of your project and choose the MapInfo table (.tab file) that you want to display. From the Preferred View list, choose Browser. Click Open. The discrete subscriber table opens in a new Browser window.
3 4
Creating an unserved subscriber traffic map

When you view discrete subscribers, you may notice a high number of subscribers who are not being served by a particular sector. In order to better understand the reason behind this, you can create a traffic map of unserved subscribers. Using the Grid Info tool, you can determine how much unserved traffic there is at a particular bin. If your network consists of a 3G technology
437
overlaid on a 2G technology, you can use the unserved subscriber traffic map in a network analysis of the 2G network layer.
Before creating an unserved subscriber traffic map, you must have generated a Monte Carlo analysis and collected discrete subscriber information. For the traffic map to contain meaningful values, the Monte Carlo analysis should consist of several runs.
To create an unserved subscriber traffic map

1 Do one of the following in the Project Explorer:
In the Project Data category, right-click the Traffic Maps node and choose Create Unserved Traffic Map from Monte-Carlo Analysis. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the Monte Carlo analysis from which you want to create the unserved subscriber traffic map and choose Unserved Subscriber Traffic Map.
2 3 4
In the Unserved Subscribers Traffic Map Generator dialog box, in the Traffic Map Output Name box, type a name for the traffic map. In the Subscriber Types section, enable the check boxes next to the subscriber types for which you want to view the unserved subscribers. Click Generate. The traffic map is added to the Traffic Maps node in the Project Data category.
Right-click the generated map and do any of the following:
To view the map, right-click the generated map and choose View. To update the traffic information for the sectors with traffic information from a traffic map, choose Capture. To combine multiple compatible traffic maps into one new traffic map, choose Combine. To scale the traffic values in a traffic map, choose Scale.
Use the Zoom-In tool to zoom in on individual areas of the map and better view unserved subscribers.
438
Generating additional runs for a cdma2000 Monte Carlo analysis

After viewing the operating points (see Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483) and discrete subscriber information, you might determine that additional runs are required to achieve greater accuracy. You can modify the runtime parameters of an existing analysis and perform additional runs. The new results are added to the operating points of the final run of the existing analysis.
If you make changes to your project outside of the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box (for example, if you modify the usages assigned to a subscriber type in the Subscribers category in the Project Explorer) these changes will not be reflected in the additional runs.
To generate additional Monte Carlo runs for cdma2000

1 2 3 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate. In the cdma2000 Simulation dialog box, choose Runtime Parameters in the tree view. On the Runtime Parameters panel as required, do one of the following:
If you originally used the Fixed Number of Runs option, increase the number of runs. If you originally used the Convergence Achieved option, modify the convergence value.
For more information, see To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 on page 429. 4 5 If you want to change the settings in the Options section, enable or clear the check boxes as required. Click Append.
439
Updating cdma2000 rapid planning target values with Monte Carlo results
Once you have generated a Monte Carlo simulation, you have the option of using the results of the simulation to update the target values for Reverse Noise Rise and Forward Total Traffic Power on the Sector Settings Implementation panel. These values are used in rapid planning. For more information on rapid planning, see Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379.
If you apply cell loads and there is 0 required traffic for a carrier-sector, a value of -200 dBm is applied to the Forward Total Traffic Power box on the Sector Settings - Implementation panel.
To update cdma2000 target values

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click a Monte Carlo analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Apply Cell Loads. In the confirmation dialog box, click OK. The rapid planning settings are updated for all sectors in the group chosen for the analysis.
Defining cdma2000 analysis layers

If you chose not to generate layers automatically as part of the analysis, you can generate them afterward. To manage the analysis layers for an individual analysis, you can use the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box to define the availability of analysis layers for each environment. This enables you to generate the same analysis layers for all of the environments, or different analysis layers for different environments.
You can also generate cdma2000 analysis layers at the same time as operating points and subscriber information. For more information, see To define runtime parameter settings for cdma2000 on page 429.
440
To define the cdma2000 analysis layers to use in an analysis

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the cdma2000 Analysis node and choose Layers. The cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box opens, showing nodes for each carrier, subscriber type, quality, and environment, and the layers that are available for each.
If the check box is enabled for a node, all of the layers that apply to the node will be generated. If the check box is cleared, no layers that apply to the node will be generated. If the check box contains a black square, only some of the layers that apply to the node will be generated. You can expand the nodes to view which layers are chosen.
441
In the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box, expand the environment nodes, enable the check boxes for the analysis layers that you want to generate, and click OK. This dialog box includes only the default analysis layers you chose in the Analysis Layer Filter dialog box. To modify the default analysis layers, see To define the default cdma2000 analysis layer list on page 422. For more information on each analysis layer, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409.
You can generate the cdma2000 analysis layers directly from the cdma2000 Analysis Layers dialog box by clicking Generate.
Generating cdma2000 analysis layers

Once you have defined the analysis layers, you can generate the analysis.
To generate cdma2000 analysis layers
In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis under the cdma2000 Analyses node and choose Generate Layers. A dialog box opens that displays the status of the operation. Any errors are displayed in a separate dialog box. If required, path loss and signal strength predictions are updated during the analysis.

442

1 2 3 4 5 In the Project Explorer, in the Sites category, enable the flag conditions that you want to use. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis and choose Select Sectors. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose Flags Filter and click Continue. In the Network Analyses category, right-click the analysis you want to generate and choose Generate. Define the analysis settings as described in as described in Defining Monte Carlo analysis settings for cdma2000 on page 424, and then follow the procedure described in To generate a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 on page 435.
Viewing cdma2000 analysis layers

Once you have generated an analysis, you can view the analysis layers that it contains.
To view cdma2000 analysis layers

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the cdma2000 Analyses node, expand the carrier, subscriber type, usage type, and environment for which you want to view analysis layers. Right-click an analysis and choose View. The analysis layer is displayed in the Map window.
If you rename an analysis in the Project Explorer, any layers currently open or displayed in the Map window will be closed. To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, under the cdma2000 Analysis node, right-click an analysis layer, and choose Remove. You can obtain statistical and composite reports for the analysis layers using the Layer Statistics Analysis tool. For more information, see Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports on page 483.
443
Recoloring best serving sector layers

The Best Serving Sector Recolor tool enables you to change the color scheme used to display best serving sector analysis layers (classified grid files). You can use the colors defined in a sector display scheme or choose from the default color schemes used to display TDMA/FDMA and CDMA best serving sector analysis layers. Sector display schemes enable you to display analysis layers based on sector properties, such as the forward link load for CDMA technologies or carried traffic for TDMA/FDMA technologies. When you use a sector display scheme with the Best Serving Sector Recolor tool, only the colors that have been defined for the scheme are used; other sector display scheme settings, such as symbol and size, are ignored. For information about defining sector display schemes, see Customizing sector symbols for multiple sites in Chapter 2, Working With Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To recolor best serving sector layers

1 Choose Tools Best Serving Sector Recolor. The Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box opens.
Click Browse, navigate to the CDMA2000_Analyses project folder, choose the best serving sector layer (.grc) file that you want to recolor, and then click Open.
444
In the Select Sector Display Scheme section, choose a color scheme and click Apply. The best serving sector layers are displayed in the Map window using the new color scheme.
You can modify an existing sector display scheme from within in the Best Serving Sector Recolor dialog box by right-clicking a local or shared scheme and choosing Edit.
Deleting analyses
To delete analyses

Using the CDMA Pixel Info tool for cdma2000

You can obtain per-pixel information about a cdma2000 analysis by selecting an area in the Map window and using the CDMA Pixel Info tool.
The CDMA Pixel Info tool is available only for Monte Carlo analyses.
445
For each subscriber type and carrier that you choose, the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box displays:

the pixel co-ordinates (location) the number of predictions available reverse link details, including: Best Server Required ERP ERP Margin Coverage Probability forward link details, including:

Service Best Server Service Eb/No and Service Margin Coverage Probability Received Noise pilot details, including:

received power Ec/Io masked path loss polluter indicator and server status at the specified pixel location
To obtain per-pixel information about a cdma2000 analysis

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand cdma2000 Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to obtain per-pixel information and choose Pixel Info. The CDMA Pixel Info dialog box opens. The Type box displays the technology for which the analysis that you chose was generated. The Analysis box displays the analysis for which you chose to display pixel information.
446
From the SubCat list, choose the usage type for which you want to view analysis information. Usage types are defined for a subscriber type, and consist of a service type, quality, and environments. Usage types are displayed in the SubCat list using the syntax of <short name> <first letter of the environment name>. In the example above, Voice is the short name and I indicates that the environment is Indoor. For more information on usage types, see Defining subscriber types for cdma2000 on page 323.
3 4 5
From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to view analysis information. Click in the Map window to display analysis information for each pixel in the CDMA Pixel Info dialog box. Click Close.
You can also access the CDMA Pixel Info tool by clicking the CDMA Pixel Info button on the Mobile Technology toolbar.
447
Analyzing pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors

Pilot pollution occurs when there is an excessive number of pilot signals with high power levels. Pilot pollution can create high levels of interference, resulting in dropped calls, poor voice quality, and poor data throughput. The Pilot Pollution Inspector enables you to identify polluting sectors at specific locations, modify the appropriate sector settings, and then view the effects of your changes. The level of pilot pollution is analyzed by comparing the powers of the pilot channels with the power of the best serving pilot channel, taking into account the active set (the set of pilots currently participating in the call) and the pilot pollution margin. Before you use the Pilot Pollution Inspector, you need to identify the areas that may be affected by pilot pollution. For example, you can generate a Rapid Planning or Monte Carlo analysis and examine the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io layer. You can also use drive test data or network data to identify potential problem areas. When you click a location in a Map window, the Pilot Pollution Inspector analyzes the location for pilot pollution based on specific carrier, forward loading, and subscriber settings. You can use settings from a network analysis or define these settings in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box. For a specified location, the Pilot Pollution Inspector displays the following information in a graph window:

Best serving sector soft handoff sectors polluting sectors (if any)
Horizontal lines in the graph window indicate the threshold levels for the best serving, handoff, and polluting sectors. You can define the number of polluting sectors that are displayed in the graph window, as well as the colors and pilot value (Ec/Io or Ec) used for the display. Additional location and sector information is displayed in the Analysis Info section (see Figure 19.1).
448
Threshold levels Graph display of analyzed sectors
Location and analysis information
Figure 19.1 Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box
In the Mentum Planet Map window, lines are drawn from the specified analysis location to each of the corresponding sectors: Best Server, Handoff, Pilot Polluter, and Pilot Detected (see Figure 19.2). The color of the lines corresponds to the colors used in the graph window of the Pilot Pollution Inspector.
449
Figure 19.2 Map window displaying the Pilot - Delta Ec/Io analysis layer. For the specified location, the Pilot Pollution Inspector adds lines indicating the best serving sector (green), handoff sectors (yellow), and polluting sectors (red).
After you have identified the polluting sectors, you can leave the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box open, use the Site Properties dialog box to change the antenna downtilt, azimuth, or height for the polluting sectors, and then update the display in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box to see the effects of your changes.
Workflow for analyzing pilot pollution

Minimizing pilot pollution is an iterative process; you may need to repeat the steps in the workflow to achieve the desired results. The workflow outlined in this section shows the typical order of steps only. Depending on your work practices, you may not complete the steps in the same order.
Step 1
Generate a Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis or use drive test data to identify potential polluters. See Generating a rapid planning analysis for cdma2000 on page 395 or Generating a Monte Carlo analysis for cdma2000 on page 435. Use the Pilot Pollution Inspector to identify polluters.
Step 2
450
Modify the configuration of polluter sectors. See Editing sites and sectors on page 355. Regenerate predictions for the modified sectors. See Chapter 8, Generating Predictions, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Use the Pilot Pollution Inspector to verify the improvements. Generate an additional Rapid Planning/Monte Carlo analysis to evaluate the overall impact of the sector configuration changes.
To analyze pilot pollution for cdma2000 sectors

1 Do one of the following to open the Pilot Pollution Inspector:
In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, right-click an analysis and choose Pilot Pollution Inspector. On the Mobile Technology toolbar, click the Pilot Pollution Inspector button, click an area in the Map window, then in the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the group of sectors that you want to include in the analysis and click Continue.
The Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box opens. If you open the Pilot Pollution Inspector from an analysis node in the Project Explorer, the sector, subscriber, carrier, and loading information from the analysis is used. You can use the settings from the analysis or edit them as required, as outlined in this procedure. 2 On the System tab, from the Carrier list, choose the carrier that you want to analyze. If you opened the Pilot Pollution Inspector from an analysis node, the first carrier included in the analysis is chosen by default. 3 In the Forward Loading section, choose one of the following options to define the forward loading that will be used for the analysis:
Use the Loading Defined in the Sector Settingsuses the Forward Total Traffic Power value specified on the Implementation panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. For more information, see Defining cdma2000 sector settings on page 343. Use Global Loadingtype a value to define the percentage of the total PA power that will be used for the analysis. This value
451
will override the total traffic power defined for individual sectors.
Use Loading From Analysischoose an analysis from the list. The forward loading values from the analysis will be used.
4 5
Click the Subscribers tab. Choose one of the following options to define the subscriber type that will be used for the pilot pollution analysis:
Subscriber Typechoose a predefined subscriber type from the list. Nominal Subscribertype values for each of the following:
6 7 8
Antenna Gainthe antenna gain for the mobile equipment band type used by the nominal subscriber Maximum Active Serversthe maximum number of handoff servers supported by the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber Noise Figurethe noise figure at the receiver for the equipment type used by the nominal subscriber From the Environment list, choose the type of environment that will be used for the analysis.

Click the Analysis Settings tab. In the Maximum Polluters box, type the number of polluting sectors that you want displayed in the Pilot Pollution Inspector graph window and the Map window. From the Pilot Value list, choose the value that you want to use for the display in the graph window.
10 If you want to change the colors used in the graph window, in the Legend Profile section, do any of the following:
To edit the current color settings, click Edit, define the colors for the sector categories, and then click OK. To load an existing legend color profile, click Load, choose a Pilot Inspector color (.pic) file, and then click Open. To save the current legend color profile, click Save, type a name in the File Name box, and then click Save.
452
11 Click on a location in the Map window that you have identified as being affected by pilot pollution. The Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box displays pilot pollution information for the location. 12 If you want to save a report containing information for the location currently displayed in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box, click Export Report, type a name in the File Name box, and then click Save. The location and pollution information is saved in a Microsoft Excel file.
After you have clicked an area in the Map window, you can modify any of the System, Subscriber, or Analysis Settings and then click Update to refresh the information displayed in the Pilot Pollution Inspector dialog box based on the new settings.
453
454
20.
Chapter 20: Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers
Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers

This chapter describes Evolution - Data Only (EVDO) analysis layers, and explains how to generate them. If you have purchased an EV-DO license, you can generate EV-DO analysis layers.
Understanding EV-DO analysis layers Workflow for generating EVDO analysis layers
455
Understanding EV-DO analysis layers

EV-DO is a high-speed, data-only extension to cdma2000. EV-DO can be used in conjunction with 1xRTT and IS-95 carriers. To generate EV-DO analysis layers, you need to assign the EV-DO standard to at least one cdma2000 carrier (see To define carrier settings for cdma2000 on page 286) and assign that carrier to sectors in your project (see To assign carriers to sectors on page 347). You must also define EV-DO reverse link bearers. The Service Data Rate of EV-DO reverse link bearers must match the uplink and downlink data rates of the associated Qualities. For information on configuring EV-DO reverse link bearers, see To define EVDO bearers on page 307. EV-DO analysis layers include only sectors that are assigned EV-DO carriers, and consist of standard cdma2000 analysis layers and layers that are specific to EV-DO. For more information, see EV-DO analysis layers on page 460 and cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409. For information on configuring and generating network analyses, see Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379 and Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399.
If the EV-DO reverse link bearers and the associated Subscriber Manager settings are not configured correctly, then the analysis will be attempted on 1xRTT carriers (if available).
Forward link analysis

On the EV-DO forward link, the pilot signal and other control signals are transmitted at fixed intervals on each time slot. The remaining time on the time slot is dedicated to traffic data. At any given time, only one user is served by an EV-DO carrier. There is no power control applied to the forward link, which means that all base stations transmit at full power. However, the transmission rate is adapted to the fading channel environment in order to maintain a constant packet error rate (PER). The mobile continuously monitors the quality of received pilot signals from all sectors in its active set, predicts the signal-to-interferenceand-noise ratio (SINR) over the next packet period based on the current channel condition, and reports the current best serving sector and the highest data rate that it can achieve for a given PER. The serving sector transmits at the data rate chosen by the mobile.
456
Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers CDMA User Guide
The forward link analysis:
predicts forward Ec/Nt and the highest achievable data for each bin plots the forward coverage for each data rate computes the average aggregate forward throughput for each sector
Table 20.1 lists the data rates that are available on the forward link for Rev. 0.
Table 20.1 Forward link data rates for Rev. 0 Data rate (Kbps) 38.4 76.8 153.6 307.2 614.4 307.2 614.4 1228.8 921.6 1843.2 1228.8 2457.6 Slots 16 8 4 2 1 4 2 1 2 1 2 1 Ec/Nt (dB) -12.50 -9.50 -6.50 -4.00 -1.00 -4.00 -1.00 3.00 1.30 7.20 3.00 9.50
Table 20.2 lists the data rates that are available on the forward link for Rev. A.
Table 20.2 Forward link data rates for Rev. A Data rate (Kbps) 4.8 9.6 19.2 38.4 76.8 Slots 16 8 4 2 1 Ec/Nt (dB) -21.50 -18.50 -15.50 -12.50 -9.50
457
Chapter 20 CDMA User Guide Table 20.2 Forward link data rates for Rev. A (continued) Data rate (Kbps) 9.6 19.2 38.4 76.8 153.6 19.2 38.4 76.8 153.6 307.2 38.4 76.8 153.6 307.2 614.4 307.2 614.4 1228.8 921.6 1843.2 1228.8 2457.6 1536.0 3072.0 Slots 16 8 4 2 1 16 8 4 2 1 16 8 4 2 1 4 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 Ec/Nt (dB) -18.50 -15.50 -12.50 -9.50 -6.50 -15.50 -12.50 -9.50 -6.50 -4.00 -12.50 -9.50 -6.50 -4.00 -1.00 -4.00 -1.00 3.00 1.30 7.20 3.00 9.50 3.50 10.00
458
Reverse link analysis

The reverse link of EV-DO carriers is similar to the reverse link of 1xRTT carriers. Unlike the EV-DO forward link, which is time-shared with each active user, the EV-DO reverse link is code-shared with embedded pilot pulses for coherent detection. Power control, data rate schemes, and soft handoff capabilities are similar to 1xRTT carriers. However, unlike 1xRTT carriers, the EV-DO reverse link does not have fundamental and supplemental channels, and the reverse link data rate is dynamically controlled by the base station based on sector loading. The access terminal (AT) initiates its transmission data rate at 9.6 kbps and may incrementally increase or decrease its data rate after every 26.67 ms frame, following a transition probability based on the Reverse Activity Bit (RAB) set by the base station. The data rate selected by the AT is reported to the base station via a data rate control (DRC) channel. The 1xEV-DO reverse link data rate is indicated by a reverse rate indicator (RRI) channel on the reverse link that is used to inform the base station of the rate at which the AT is transmitting.
The Acknowledgement (Ack) channels are not modeled in Mentum Planet because of their low interference and power consumption relative to other channels.
The available data rates, shown in Table 20.3, are determined by the EV-DO revision (Rev. 0 or Rev. A), which you define when you create a 1xEV-DO Bearer. For more information, see To define EV-DO bearers on page 307.
Table 20.3 Reverse link data rates for 16 slots Revision Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. 0 Rev. A Rev. A Service Data Rate (Kbps) 9.6 19.2 38.4 76.8 153.6 4.8 9.6 Code rate (Turbo) 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/5 1/5 Channel Data Rate (kbps) 38.4 76.8 153.6 307.2 307.2 24.0 48.0
459
Chapter 20 CDMA User Guide Table 20.3 Reverse link data rates for 16 slots (continued) Revision Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Rev. A Service Data Rate (Kbps) 19.2 28.8 38.4 57.6 76.8 115.2 153.6 230.4 307.2 460.8 Code rate (Turbo) 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/5 1/3 Channel Data Rate (kbps) 96.0 144.0 192.0 288.0 384.0 576.0 768.0 1152.76 1536.0 1382.4
EV-DO analysis layers

When you generate an EV-DO analysis, you can create all of the standard cdma2000 analysis layers. You can also generate the EV-DO analysis layers
460
listed in Table 20.4. For more information on the standard cdma2000 analysis layers, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409.
Table 20.4 EV-DO analysis layers Layer Description
EV DO - Forward Max Achievable Data Rate Displays the predicted highest achievable forward link data rate per bin. The data rate prediction is based on the predicted Ec/Nt and the fade margin that is required to ensure a certain level of coverage probability. Both the pilot Ec/Nt (i.e., the predicted pilot channel Ec/Nt) and the forward Ec/Nt (i.e., the forward traffic channel Ec/Nt) are calculated at each bin. Forward Max Achievable Data Rate is generated using the predicted forward Ec/Nt. The amount of fade margin required depends on the coverage probability requirement and the slow fading standard deviation assumptions. When predicting the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate, the required fade margin is computed at each bin, and then a coverage probability is calculated for each data rate according the required Ec/Nt threshold, predicted Ec/Nt and the fade margin. For each bin, the data rates with coverage probabilities lower than the required threshold are considered as having no coverage in the bin. There may be more than one data rate for which the coverage probabilities are above the coverage probability requirement. In this case, the highest data rate is considered as the Forward Max Achievable Data Rate for the bin.
461
Chapter 20 CDMA User Guide Table 20.4 EV-DO analysis layers (continued) Layer Description
EV DO - Forward Ec/Nt Displays the ratio of forward channel chip energy to total spectral noise density for each bin. The mobile predicts the highest achievable data rate based on its Ec/Nt measurement on the pilot channel. However, the effective data transmission rate can be somewhat higher than the predicted data rate due to the idle slot transmission and early termination of multi-slot transmission. The idle slot transmissions reduce the interference in the network, and therefore increase the forward traffic channel Ec/Nt and the probability of earlier termination of multi-slot transmission. You can account for the transmission of idle slots through the use of the forward activity factor (FAF) and idle transmission attenuation (ITA) parameters. Setting the FAF to a value that is less than 100% and the ITA to a value greater than 0 has the effect of reducing the sector traffic transmit power and the interference from the sector to other sectors. The power from a given sector is calculated as (PA Power * forward activity factor) + ((100 - forward activity factor)*(PA Power-idle transmission attenuation)). Regardless of the FAF and ITA settings, the Ec value is calculated based on the full PA power. For rapid planning analysis, when the FAF value is set to 100%, the given sector is assumed to transmit at full power all the time. In a Monte Carlo simulation, the FAF is a calculated value. If the ITA value is set to 0 for a given sector then Mentum Planet will not reduce the power level and thus assume that that sector is transmitting at full power 100% of the time. This configuration produces an Ec/Nt that is equivalent to that which is measured on the pilot channel. EV-DO - Pilot Ec/Nt Displays the pilot Ec/Nt at each bin based on the power limits defined in the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box . Fade margins are not taken into account. It is assumed that sectors are synchronized to transmit Pilot chips with full power at the same time. As a result, unlike the forward Ec/Nt, the forward activity factor (FAF) is not taken into account when computing the forward Ec/Nt at each bin. EV DO - Forward Coverage At <data_rate> Displays a coverage map for each EV-DO data rate (see the Data Rate column in Table 20.1). By default, this layer is generated using the predicted forward Ec/Nt.
462
Generating EV-DO Analysis Layers CDMA User Guide Table 20.4 EV-DO analysis layers (continued) Layer Description
EV-DO - Forward Cell Throughput (Monte Carlo analyses only) Displays the aggregate average cell throughput. The forward average throughput is calculated based on the forward pilot Ec/Io of each served subscriber. Because all subscribers share, in time, the same forward carrier, the average cell throughput for the reference scheduling scheme is based on the assumption that each subscriber is served on an equal time, round-robin basis. The Scheduler Gain curve, defined on the Implementation panel of the Sector Settings dialog box for EV-DO sectors, can be used to introduce a gain in cell throughput in comparison to the equal time round-robin scheduler, which is the reference scheduler scheme. The gain is a result of the throughput enhancement; at a cost to fairness in serving subscribers, of other Schedulers, such as the Proportional Fair scheduler, in the optimization of the timing, duration, and frequency when a subscriber is served; in other words, the difference in the way these schedulers trade-off throughput and fairness by taking advantage of multi-user diversity. If no Scheduler Gain curve is assigned, no gain is applied, resulting in a 100% value for gain, representing equal time, round-robin scheduling. Normally, the Proportional Fair scheduler would have a gain superior to equal time round-robin scheduling. The gain would increase from 100% for 1 subscriber to a peak of approximately 200% for 10 to 16 subscribers in an urban environment, because the former takes an increasing advantage of multi-user diversity (serving a subscriber primarily when the channel conditions are most favorable, referred to as upfade).
463
Workflow for generating EV-DO analysis layers

Step 1
Assign the EV-DO technology to at least one cdma2000 carrier and define EV-DO technology settings for the network. See To define carrier settings for cdma2000 on page 286 and To define EV-DO network settings for cdma2000 on page 287. If you are generating a Monte Carlo analysis, define EV-DO reverse bearers. See To define EV-DO bearers on page 307. Assign the band for the EV-DO carrier to at least one sector in your project, and define EV-DO settings for the sector. See To assign carriers to sectors on page 347 and Editing sites and sectors on page 355. Generate an analysis, ensuring that you choose the EV-DO carrier, and view the results. See Chapter 18: Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for cdma2000 on page 379 and Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399.
Step 2 Step 3
Step 4
464
21.
Chapter 21: Generating PN Offset Plans
Generating PN Offset Plans

This chapter explains how to use the PN Offset Planning tools to create, manage, and analyze PN offset plans. In a cdma2000 network, the forward link uses PN offset assignments to distinguish sectors. It is, therefore, important to carefully plan PN offsets in order to minimize interference. Using the PN Offset Plan Analysis tool, you can validate the PN offset plan you generate.
Understanding PN offset planning Preparing input data for PN offset planning Workflow for generating PN offset plans Creating PN offset plans Working with PN offset plans Analyzing PN offset plans Displaying PN offset reports Applying PN offset plans
465
Understanding PN offset planning

A PN offset is one of 512 codes used to differentiate sectors for communication with mobiles. The PN offset is combined with other data and transmitted on each of the forward channels. If the same PN sequence is offset by more than one chip, the original PN sequence and the time-shifted PN sequence are almost non-correlated to each other. Therefore, every sector can use the same PN sequence as long as the assigned values are time offset from each other by a predetermined separation (PN increment). If these PN codes are not assigned properly, interference can occur because the propagation delay may set back the time offset between PN codes and cause confusion at the mobiles. The resulting interference is more harmful compared to other types of interference in a cdma2000 network, especially when it affects the active pilot. When the active pilot is affected, the false pilot (i.e., interference) is treated like the serving pilot and it is despread by a correlator. Ultimately, the interference signal becomes very strong after despreading due to the processing gain. The PN Offset Planning tool can be used to assign PN offsets to sectors correctly and minimize co-PN and adjacent-PN confusion. It can also be used to determine the optimal PN increment value based on factors such as predicted signal strength, search window size, estimated cell radius, and propagation path loss.
How PN codes are assigned in Mentum Planet

In Mentum Planet, you can use one of two methods to plan PN offsets:

individual PN offset planning group PN offset planning
466
Generating PN Offset Plans CDMA User Guide
Using the group planning method, you can assign PN offset values to adjacent sectors as shown in Figure 21.1.
Figure 21.1 PN codes with a PN increment of three assigned to adjacent sectors
With this method, PN offsets are assigned in groups of three (i.e., for a specific pilot increment, the available PN offsets are organized into PN groups containing three consecutive PN offsets). PN offset values will be assigned to adjacent sectors as three consecutive PN offsets. Therefore, a three-sector site uses one PN offset group and a six-sector site uses two PN offset groups. The PN Offset Planning tool uses a variety of input data from your project, including the search window sizes from the Sector Settings dialog box, a neighbor list, and, optionally, an interference matrix. The search window size is an important element of PN offset planning because PN confusion interference occurs when a propagation delay causes a remote false pilot signal to fall into the mobiles active search window. When assigning co-PN offsets, the PN offset planning algorithm ensures that a sufficient propagation delay difference exists between two co-PNs. Therefore, in the case of adjacent PN offsets, the algorithm ensures that a propagation delay will not cause a remote PN offset to fall into the mobiles active search window. For more information on the search window parameters (i.e., SRCH_WIN_A and SRCH_WIN_N), see the online Help.
467
The PN Offset Plan Analysis tool can be used to evaluate the quality of PN offset plans by identifying the locations where co-PN and adjacent-PN interference may occur.
If the PN offset analysis reveals that no PN offset was allocated to a sector, it could be because the sector has no coverage. This situation can also arise when the neighbor list used to plan PN offsets is incomplete or incorrect.
Preparing input data for PN offset planning

You create a PN offset plan using a group of sites. Because PN offset planning is a complex process and requires input from several other Mentum Planet tools, it is recommended that you create a group of sites to be used across all tools. This will ensure that your output is consistent and valid. For more information on creating groups of sites, see Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. The following sections explain how to prepare data for PN offset planning.
Neighbor list
A neighbor list is a required input for PN offset planning. To obtain the most accurate results, it is recommended that you import a neighbor list from switch data. However, the neighbor list can also be created from a modeled interference matrix. For more information on neighbor lists, see Chapter 12, Working with Neighbor Lists, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Interference matrix
A modeled interference matrix is an optional input to the PN offset planning tool; however, using an interference matrix will generate a more efficient plan. If you choose to include an interference matrix as input to the PN offset planning tool and you also use an interference matrix to create the neighbor list, the two interference matrices must cover the same sites. You can use a traffic map to create the modeled interference matrix for PN offset planning. For more information on interference matrices, see Chapter 11, Working with Interference Matrices, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
468
Workflow for generating PN offset plans

Step 1
Create a group of sites that you will use for your neighbor list and PN offset planning. See Chapter 2, Working with Sites and Sectors, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Generate predictions for the group of sites. For more information on generating predictions, see Chapter 8, Generating Predictions, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Create a neighbor list using the group of sites. See Chapter 12, Working with Neighbor Lists, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. If you are using an interference matrix, create a modeled interference matrix using the group of sites. See Chapter 11, Working with Interference Matrices, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Set the search window sizes for the active and neighboring sets of sectors. See To define implementation settings on page 351. Define PN offset settings, generate a PN offset plan and if required, produce a PN offset report. See Creating PN offset plans on page 469 and Displaying PN offset reports on page 480. Analyze the PN offset plan for potential co-PN and adjacent-PN interference. See Analyzing PN offset plans on page 477. Apply the plan to the sectors in the group. See Applying PN offset plans on page 481.
Step 2
Step 3 Step 4
Step 5 Step 6
Step 7 Step 8
Creating PN offset plans

There are two methods of creating PN offset plans:
using sector settingscreates a plan by saving all current PN offset assignments. This is useful if you want to save the current assignments for comparison or to reuse later. using the PN Offset Planning toolcreates a plan by generating PN offsets for all sectors in the group, or only for the sectors that do not already have PN offsets assigned. If the PN Offset box on the Implementation panel in the Sector Settings dialog box is
469
blank, a sector has no PN offset assigned. When you generate a PN offset plan using the PN Offset Planning tool, PN offsets are assigned to sectors in a way that minimizes co-PN and adjacentPN interference. You can create multiple PN offset plans and analyze them without committing the associated assignments to the sectors in the project.
If you want to globally edit all sectors so that no PN offsets are assigned, in the cdma2000 Global Edit dialog box, in the Cell Equipment Parameters section, expand the Implementation node and type -1 in the PN Offset box.
To create a PN offset plan using current sector settings

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click PN Offset Plans and choose New Save Current. In the Save Plan As dialog box, do the following:

In the Plan Name box, type a name for the new plan. From the Group list, choose the sector group for which you want to create a PN offset plan. From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to create a PN offset plan.
Click OK. The new plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.
To create a PN offset plan using the PN Offset Planning tool

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click PN Offset Plans and choose New Modeled. In the Select Sectors dialog box, choose the sectors for which you want to create a PN offset plan and click Continue.
470
3 4 5
In the PN Offset Planning Tool dialog box, under the General node, in the Plan Name box, type a name for the PN offset plan. From the Carrier list, choose the carrier for which you want to generate the PN offset plan. From the Keep Existing PN Offsets list, choose one of the following options:
Truepreserves PN offsets that are already assigned to any of the selected sectors Falseassigns new PN offset values to all of the selected sectors
From the Neighbor List list, choose a neighbor list. If no neighbor lists are available, you must create one (see Neighbor list on page 468).
471
Under the Pilot Increment node, do one of the following:
To have the PN Offset Planning tool calculate an increment value automatically, choose True from the Calculate Optimal Value list. To define the amount of separation between PN offset values manually, in the Use Specified Value box, type the value that will be used to increment the PN offset value before it is assigned to one of the selected sectors. The value that you specify corresponds to one 64-chip sequence (i.e., a PN offset of 1 is equal to 64 chips). Typical values for this box are 3, 4, or 6, and specifying any of these reduces the number of available PN codes (e.g., a value of 1 means 512 PN codes are available to allocate to sectors; a value of 3 reduces the available number of codes to 170; a value of 4 further reduces the number to 128 codes; and so on).
If you want to use an interference matrix when generating the plan, under the Interference Matrix node, choose True from the Use Interference Matrix list, and then from the Interference Matrix list, choose a modeled interference matrix. From the PN Allocation Goal list, choose one of the following:
Minimizeallocates the smallest number of available PN offsets. This option results in more co-PN sites and leaves more of the available PN offsets unused for the future. Maximizeallocates the largest number of available PN offsets. This option results in fewer co-PN sites and leaves fewer of the available PN offsets unused for the future. Sequentialallocates PN offsets to the sectors sequentially. PN offsets are assigned starting from 0 (or if a PN offset has been retained, the next value) in ascending order. Truegroup planning is used in the PN offset planning process. In group planning, PN offsets are assigned in groups of three (i.e., for a specific pilot increment, the available PN offsets are organized into PN groups containing three consecutive PN offsets). Click the Browse (...) button in the Reserved PN Offset box to open the Group Reservation Editor dialog box. PN offset values will be assigned to adjacent sectors as three consecutive PN offsets. PN offsets are assigned starting from the north-most
10 From the Group Planning list, choose one of the following options:
472
sector and then clockwise to the other sectors. With a four or five-sector site, sectors 1, 2, and 3 will use one PN group and the remaining sectors will use the next available group. With a sixsector site, two PN offset groups will be used.
Falsegroup planning is not considered in the PN offset planning process. Click the Browse (...) button in the Reserved PN Offset box to open the PN Offset Reservation Editor dialog box.
11 If you are using group planning, in the Group Reservation Editor, do any of the following and click OK:

to exclude the PN offset 0, enable the Reserve 0 check box. to exclude specific PN offset groups, enable the check box next to the group. The group is now labeled as Reserved and highlighted in gray.
12 If you are not using group planning but want to reserve PN offset values for future deployment, in the PN Offset Reservation Editor, enable the check box next to the PN Offset values you want to exclude and click OK. In a cdma2000 network, mobiles scan for pilots having valid PN codes. Valid PN codes are multiples of the pilot increment value. For example, if the pilot increment value is 3, the valid PN codes are incremented by 3 up to 510 (i.e., 0, 3, 6, 9,..., 507, and 510). However, the amount of separation between the first and last PN codes may not meet the pilot increment requirement (0 and 510 are separated by 2, not 510). To prevent this situation, it is recommended that you leave PN code 0 reserved when generating a plan. 13 Under the Advanced node, from the Propagation Path Loss Exponent list, do one of the following:
Choose a predefined morphology type for the area. Predefined types correspond to the general morphology types and have values that range between 3 and 4. Choose User Defined and type an exponent value from 2 to 10 in the Propagation Path Loss Exponent Value box.
Morphology types describe the physical environment and reflect the number of obstructions relative to no obstructions in a given area (for example, an exponent value of 3 indicates open space).
473
14 Under the Thresholds node, in the Interference Detection Threshold box, type the threshold for determining whether a distant pilot signal will be seen as interfering with the serving pilot signal. If the difference in signal strength between the serving and distant pilot signals is greater than the specified threshold, the distant pilot signal is not considered to cause interference because the separation is great enough. 15 If you chose an interference matrix from the Interference Matrix list under the General: Interference Matrix node and want to prevent certain sectors from being labeled interferers, under the Non-Interferer Thresholds node, do the following:
in the Percentage Affected Area box, type a value from 0 to 10 to indicate the percentage of affected area that may be tolerated. If the affected area is below this threshold, the sector is not considered to be interfering with the serving pilot. in the Percentage Affected Traffic box, type a value from 0 to 10 to indicate the percentage of affected traffic that may be tolerated. If the affected traffic is below this threshold, the sector is not considered to be interfering with the serving pilot. If the interference matrix was not based on a traffic map, this parameter is ignored.
These settings enable you to allow sectors that would normally be considered interferers to have co-PN assignments. For example, two sectors may have co-PN assignments if the sectors have a hill between them (i.e., any interference would be so small that it would not be considered a problem). 16 Expand the Cell Radius node and, in the Active Server Threshold box, type the minimum signal strength required for a sector to be considered as a active server (i.e., a server that serves users as the best server, the second best server, or the third best server). A sectors cell radius is estimated based on its active area (i.e., the area where the sector is an active server) for the purpose of PN offset planning. The active server threshold is based on total transmitted power, not pilot signal strength. When the PN offset planning tool calculates the coverage area based on signal strength, any bin having a received signal strength below the specified threshold is ignored. If the signal is stronger than the threshold, coverage is assumed.
474
17 Click Generate. The Generate Plan dialog box displays the status of the operation. 18 When the operation completes, click Close. The new PN offset plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.
When you reserve a PN offset value and this value is part of a PN Offset group, the entire group is considered reserved and will be excluded from the PN offset group planning process. You can clear the check box to make the entire group available.
Working with PN offset plans

After you create a PN offset plan, you can edit it and, if required, regenerate it. You can display a PN offset index and if required, edit the associated PN offset assignments directly. If you have an existing PN offset plan, you can add the plan to the project.
To view or edit the properties of a plan

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click a PN offset plan and choose Properties. In the PN Offset Plan Properties dialog box, view or edit the properties for generating the PN offset plan. For more information about the properties, press the F1 key. 3 If you edited any of the settings, click Update, and when the operation completes, click Close.
To copy a PN offset plan

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that you want to copy and choose Save Copy As. In the Save Plan As dialog box, in the Plan Name box, type a name for the new plan and click OK. The new plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.
475
To delete a PN offset plan

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that you want to delete and choose Delete. In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes. The PN offset plan is removed from the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer and the PN offset plan files are deleted.
To display PN offset assignments in the Map window
In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that you want to display and choose View. The PN offset assignments in the selected PN offset plan are displayed as labels in the Map window.
To turn the labels off, in the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that is on display and choose View.
To edit the PN offset assignments in a plan

1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that contains the PN offset assignments that you want to edit and choose Edit. In the PN Offset Plan Editing dialog box, modify the PN offset assignments in the PN Offset column as required and click OK.
To add a PN offset plan to a project

1 2 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click PN Offset Plans and choose Add. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the PN offset plan that you want to add and click Open. The PN offset plan is added to the PN Offset Plans node of the RF Tools category in the Project Explorer.
476
To export PN offset assignments

You can export the PN offset assignments from a plan to a comma-separated value (.csv) file. 1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that contains the PN offset assignments that you want to export and choose Export. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to store the file, type a name for the file in the File Name box and click Save.
Analyzing PN offset plans

The PN Offset Plan Analysis tool enables you to evaluate the quality of PN offset plans by identifying the locations where co-PN and adjacent-PN interference may occur. For example, you could use the PN Offset Planning tool to generate a number of different plans, and then use the PN Offset Plan Analysis tool to evaluate the quality of the different plans before you apply a plan to the sectors in your project. For information on generating PN offset plans, see Creating PN offset plans on page 469. You can generate any of the following analysis layers as part of a PN offset analysis:
Interference Typedisplays the type of interference, which can be any of the following: Co-PN interference Adjacent-PN interference Co- and Adjacent-PN interference No interference Worst Adjacent-PN Interfererdisplays the worst Adjacent-PN interferer for a given location.

477
Adjacent-PN - Delta Pilot Signal Strengthdisplays the difference in pilot signal strength between the best serving sector and the worst adjacent-PN interferer. Worst Co-PN Interfererdisplays the worst co-PN interferer for a given location. Co-PN - Delta Pilot Signal Strengthdisplays the difference in pilot signal strength between the best serving sector and the worst co-PN interferer.
The Worst Adjacent-PN Interferer and Worst Co-PN Interferer layers do not indicate the victim. The victim is the best serving sector and can be determined from the Best Server analysis layer. For more information on analysis layers, see cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409. This information is also contained in the PN offset plan analysis report. See To display a PN offset plan analysis report on page 480.
To analyze a PN offset plan

1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that you want to analyze and choose Analyze Plan. The PN Offset Plan Analysis dialog box opens.
478
In the Interference Detection Threshold box, type the value for determining whether a distant pilot signal will be seen as interfering with the serving pilot signal. If the PN offset plan was created using Mentum Planet, the default is the value that was used to create the plan. If the difference between the serving pilot signal strength and the distant pilot signal strength is greater than this threshold, the distant pilot is not considered
In the Output Layers section, enable the check box beside each of the PN offset analysis layers that you want to generate. You must choose at least one analysis layer. In the Resolution section, enable one of the following options to define the analysis resolution:
Elevation File Resolutionuses the same resolution as the digital elevation model (DEM) and signal strength prediction files. User Definedchoose a resolution from the list. The available resolutions are multiples of the DEM resolution. Using a lower resolution will decrease the accuracy of the PN offset plan analysis, but will speed up the analysis process.
In the Analysis Area section, choose one of the following options to define the area that will be used for the analysis:

Automaticthe total combined prediction area. Current Windowthe area displayed within the current Map window. User Defined Areaa predefined area grid. For information on creating area grid files, see Chapter 14, Working With Grids, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Click OK. The PN Offset Plan Conflict Analysis dialog box displays the progress of the analysis. Path loss or signal strength files will be updated automatically if required.
When the PN offset plan analysis is complete, click OK in the Mentum Planet dialog box. The analysis layers are displayed in the Project Explorer under the PN offset plan node you chose in Step 1.
479
To view PN offset plan analysis layers in a Map window
In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, under the PN Offset Plans node, expand a PN offset plan for which you have generated an analysis, right-click an analysis layer, and choose View. The analysis layer is displayed in the Map window.
To remove an analysis layer from the Map window, in the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, under the PN Offset Plans node, right-click an analysis layer, and choose Remove.
To display a PN offset plan analysis report
In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan for which you want to view the PN offset analysis report and choose Display Analysis Report. The PN offset analysis report is displayed in your default text editor. The report lists the settings used to create the PN offset plan, the PN offset usage, and the affected sectors.
You can calculate layer statistics for PN offset plan analysis layers by right-clicking a PN offset plan analysis layer and choosing Statistics. For more information on calculating layer statistics, see Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers on page 505.
Displaying PN offset reports

After you generate or update a PN offset plan, you can display the following information in a report (.txt) file:

the current PN offset plan settings the total number of available, reserved, allocated, and unused PN offset values the estimated average cell radius of the sites included in the PN offset plan the number of sectors having PN offset assignments and the PN offset values assigned to each sector
480
The Notes column of the PN offset report indicates whether a sector is interfered or not allocated based on the current PN assignments. While the algorithm in Mentum Planet always attempts to assign PN offsets in such a way as to minimize potential interference, in some cases the PN offset plan settings defined cannot be met using the available PN offsets. In this case, the algorithm will assign the PN offset value that will create the minimum amount of interference. If the Notes column indicates:
Interferedthere is potential co-PN or adj-PN interference at the sector based on the current PN assignments. Not allocated, conflicting neighborsthere is a conflict contained in the neighbor list Not allocated, invalid radiusthere is no coverage at the sector.
If there are many interferers flagged in the Notes column, the criteria defined in the PN Offset Plan dialog box may be too stringent (e.g., if the minimum signal strength is set too low, the radius of the cells active area may be overestimated).
To display a PN offset report
In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan for which you want a report and click Display Report. The report is displayed in your default text editor.
Applying PN offset plans

Once you have created a PN offset plan and analyzed it for potential co-PN and adjacent-PN interference, you can apply it to the sectors in your project.
Before you apply a plan, if the sectors contain PN offset assignments that you want to save, you can create a PN offset plan using the PN offset assignments from the sectors (see To create a PN offset plan using current sector settings on page 470).
481
To apply a PN offset plan to a project

1 In the Project Explorer, in the RF Tools category, right-click the PN offset plan that you want to apply and do one of the following:
To apply the plan to the carrier for which the plan was generated, choose Apply Apply to Default Carrier. To apply the plan to all carriers, choose Apply Apply to All Carriers.
In the confirmation dialog box, click Yes. The PN offset assignments in the plan are applied to the sectors in your project.
482
22.
Chapter 22: Generating cdma2000 Reports
Generating cdma2000 Reports

This chapter describes how to design and generate reports about data in your cdma2000 network.
Understanding cdma2000 reports Predefined report designs Workflow for generating cdma2000 reports Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design Designing a cdma2000 report Generating a cdma2000 report Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers
483
Understanding cdma2000 reports

A report is a table of data in HTML or Excel format that provides information about your network. You can design, preview, save, and generate reports. You can include the following types of data in a report:
general dataapplies to all technologies enabled in your network. You can include the following types of general data in your report: cell equipment datadata about the sectors in the project (you can choose W-CDMA, cdma2000, or TDMA/ FDMA) antenna data subscriber data data generated using the layer statistics tool W-CDMA-specific dataapplies only to W-CDMA. You can include the following types of W-CDMA-specific data in your report:

Monte Carlo simulation data W-CDMA analysis layer statistic data cdma2000-specific dataapplies only to cdma2000. You can include the following types of cdma2000-specific data in your report:

Monte Carlo simulation data cdma2000 analysis layer statistic data You can design and generate a report or you can generate a report using one of the predefined report designs provided with Mentum Planet. For details on predefined report designs, see Predefined report designs on page 486.
When you design a report, you define the types of data to include, and then choose the specific items within each type to include. The following sections provide details about the types of cdma2000-specific data available for reports.
cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data

The Monte Carlo simulation data available for reports is divided into four categories:
Carrier-sectorthe types of power received by the carriers and sectors listed in the report, for example, total power, in-cell
484
Generating cdma2000 Reports CDMA User Guide
power, pilot power, traffic channel powers, and other channel powers
Carrier-sector-mobiledata on a carrier-sector basis about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handoff state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits System-mobilesystem-level data about the Monte Carlo simulation for selected subscriber types, for example, total number of users, number of users not served, number of users in each handoff state, and number of users blocked due to power amplifier (PA), user, channel element, user, cell radius, speed, throughput and code limits Throughputprimary and secondary forward link and primary reverse link throughput data for sectors, carriers, and subscriber types
The data for each category is based on the average of the operating points generated during the Monte Carlo simulation. For overview information on operating points, see Generating operating points and subscriber information on page 401. For details on each operating point, see Appendix F: cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format on page 547.
Using more than one type of data in a report
You can create a report using one or more types of data. If you choose to use more than one type, you may need to specify how you want the information to be related by choosing a key column for both the parent and the child table. In general, this is handled automatically for reports with similar data, but for some combinations, you will need to specify the relationship. For a row in the child table to reference a row in the parent table, the chosen key columns for both tables must contain matching data values. If they do not, the rows are omitted from the resulting report. For example, if you add carrier-sector-mobile data to carrier-sector data, and you choose Site Id as the key column for both tables, then the resulting table contains a row for each Site Id that exists in both tables.
485
cdma2000 analysis layer data

After you generate cdma2000 analysis layers, you can calculate statistics for an analysis layer using information from a clutter grid file, a traffic map, or a user-defined filter. The statistics generated include the analysis area and a percentage value, and any additional columns created by the applied traffic map, clutter, or filter. For more information, see Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers on page 505.
Using report data to help in cdma2000 network analysis

You can use the data in a report to help you interpret and adjust the factors influencing coverage and performance in your cdma2000 network. In a typical cdma2000 analysis, you would generate a report using data from an initial Monte Carlo simulation for additional information about the analysis. If you determine that the simulation requires more runs, you can append more runs to the simulation and generate another report to view the results.
Predefined report designs

A set of predefined report designs is provided for you to use to generate reports quickly and easily. Each predefined report design comprises two files:
a .wrp file, which identifies the columns included in the report. These files are stored in the Reports\CDMA folder in your project. an Excel template file, which formats the information. These files are stored in the Reports\exceltemplates folder in your project.
The Excel files contain macros that create appropriate column names and provide other functions, for example, the carrier-sector report contains a macro that converts values from mW to dBm for easier interpretation and comparison. You can view the raw data for any report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the Excel report. The following sections describe the predefined report designs.
System-mobile-simple report
This report provides a row for users served for each subscriber type and environment combination. Columns are color coded. Dark blue indicates general information, such as site and sector ID. Purple indicates served users.
486
Light blue indicates users that are not served. Figure 22.1 shows a portion of an example system-mobile-simple report.
Figure 22.1 Example system-mobile-simple report
Carrier-sector-mobile report
This report shows users served on a per-sector basis. This report uses the same color scheme as the system-mobile-simple report.
Carrier-sector
This report provides a summary of the powers per sector for each site/sector/ subscriber type/environment combination.
System-mobile
This report provides a pivot table in Excel that enables you to click and drag items to create the set of columns that you want to view. It also provides pie charts for the available statistics.
Throughput
This report provides a row for throughput for each site/sector/subscriber type/ environment combination.
Columns in predefined reports

Table 22.1 describes the columns available for predefined reports and identifies the reports in which the column appears.
487
Chapter 22 CDMA User Guide Table 22.1 Columns in predefined reports System-mobile-simple Carrier-sector-mobile
Site Id Sector Id Site Sector Id Carrier Name Channel Name Subscriber Type Service Quality Environment Primary Forward Link Throughput Secondary Forward Link Throughput Primary Reverse Link Throughput Secondary Reverse Link Throughput Percentage of Maximum Forward Link Pooled Throughput Average Achieved Rate for Forward Link Primary Subscribers
Name of the site. Name of the sector. Combined site and sector name. Automatically assigned carrier name. User-defined carrier name. Name of the subscriber type. Name of the service. Name of the quality. Name of the environment. Forward Link throughput as primary. Forward Link throughput as secondary (handoff). Reverse Link throughput as primary. Reverse Link throughput as secondary (handoff). Forward link throughput as a percentage of the maximum downlink pooled throughput. Average achieved rate for Forward Link Primary Subscribers.
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
488
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Generating cdma2000 Reports CDMA User Guide Table 22.1 Columns in predefined reports (continued) System-mobile-simple Carrier-sector-mobile
Average Achieved Rate for Forward Link Secondary Subscribers Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Primary Subscribers Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Secondary Subscribers Scheduler Gain Forward Link Captured Subscriber Throughput
Average achieved rate for Forward Link Secondary Subscribers. Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Primary Subscribers. Average Achieved Rate for Reverse Link Secondary Subscribers. Scheduler Gain. The forward captured subscriber throughput is calculated by multiplying the number of served subscribers by the service data rate and by the packet call activity factor. Number of subscribers not served for any reason. Number of subscribers not served for any reason. Number of subscribers not in handoff. Number of subscribers in softer handoff. Number of subscribers in soft handoff. Number of subscribers in softer-soft handoff. Number of subscribers in soft-softer handoff. Number of subscribers in soft-soft handoff. Number of subscribers in softer-softer handoff. Number of subscribers in four-server handoff.
5 5 5 5 5
Not Served Dropped Not in Handoff Softer Handoff Soft Handoff Softer Soft Handoff Soft Softer Handoff Soft Soft Handoff Softer Softer Handoff 4 Way Handoff
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
489
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
5 Way Handoff 6 Way Handoff 7 Way Handoff Served Non-negotiated
Number of subscribers in five-server handoff. Number of subscribers in six-server handoff. Number of subscribers in seven-server handoff. Total number of subscribers who have been served. The number of users served where the Reverse Link is served at the highest available bearer rate, and Forward link is negotiated to a lower rate from the highest available. The number of users served where the Forward Link path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Reverse Link is at the highest available bearer rate. The number of users served where the Reverse Link path has been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate, but the Forward Link is at the highest available bearer rate. The number of users served where both the Reverse Link and Forward Link paths have been negotiated to a rate lower than that of the highest available bearer rate. Total number of subscribers who have been served by repeaters on the sector as primary. Number of subscribers in handoff where a repeater on this sector is the handoff server.
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5 5
Forward Link Negotiated
5 5
Reverse Link Negotiated
5 5
Negotiated
5 5
Served by Repeater Handoff with Repeater
5 5
490
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Mobile PA Limit
Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the forward link. Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors. A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the forward link. The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel element on the Reverse Link. The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call. Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the forward link. Number of subscribers on the forward link not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius. Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell. Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded.
5 5 5 5
5 5
Reverse Link Noise Rise
Forward Link Channel Element Limit
5 5
Reverse Link Channel Element Limit
5 5
User Limit
5 5
Cell Radius Limit
5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5
Speed Limit Throughput Limit
491
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Primary Dropped Due to Code Primary Dropped Due to PA Primary Dropped Due to Pilot Primary Dropped Due to Traffic Handoff Dropped Due to Forward Link CE Handoff Dropped Due to Reverse Link CE Handoff Dropped Due to Code Handoff Dropped Due to PA Handoff Dropped Due to Traffic Used Reverse Link Channel Elements Required Reverse Link Channel Elements
Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel codes at the best server. Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient PA power at the best server. Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient pilot Ec/Io from the best server. Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient voice power. Number of handoff connections refused during forward link analysis due to insufficient handoff channel elements. Number of handoff connections refused during Reverse Link analysis due to insufficient handoff channel elements. Number of handoff connections refused due to insufficient channel codes. Number of handoff connections refused during forward link analysis due to insufficient PA power. Number of handoff connections refused during forward link analysis due to insufficient voice power. Number of Reverse Link channel elements used. Number of Reverse Link channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements.
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
492
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Used Forward Link Channel Elements Required Forward Link Channel Elements
Number of Forward Link channel elements used. Number of Forward Link channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or pilot to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscribers target. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the forward link. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient pilot power on the forward link. The pilot power is caused by the maximum pilot power/ fixed pilot power being insufficient to meet the Ec/ Io target of the mobile. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power on the forward link to meet the subscribers Eb/No target. Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers. Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise.
5 5
Total Forward PA Limit
Forward Code Limit Pilot Power Limit
5 5
5 5
Traffic Power Limit
5 5
Prev Total Rcv Power_mW
Current Total Rcv Power_mW
493
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Pilot Power_mW Sync Power_mW Paging Power_mW Current Rcv Power_mW In Cell Power_mW Attenuated Power_mW Total Traffic Power per Run_mW Average Traffic Power per Subscriber_mW Max Traffic Power per Channel_mW Min Traffic Power per Channel_mW TrafficNoise Rise Total Noise Rise Rx Eb_No TrafficLoad
Output power of the pilot channel. Output power of the sync channel. Output power of the paging channel. Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise. Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation. In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor. Total power of all best server voice channels. This value includes the voice activity factor. Average power of a single voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor. Maximum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor. Minimum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the voice activity factor. Noise rise on the reverse link. Total noise rise on the reverse link. Eb/No on the reverse link. Sector load on the forward link.
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5
494
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Traffic Load_Percentage Load_Percentage Total Load Total Load_Percentage Frequency Re-use Efficiency Other Cell Interference Factor F-Factor Mean Required Receive Power Standard Dev Required Receive Power
Sector load on the forward link as a percentage. Reverse link load given as a percentage. Total sector load. Total sector load as a percentage. Frequency re-use efficiency given as a percentage, equal to: (in cell interference) / (total interference)*100 Other-cell interference factor (OCIF) given in a linear form, equal to: (other cell interference) / (own cell interference) F-factor given as a linear term, equal to: (own cell interference) / (total interference)
5 5 5 5
5 5 5 5
Mean value of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the reverse link.
Standard deviation of the required receive powers from all subscribers in the reverse link.
495
Throughput
Column name
Description
System-mobile
Carrier-sector
Workflow for generating cdma2000 reports

Step 1 Step 2
Generate a Monte Carlo simulation. See Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399. If you want to include cdma2000 analysis layer statistics in a report, do the following:
Generate cdma2000 analysis layers. See cdma2000 analysis layers on page 409. Generate statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers and add them to the Report Designer. See Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers on page 505.
Step 3
Optionally, design a report. See Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design on page 496 or Designing a cdma2000 report on page 497. Generate a report using a predefined report design or using the report design that you created. See Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design on page 496 or Generating a cdma2000 report on page 504.
Step 4
Generating a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design

Using predefined reports removes the need for you to design a report before generating it. The predefined report designs use templates that are in Excel format. When you create a new project, the predefined report designs are automatically copied into the Reports folder for the project. If you are using an existing project and want to use the predefined report designs, you will need to copy all of the folders in the Mentum Planet 4\global\Reports folder to the Reports folder in your project. Each report contains macros that format the data. You can view the raw data used to create any predefined report by clicking the PlanetEvExport tab in the report.
Modifying a predefined report design

If you want to modify a predefined report design, you can modify the Excel template without making changes to the report design (the .wrp file), but if you modify the report design, you need to modify the Excel template (i.e., if you remove a column by clearing the check box on the Design tab of the
496
Report Designer, you need to delete it from the Excel template as well). You should only modify the Excel template if you are familiar with Excel. To modify the report design, you need to load it into the Report Designer and modify it. See To modify an existing cdma2000 report design on page 503.
To generate a cdma2000 report using a predefined report design

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand cdma2000 Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports. In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report design that you want to generate and click OK. For details on the predefined reports that are available, see Predefined report designs on page 486. 3 From the Select Output Format list, choose Excel and click OK. The report is generated and opens in Excel.
Designing a cdma2000 report

The Report Designer enables you to create an overall design for a report before you generate it. You can customize the data that in the report and define the output format of the report. After you generate a Monte Carlo analysis, the operating points are automatically available in the Report Designer. If you want to use layer statistics in a report, you must manually add the data to the Report Designer. For more information, see Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers on page 505.
497
The Report Designer enables you to preview the report before you save it or generate it. Previewing a report enables you to customize the data or output settings until you are satisfied with the result. Once you are satisfied with the design, you can save it until you want to generate the report. Report designs are stored in the Reports folder of your project. You can also load and modify report designs in the Report Designer even after you have generated reports. This option is useful, for example, if you want to add layer statistics data to an existing report that only contains Monte Carlo operating points.
To design a cdma2000 report

1 Choose Data Design Report. The Report Designer opens.
On the Data tab, in the Available Data section, expand one of the following nodes and choose the type of cdma2000 data to add to the report:
Cell Equipmentcontains data about sector settings. For more information, see Chapter 5, Configuring and Placing TDMA/ FDMA Sites in the TDMA/FDMA User Guide, Chapter 5:
498
Configuring and Placing W-CDMA Sites on page 83, and Chapter 16: Configuring and Placing cdma2000 Sites on page 329. Additional information can be found in Appendix E: Import and Export Tables in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
Antennacontains data about the antenna patterns in the project. For more information, see Chapter 3, Working with Antenna Patterns, in the Mentum Planet User Guide. Subscriberscontains data about the subscriber information in the Subscriber Manager. For information on the columns available in this report, see the Subscriber_Equipment_Types worksheet and the Subscriber worksheet in Appendix E: Import and Export Tables in the Mentum Planet User Guide. <analysis name>contains the following categories of data: Carrier-sectorcontains mean values from per-sector operating points. For more information, see cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data on page 484 and Persector operating points on page 550. Carrier-sector-mobilecontains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data on page 484 and Per-subscriber type operating points on page 551. System-mobilecontains mean values from sub-category operating points. For more information, see cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data on page 484 and Sub-category operating points on page 548. Throughputcontains mean values from per-subscriber type operating points. For more information, see cdma2000 Monte Carlo simulation data on page 484 and Per-subscriber type operating points on page 551. Layer Statisticscontains statistics from a cdma2000 analysis layer. Layer statistics will only appear in the Available Data section if you have calculated them and added them to the report design. For more information, see Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers on page 505.

Type a description for the data in the Edit Description for the Data section, and click the right arrow. The data is added to the Selected Data section.
499
4 5
To add more data to the report, repeat Step 2 and Step 3. If the Relation Selector dialog box is displayed, do the following:
To define the data from a parent table, do the following: From the Select Parent Table list, choose the table that contains the rows to be referenced by the child table. From the Select Key Column From Parent Table list, choose the column in the parent table that contains the data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables. To define the data from a child table, do both of the following:

From the Select Child Table list, choose the table that contains the rows that you want to be referenced by the parent table. From the Select Key Column From Child Table list, choose the column in the child table that contains the data values used to join related table rows in the parent and child tables. Click OK to close the Relation Selector dialog box.

500
To define the data columns for a cdma2000 report

1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Design tab.
2 3
To change the name of a column, click in the Column Label box and type a name. To include or exclude columns from the report, do any of the following:
To exclude a single column, clear the check box in the Show column. To exclude all columns, click Clear All. To include all columns, click Show All.
To change the order of the columns, choose one or more columns and click the up arrow or down arrow. To choose a column, click the column number. To display a preview of the report, click Preview. The report design is displayed in a Web browser.
501
To define the export settings for a cdma2000 report

1 In the Report Designer dialog box, click the Output tab.
In the Select Export Destination section, choose one of the following formats from the Format list:
Excelthe report is opened in Microsoft Excel. Using Microsoft Excel, you can save the report in .xls format. To use this option, you must have Microsoft Excel installed. HTMLthe report is saved in HTML (.htm) format. If you choose this option, you can choose, from the Output list, whether to save the report to a file or open it in a Web browser. MapInfothe report is saved in a MapInfo (.tab) file
In the Export Settings section, define the settings that are specific to the type of format that you chose.
If you chose Excel in Step 2, you can define the sheet name (the name of the first tab in the Excel file), template file name, and macros to use. Typically, you would use these fields if you have designed a custom Excel template and want to use it for your report data. If you are modifying a predefined report design, you can choose the predefined Excel template that corresponds to the data that you are including in the report (i.e., if you are including
502
carrier-sector data in your report, you should choose the carriersector Excel template).
If you chose HTML in Step 2, you can define HTML-specific export settings, including the file to be used for the report header and footer. If you want to use the header and footer provided with Mentum Planet, do the following: Click Browse next to the Header Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Header.htm file in your project folder and click Open. Click Browse next to the Footer Filename box, navigate to the Reports\HtmlHeaderFooter\Footer.htm file in your project folder and click Open. If you chose MapInfo in Step 2, you can define MapInfo-specific settings. No template files are provided with Mentum Planet for this option.

For more information on the settings in this section, press the F1 key. If you do not define custom settings, the default settings will be used. 4 5 To define output settings for another format, repeat Step 2 and Step 3. To display a preview of the report, click Preview. The report design is displayed in a Web browser.
To save the cdma2000 report design

1 2 3 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File Save As. In the Save Report dialog box, type a name for the report in the Report Name box. From the Report Category list, choose cdma2000, and click OK. The report design will be saved in the Reports\CDMA folder of your project. Report designs are saved with the file extension of .wrp.
To modify an existing cdma2000 report design

1 2 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File Load. In the Open Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to open, and click OK.
503
In the Report Designer, modify the settings of the report design. For more information on these settings, see To design a cdma2000 report on page 498.
To delete a cdma2000 report design

1 2 In the Report Designer dialog box, choose File Remove. In the Remove Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to delete, and click Remove.
Generating a cdma2000 report

After you have designed and saved a report design in the cdma2000 category, you can use the Generate Report dialog box to generate multiple reports simultaneously.
To generate a cdma2000 report

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category, expand cdma2000 Analyses, right-click the analysis for which you want to generate the report and choose Generate Reports. In the Generate Report dialog box, choose the report that you want to generate. From the Select Output Format list, choose the format for the report output. The output settings for each format are defined on the Output tab of the Report Designer and saved in the report design that you are generating (see To define the export settings for a cdma2000 report on page 502). You can output the report in any of the three formats.
2 3
504
Click OK. The report is generated and displayed or saved in the output format that you chose.
Calculating statistics for cdma2000 analysis layers

You can calculate statistics on the individual cdma2000 analysis layers that you have generated, including PN offset plan analysis layers. You can calculate statistics based on the entire numeric grid (.grd) file, an area grid, or a selection in the Map window. You can further customize the statistics based on a clutter grid file, traffic map, or a user-defined filter. For information on generating PN offset analysis report layers, see Analyzing PN offset plans on page 477. After you calculate statistics, you can add them to a new or existing report design.
When you calculate layer statistics, they are automatically displayed in Microsoft Excel. In order to use the Layer Statistics Analysis tool, you must have Microsoft Excel installed.
To calculate cdma2000 layer statistics

1 In the Project Explorer, in the Network Analyses category or the PN Offset Plans node in the RF Tools category, choose the analysis layers that you want to add to the report, right-click one of the analysis layers and choose Statistics. The Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box opens. 2 To manually add additional analysis layers to the list, click Add Layer, navigate to the file that you want to add, and click Open.
505
In the tree view, choose Analysis Settings. The Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box opens.
On the Analysis Settings panel, choose one of the following from the Analysis Area list:
Current Windowstatistics are generated based on the area displayed in the Map window Entire Layerstatistics are generated based on the area defined in the cdma2000 analysis layer(s) used Selected Rectanglestatistics are generated for the area that is enclosed by the selected rectangle in the Map window. You can use the MapInfo rectangle tool to create a rectangle. For more information, see the MapInfo Professional User Guide. Areastatistics are generated based on an area grid. For more information, see Creating area grids in Chapter 14, Working With Grids, in the Mentum Planet User Guide.
To remove bins with null values from the analysis layer calculations, enable the Exclude Null Values check box.
506
To generate additional statistics, broken down by a classification, enable the Use Classified Grid check box, click Browse to navigate to the file, choose the file and click OK. The default classified grid file is the clutter grid file defined for the project. Any classified grid can be used to perform different kinds of statistical analysis. For example, to produce a statistical breakdown for each sector, use a best server layer as the classification grid. This breaks the statistics down by best server area.
7 8
To generate traffic statistics, enable the Use Traffic Map check box and choose a traffic map from the Traffic Map list. To filter the analysis area based on a grid file, enable the Apply Area Filter check box and do the following:
To define the area raster, click Browse, navigate to the grid file, and click OK. To define the condition for the filter, type an expression in the Condition box. For example, choosing the SignalStrength.grd file and defining the expression v > 100 would only consider pixels within the analysis area that have a signal strength greater than 100.
For more information on creating expressions, press the F1 key. 9 To discard statistical results that only contain zero values, enable the Discard Result That Only Contains Zero Statistics check box. With this check box enabled, records where all columns contain zero values will be removed from the statistical report. 10 From the Export Format list, choose one of the following formats:
Excelstatistics will be displayed in Microsoft Excel when they are generated. Htmlstatistics are generated in an HTML (.htm) file and stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\Html folder in the project. There will be one .htm file for each layer for which you are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically. MapInfo Tablestatistics are generated in MapInfo (.tab) file and stored in the <project>\Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo folder. There will be one .tab file for each layer for which you
507
are generating statistics. These files will not be displayed automatically. To display the files, see To display cdma2000 layer statistics in table format on page 509. 11 If the Layers node in the tree view does not contain layers, click Add Layer, choose the numeric grid (.grd) file that you want to add, and click Open. 12 In the tree view, expand Layers and choose the analysis layer for which you want to obtain statistics. The Layers panel opens to display layer information about the data type, resolution, and the area.
13 If you want to define classification settings for the analysis layer, define any of the available settings in the Classifications section. The settings that are available in this section are dependent on the data type of the analysis layer (classified or numeric). Do any of the following:
In the Classifications box, choose the classification for the analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified. To split the classification by site and sector names, enable the Split Classification to Get Site and Sector Names check box.
508
This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is classified.
To define the data ranges for which to calculate statistics, type the threshold values in the Threshold Definition box, separated by semi-colons. The default thresholds are set by equally dividing the range of Zmin and Zmax values contained in the chosen analysis layer. This setting is only available if the data type of the analysis layer is numeric. In the Classification Name box, type a name for the classification in this box. This option is available for both the classified and numeric data types.
14 Click Calculate Statistics. The settings in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box are saved automatically for use the next time you calculate layer statistics.
You can also access the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box by choosing Analysis Layer Statistics.
To display cdma2000 layer statistics in table format

If you saved your statistics in MapInfo (.tab) format, you can view them in a Map window. 1 2 Choose File Open Table. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the Reports\LayerStatistics\MapInfo folder of your project and choose the MapInfo (.tab) file that you want to display. From the Preferred View list, choose Browser. Click Open. The layer statistics table opens in a new Browser window.
3 4
To add cdma2000 layer statistics to a report design

1 After the statistics have been calculated, in the Layer Statistics Analysis dialog box, click Design Report. The Report Designer opens, with the layers in the Available Data section. 2 Design the report using the instructions provided in Designing a cdma2000 report on page 497.
509
Generate the report using the instructions provided in Generating a cdma2000 report on page 504.
510
Appendices
Appendices
A.

Appendix A: Modeling W-CDMA Networks
Modeling W-CDMA Networks
This appendix describes factors that influence coverage in a W-CDMA network and how they are dealt with during the network analysis process: Interference Slow fading margin Penetration losses
Interference
W-CDMA networks are limited by interference. In other words, the amount of interference in the network determines the capacity and coverage of the network. The following sections describe the different types of interference that can affect W-CDMA networks.
Downlink interference
Many signals are transmitted on the downlink. These signals can be grouped into two categories: physical channels and transport channels. Physical channels include

Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) Synchronisation Channel (SCH) Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCH) Paging Channel (PCH) Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) Downlink Shared Channel (DSCH)
Transport channels include

513
Appendix A CDMA User Guide
Transport channels are mapped onto physical channels. The mobile receiver detects each physical channel individually because the channels are coded using Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors (OVSF) also known as channelization codes. A property of these codes is that they are orthogonal to each other, enabling the physical channels to be separated and spread over the same band and still be recoverable. The sources of downlink interference are:
Non-orthogonalityinterference that occurs due to factors that reduce the orthogonality of a physical channel, which increases channel interference and reduces the available capacity. Generally, factors that reduce the degree of orthogonality include significant multipath signals with longer time delays, Doppler spread (which occurs when users are moving within a multipath environment), and power amplifier non-linearity. As the degree of orthogonality of these signals decreases (i.e., non-orthogonality increases), the interference due to these signals on the desired signal increases and reduces its signal-to-noise ratio. Therefore, the transmitted power from the site must be increased in order to achieve the required signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) Interference caused by the non-orthogonality of the signals transmitted from the site with which a mobile subscriber is communicating is sometimes referred to as in-cell interference. Interference from other sitesinterference that occurs out-of-cell. All the signal energy received at the mobile from these other sites is interference (i.e., there is no orthogonality associated with these signals from other sites). There are many locations in the network where this out-of-cell interference dominates. Thermal noiseinterference that occurs at the mobile due to its own thermal noise (i.e., kTB noise). Thermal noise is the internal noise of the mobile (i.e., noise that exists when the mobile is located far away from all other sources of interference). Unknown interferenceinterference occurring from foreign sources. The source of this interference may not be completely unknown because there may be energy introduced into the carrier band from a known adjacent carrier. An examination of the spectrum mask of adjacent carriers may indicate the level of interference to expect. Foreign interference is the difference between the thermal noise, as described above, and the noise measured when you take the same mobile into a region of the network, with the network completely shut down.
514
Modeling W-CDMA Networks CDMA User Guide
Uplink interference
Uplink interference refers to noise at the site receivers. Just as there are many channels associated with the downlink, there are also many channels transmitted by the mobile on the uplink. Some of these are access channels, used for responding to pages, and general network feedback requirements. Others are used specifically for transmitting physical channels (voice or packet data) and for controlling downlink power while receiving data. On the downlink, transmitted energy is from one source (the site transmitting antenna) and the energy is received by many receivers (mobiles). Because the downlink uses channelization codes, there can be orthogonality, and this is realized at the distributed users. This concept does not apply on the uplink because there are many users transmitting primarily to the one site receiving antenna. The received signals are not time synchronized, and so there is no real possibility for orthogonality of the received signals. The sources of uplink interference are:
In-cell interferencecaused by users communicating with the site. Some of these users have their transmitted power controlled by the site and will generally be involved in controlling the downlink power. Interference caused by users who are in second, or greater levels of handover, will likely have their equipment powers controlled by a different site, typically the site that is providing the strongest CPICH signal. Out-of-cell interferencecaused by signal energy received at the site receiver from users who are communicating with other sites Front end noise and foreign noisethese sources are similar to that described for the downlink interference. The total received noise level (Io+No) at the site receiver from each user depends upon the required Eb/No to achieve an acceptable level of energy at the receiver. As the noise increases, which happens as more users access the network, the required power from the mobile also increases. When the required power from the mobile exceeds its maximum power, the call is dropped or the session is terminated. Just as the total traffic power is required to determine the downlink interference, the received noise at the site receiver is required to determine the power needed by the users to transmit a viable signal. Yet, the transmitted power of the mobile affects the received noise level.
CPICH interference
It is necessary to determine the CPICH coverage for each site because the CPICH signal effectively determines the extent of network coverage on the downlink. The energy per chip per interference density (Ec/Io) is measured on the CPICH channel. It is continuously monitored by the mobiles and compared against the CPICH Target Ec/Io and the CPICH pollution margin.
515
The CPICH Target Ec/Io value is the signal-to-noise ratio required for a good quality of service and is defined on the Quality panel of the W-CDMA Sector Settings dialog box. The CPICH pollution margin is the Ec/Io margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a CPICH signal will interfere with the desired signal, and is defined on the General panel of the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box. The sources of CPICH interference are
in-cell interference energy from the other channels transmitted from the same site as the CPICH signal out-of-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites thermal (kTB) noise of the receiver energy from external sources
Downlink traffic interference

The DPCH carries voice or data information and must be received by the user with sufficient power to satisfy quality of service requirements (i.e., the required Eb/No value must be met by the mobile signal) if the connection is to be maintained. The Eb/No value is defined as the energy per bit per noise power density. In reality, the noise is due not only to mobile receiver thermal noise (kTB noise) but also to noise from other signal sources. The sources of traffic signal interference are:
same-cell interference energy from the non-orthogonal component of the other channels transmitted from the same site from which the traffic signal originates other-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites mobile receivers thermal noise energy from external or foreign sources
Because the signal is spread over the full bandwidth, the Eb/No benefits from the spreading (processing) gain.
Controlling interference
Effective power control decreases the interference across the network. Downlink power control ensures the traffic power meets the mobiles Eb/No requirement, without using excessive power. If the traffic power is excessive, capacity-limiting interference occurs on other traffic and CPICH signals. Likewise, on the uplink, inadequate power control can lead to interference on the network if the mobile is using excessive power to communicate with the site. As more users are added to a network, the received noise level at the site
516
increases. In order for the mobile to maintain an acceptable Eb/No, it needs to increase the transmitted power. If the user is moving closer to the site, and/or comes out of a shadowed area, the received signal at the site will increase quickly. This improves the voice quality of the signal but also greatly increases the interference experienced by other users and, in turn, reduces their voice quality. To prevent the increase in interference, very fast mobile traffic power control is required. W-CDMA technology achieves this fast power control by having the site measure the uplink Eb/No value and assess the quality of service for every user to which it is connected, many hundreds of times a second. With each measurement, two situations can arise:
the measured Eb/No is too high, in which case the site commands the mobile to decrease the power it transmits the measured Eb/No is too low, in which case the site commands the mobile to increase the power it transmits
If a mobile is in soft handover, there are two or more servers in its active set. The mobile decreases the power it transmits if any of the servers commands, but only increases the power if all the servers command it. This difference gives rise to the soft handover gain, which is described in more detail in the next section. If a user moves behind a building, for example, the mobile must power up in order to continue to stay connected. Likewise, if a user moves close to a site, the mobile must power down in order to reduce the interference it creates. Power control signals are transmitted up to 1.5kHz on both the downlink and uplink. The ability of the network to fully realize the benefit of the power control is dependent on the response time of both inner and outer loop power controls. Outer loop power control is the more restrictive of the two, because it depends on the frame duration and interleaving of data between frames. Due to these response time considerations, the power level needed to achieve the required Eb/No will not be exactly maintained. To accommodate the power delays, it is desirable to model the power control error statistically.
Slow fading
The phenomenon of slow fading impacts both the behavior and design of the network in a number of ways, including slow fading margin and soft handover gain.
How slow fading is modeled

Slow fading is the change in signal strength due to shadowing and unexpected obstructions. You can statistically model the effects of slow fading and include this data in the analysis of your network. In addition to the implicit effects above, you can explicitly model the statistical effects of slow fading in the analysis of your network. Explicit slow
517
fading is only modeled as part of the Monte Carlo analysis for pixels that contain subscribers. The same slow fading values can be used for both the downlink and uplink, and are correlated between the different sectors with path loss values at that location.
Using a correlation model to model slow fading

This section describes the calculations used by Mentum Planet to model slow fading using the angular correlation model.
Angular correlation model equation
Unlike non-angular correlation models, which use a correlation factor for co-site sectors and another correlation factor for non co-site sectors, angular correlation models use a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. Equation A.1 enables you to determine the correlation factors for angular correlation models.
ij = ( 0 B ) e ij + Be ij
0 ij 180
Equation A.1 Angular correlation model equation1 Where
0 is the correlation factor at 0o

is the steepness of the curve for angles less than approximately 20o
B
is the value of the second term in Equation A.1 at 0o
is the steepness of the curve for angles greater than 20o ij is the angle between the sites
In this equation, the correlation factor ij decreases from 0 at 0o to approximately zero at 180o. The rate of decrease is controlled by the parameters and .
Example
Figure A.1 displays an example of the correlation factor as a function of the angle between two sites. The data is from urban and suburban macrocells.
1.Cochannel Measurements for Interference Limited Small-Cell Planning, J. Van Rees, AEii, vol. 41, pp318-320, 1987.
518
Figure A.1 The vertical axis represents the correlation factor, and the horizontal axis represents the opening angle in degrees.
Table A.1 describes the values used for each parameter in Figure A.1.
Table A.1 Values used in the correlation function parameters Parameter Value 0.83 5o 0.6 70o
Determining the mean correlation factor
Assuming uniformly distributed angles, the mean correlation factor is provided in Equation A.2.
= [ ( 0 B ) ( 1 e Equation A.2 Mean correlation factor
180
) + B( 1 e
180
) ] 180
Using the parameter values in Table A.1, the mean correlation factor is 0.22.
519
Slow fading margin

The fade margin defines the amount of additional power required for the transmitted signal to overcome obstacles in the environment and provide the service quality and reliability required. It has no impact on the average amount of power required in the uplink or downlink to achieve the desired performance. Its primary impact is to reduce the extent of the coverage. In determining the downlink and uplink power levels required to provide service to a user at some specified location (bin), an average power calculation is computed based upon the average path loss associated with the bin. Coverage is not guaranteed if the required average powers are close to the maximum mobile power limit. The mobile may not have enough fade margin to allow for power fluctuations, due to local shadowing. This is where coverage probability affects the required fade margin. A high coverage probability produces a relatively high fade margin suitable for speech services and vehicular users of all services. Reducing the coverage probability for mobile users with the ability to move their position to find the best reception reduces the fade margin. The fade margin requirement increases as the signal variability (standard deviation) increases. Its requirement will be reduced significantly in regions of the network where soft handover gain exists. This occurs because the shadowing of the two sites is not correlated. This implies that fade margin requirements are minimized where the nominal signal levels from the sites in soft handover are nearly equal.
Soft handover gains

Macro-diversity soft handover gain occurs when a user is receiving a signal from more than one site. In this particular case, the variability of the path loss can have a significant impact on the power requirements. As a result of the variability in the received signals caused by the significant shadowing that can accompany these signals, a signal which might normally be greater from one site (e.g., Site_1) may, over some locations in the same general vicinity, be less than that from a different site (e.g., Site_2). In these situations, the user will be served primarily from Site_2, which will provide the required signal strength at the mobile using a lower transmitted power level than that which would have originated from Site_1. The impact of this is to realize a gain, thus reducing the required power and the interference in the network. The impact of this macro-diversity gain increases as the signal variability increases (i.e., the standard deviation increases), and as the difference between the nominal signal levels from each site decreases (the strength of the signals become more equal) as illustrated in Figure A.2.
520
Figure A.2 The impact of macro-diversity gain
The macro-diversity soft handover gain is fully realized only if the signals coming from the two sites are uncorrelated. Where a mobile is in soft handover with two or three sites with very limited angular separation there is an increased correlation and, hence, a decreased macro-diversity gain. It is also possible to consider the effects of additional gain due to signal combining at the mobile. This is made possible due to the rake receiver in the mobile, and, therefore, impacts only the downlink. It is uncertain what the net impact (if any) of this gain will be, since the signals from these two different sites are generally uncorrelated. Therefore, the possible gain associated with this type of signal combining is not implemented.
Penetration losses
Path loss is calculated using models that are calibrated to give path loss predictions that are appropriate for outdoor services. Generally, surveys are conducted to test the accuracy of the prediction model and these values are invariably outdoor measurements. Not all users of services are outdoors. It is therefore necessary to address this discrepancy. Within a bin, some users may be outdoors, some users may be indoors near windows, and some users may be located at the center of buildings where higher penetration losses
521
occur. Some users of these services will be able to move about and use services where signals are stronger. Because of the large variability of signal levels within a bin, it may be possible for some users using some services to have coverage, while other users of the same services may not have coverage due to the higher penetration losses in other locations within the same bin. To deal with how and where a user uses a service, Mentum Planet allows different proportions of users to be allocated to the following environments, each with different penetration loss, in each clutter:

Outdoor Vehicular Indoor Deep Indoor
522
B.
Column Snapshot Subscriber_Number SubCategory Block_Reason Best_Server Achieved_Downlink_Rate Achieved_Uplink_Rate
Appendix B: W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format
W-CDMA Discrete Subscriber Table Format
This appendix describes the fields in the discrete subscriber table that is generated when you collect information about the drop status of discrete subscribers during a Monte Carlo simulation. For some subscribers, many of the columns will be null. For more information about collecting information about discrete subscribers, see Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149.
Type Integer Description Count of total snapshots taken during Monte Carlo simulation. This value is the same for all entries in one snapshot file. Number of the discrete subscriber Name of subscriber category, including the subscriber type, service type, quality type, and environment Served or reason for not serving subscriber Site/Sector for serving sector or best failure Maximum achieved data rate on the downlink. Maximum achieved data rate on the uplink.
Integer Character (128)
Character (40) Character (51)
523
Appendix B CDMA User Guide Column Negotiation_State Type Description Five possible negotiation states: non-negotiated

forward negotiated reverse negotiated negotiated not served
See Table 8.1 on page 156 Carrier Uplink_Transmit_Power Uplink_Coverage_Probability Downlink_Transmit_Power Downlink_Supplemental_Transmit Downlink_Coverage_Probability X Y Size Second_Best_Server Third_Best_Server Fourth_Best_Server Fifth_Best_Server Sixth_Best_Server Seventh_Best_Server Float Float Float Float Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (32) Float Float Float Serving or preferred carrier. 0 indicates no carrier is defined. Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm Probability of coverage Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm Downlink transmit power on the supplemental channel. Probability of coverage Latitude Longitude The DEM resolution Site/sector when in two way handover Site/sector when in three way handover Site/sector when in four way handover Site/sector when in five way handover Site/sector when in six way handover Site/sector when in seven way handover
524
C.
System variables
Table C.1 System variables Column RUNS_MADE RANDOM_SEED POWER_CONTROL_SEED SLOW_FADING_SEED
Appendix C: W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format
W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format
This appendix describes the set of operating points that are created when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation. For more information, see Chapter 8: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for W-CDMA on page 149.
The following table describes the system variables at the beginning of the operating points file.
Type Integer
Description Number of runs in the Monte Carlo simulation up to this point in time For internal use only For internal use only For internal use only
525
Appendix C CDMA User Guide
Sub-category operating points

The following table describes the operating points related to the usage types defined for the subscriber types included in the analysis. Usage types consist of a service type, quality type, and environments.
Table C.2 Sub-category operating points Column SUB_CATEGORY UNSERVED NOT_IN_HO SOFTER_HO SOFT_HO SOFT_SOFTER_HO SOFTER_SOFT_HO SOFT_SOFT_HO SOFTER_SOFTER_HO FOUR_SERVER_HO FIVE_SERVER_HO SIX_SERVER_HO SEVEN_SERVER_HO SERVED Type String Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Description Usage to which the following operating points apply Number of subscribers not served for any reason Number of subscribers not in handover Number of subscribers in softer handover number of subscribers in soft handover Number of subscribers in soft-softer handover Number of subscribers in softer-soft handover Number of subscribers in soft-soft handover Number of subscribers in softersofter handover Number of subscribers in four-server handover Number of subscribers in five-server handover Number of subscribers in six-server handover Number of subscribers in sevenserver handover Total number of subscribers who have been served in any handover type
526
W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table C.2 Sub-category operating points (continued) Column RVS_PA_LIMIT Type Integer Description Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the downlink Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors. A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel elements. This field applies to both the downlink and the uplink. The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call. Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the downlink. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the downlink Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or pilot to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscribers target.
RVS_LOAD
Integer
RVS_CE_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_USER_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT
Integer
FWD_PA_LIMIT
Integer
527
Appendix C CDMA User Guide Table C.2 Sub-category operating points (continued) Column FWD_PILOT_LIMIT Type Integer Description Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient pilot power on the uplink. The pilot power is caused by the maximum pilot power/fixed pilot power being insufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient voice power on the uplink to meet the subscribers Eb/No target Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the uplink Number of subscribers on the downlink not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded.
FWD_VOICE_LIMIT
Integer
FWD_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_CLUTTER_TYPE_SPEED_LIMIT
Integer
FWD_DUE_TO_THROUGHPUT_LIMIT
Integer
Per-sector operating points

The following table describes the per-sector operating points that are common to all subscriber types.
Table C.3 Per-sector operating points Column SECTOR CARRIER TIME_SLOT_INDEX Type String String Description Sector ID Carrier ID Not used
528
W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table C.3 Per-sector operating points (continued) Column PREV_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW Type Float Description Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers. Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise. Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation Output power of the pilot channel Output power of the sync channel Output power of the paging channel For HSDPA and Rel 99 & HSDPA sectors, the maximum transmit power for the downlink shared channel.
CURRENT_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW
Float
TOTAL_IN_CELL_POWER_MW
Float
PILOT_POWER_MW SYNC_POWER_MW PAGING_POWER_MW HS-DSCH Power
Float Float Float Float
Per-subscriber type operating points

The following table describes the operating points that are per-subscriber type.
Table C.4 Per-subscriber type operating points Column SUB_CATEGORY NUM_USERS NUM_RPT_USERS Type String Integer Integer Description Subscriber category to which the following operating points apply Number of subscribers on the uplink captured by this sector Number of subscribers served by a repeater on this sector
529
Appendix C CDMA User Guide Table C.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column NUM_HANDOFF_RPT_USERS Type Integer Description Number of subscribers served in handover with a repeater on this sector Number of subscribers on the downlink captured by this sector Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise. In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This field is used to determine frequency reuse efficiency. Number of subscribers not served due to the noise rise (load) limit on the downlink Number of subscribers not served due to the limit on the maximum number of subscribers served by a sector Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient primary channel elements Not used Number of subscribers blocked on a cell because the required mobile ERP exceeds the maximum ERP Number of subscribers not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell
FWD_NUM_USERS CURRENT_RCV_POWER_MW
Integer Float
ATTENUATED_POWER_MW IN_CELL_POWER_MW
Float Float
DROPPED_BY_RVS_LOAD
Integer
REFUSED_BY_USER_LIMIT
Integer
REFUSED_BY_RVS_CE_LIMIT
Integer
DROPPED_DUE_TO_RVS_CODE_LIMIT DROPPED_DUE_TO_MOBILE_PA_LIMIT
Integer Integer
DROPPED_DUE_TO_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT
Integer
DROPPED_DUE_TO_SPEED_LIMIT
Integer
530
W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table C.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column TOTAL_VOICE_POWER_MW Type Float Description Total power of all best server voice channels. This value includes the Voice Activity Factor. Average power of a single voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor. Minimum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor. Maximum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor. Number of downlink channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements. Number of downlink channel elements used Number of subscribers not served at this sector for any reason Number of channels not in handover Number of channels in soft handover Number of channels in softer handover Number of channels in soft-softer handover Number of channels in softer-soft handover
AVERAGE_VOICE_POWER_MW
Float
MIN_VOICE_POWER_MW
Float
MAX_VOICE_POWER_MW
Float
REQUIRED_FWD_CE
Integer
USER_FWD_CE UNSERVED_AT_SECTOR
Integer Integer
NOT_IN_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFT_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFTER_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR
Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer
531
Appendix C CDMA User Guide Table C.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column SOFT_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFTER_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR FOUR_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR FIVE_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR SIX_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR SEVEN_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_PILOT Type Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Description Number of channels in soft-soft handover Number of channels in softer-softer handover Number of channels in fourserver handover Number of channels in fiveserver handover Number of channels in six-server handover Number of channels in sevenserver handover Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient pilot Ec/Io from the best server Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient voice power Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient PA power at the best server Number of subscribers not served on the downlink due to insufficient throughput at the best server Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel codes at the best server Number of handover connections refused during uplink analysis due to insufficient handover channel elements
DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_VOICE
Integer
PRIMARY_DROPPED_BY_PA
Integer
DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_THROUGHPUT
Integer
PRIMARY_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE
Integer
DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_CE
Integer
532
W-CDMA Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table C.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_VOICE Type Integer Description Number of handover connections refused during uplink analysis due to insufficient voice power Number of handover connections refused during uplink analysis due to insufficient PA power Number of handover connections refused due to insufficient channel codes Number of handover connections refused due to insufficient throughput
HANDOFF_DROPPED_BY_PA
Integer
HANDOFF_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE
Integer
DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_THROUGHPUT
Integer
533
Appendix C CDMA User Guide
534
D.

Appendix D: Modeling cdma2000 Networks
Modeling cdma2000 Networks
This appendix describes factors that influence coverage in a cdma2000 network and how they are dealt with during the network analysis process: Interference Slow fading margin Penetration losses
Interference
cdma2000 networks are limited by interference. In other words, the amount of interference in the network determines the capacity and coverage of the network. The following sections describe the different types of interference that can affect cdma2000 networks.
Forward link interference

Many signals are transmitted on the forward link. These signals can be grouped into two categories: physical channels and transport channels. Physical channels include

Pilot Channel Synchronisation Channel (SCH) Dedicated Physical Channels (DPCH) Paging Channel (PCH) Random Access Channel (RACH) Forward Link Shared Channel
Transport channels include

535
Appendix D Sample document
Transport channels are mapped onto physical channels. The mobile receiver detects each physical channel individually because the channels are coded using Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors (OVSF) also known as Walsh codes. A property of these codes is that they are orthogonal to each other, enabling the physical channels to be separated and spread over the same band and still be recoverable. The sources of forward link interference are:
Non-orthogonalityinterference that occurs due to factors that reduce the orthogonality of a physical channel, which increases channel interference and reduces the available capacity. Generally, factors that reduce the degree of orthogonality include significant multipath signals with longer time delays, Doppler spread (which occurs when users are moving within a multipath environment), and power amplifier non-linearity. As the degree of orthogonality of these signals decreases (i.e., non-orthogonality increases), the interference due to these signals on the desired signal increases and reduces its signal-to-noise ratio. Therefore, the transmitted power from the site must be increased in order to achieve the required signal-to-noise ratio (Eb/No) Interference caused by the non-orthogonality of the signals transmitted from the site with which a mobile subscriber is communicating is sometimes referred to as in-cell interference. Interference from other sitesinterference that occurs out-of-cell. All the signal energy received at the mobile from these other sites is interference (i.e., there is no orthogonality associated with these signals from other sites). There are many locations in the network where this out-of-cell interference dominates. Thermal noiseinterference that occurs at the mobile due to its own thermal noise (i.e., kTB noise). Thermal noise is the internal noise of the mobile (i.e., noise that exists when the mobile is located far away from all other sources of interference). Unknown interferenceinterference occurring from foreign sources. The source of this interference may not be completely unknown because there may be energy introduced into the carrier band from a known adjacent carrier. An examination of the spectrum mask of adjacent carriers may indicate the level of interference to expect. Foreign interference is the difference between the thermal noise, as described above, and the noise measured when you take the same mobile into a region of the network, with the network completely shut down.
536
Modeling cdma2000 Networks Sample document
Reverse link interference

Reverse link interference refers to noise at the site receivers. Just as there are many channels associated with the forward link, there are also many channels transmitted by the mobile on the reverse link. Some of these are access channels, used for responding to pages, and general network feedback requirements. Others are used specifically for transmitting physical channels (voice or packet data) and for controlling forward link power while receiving data. On the forward link, transmitted energy is from one source (the site transmitting antenna) and the energy is received by many receivers (mobiles). Because the forward link uses channelization codes, there can be orthogonality, and this is realized at the distributed users. This concept does not apply on the reverse link because there are many users transmitting primarily to the one site receiving antenna. The received signals are not time synchronized, and so there is no real possibility for orthogonality of the received signals. The sources of reverse link interference are:
In-cell interferencecaused by users communicating with the site. Some of these users have their transmitted power controlled by the site and will generally be involved in controlling the forward link power. Interference caused by users who are in second, or greater levels of handover, will likely have their equipment powers controlled by a different site, typically the site that is providing the strongest pilot signal. Out-of-cell interferencecaused by signal energy received at the site receiver from users who are communicating with other sites Front end noise and foreign noisethese sources are similar to that described for the forward link interference. The total received noise level (Io+No) at the site receiver from each user depends upon the required Eb/No to achieve an acceptable level of energy at the receiver. As the noise increases, which happens as more users access the network, the required power from the mobile also increases. When the required power from the mobile exceeds its maximum power, the call is dropped or the session is terminated. Just as the total traffic power is required to determine the forward link interference, the received noise at the site receiver is required to determine the power needed by the users to transmit a viable signal. Yet, the transmitted power of the mobile affects the received noise level.
Pilot interference
It is necessary to determine the pilot coverage for each site because the pilot signal effectively determines the extent of network coverage on the forward link. The energy per chip per interference density (Ec/Io) is measured on the pilot channel. It is continuously
537
monitored by the mobiles and compared against the Pilot detection threshold and the pilot pollution margin. The pilot detection threshold value is the minimum pilot signal-to-noise ratio (Ec/Io) value required for adding a pilot to the active set and is defined on the Quality panel of the cdma2000 Sector Settings dialog box. The pilot pollution margin is the Ec/Io margin, relative to the best server Ec/Io, within which a pilot signal will interfere with the desired signal, and is defined on the General panel of the Mobile Technology Network Settings dialog box. The sources of pilot interference are
in-cell interference energy from the other channels transmitted from the same site as the pilot signal out-of-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites thermal (kTB) noise of the receiver energy from external sources
Forward link traffic interference

The DPCH carries voice or data information and must be received by the user with sufficient power to satisfy quality of service requirements (i.e., the required Eb/No value must be met by the mobile signal) if the connection is to be maintained. The Eb/No value is defined as the energy per bit per noise power density. In reality, the noise is due not only to mobile receiver thermal noise (kTB noise) but also to noise from other signal sources. The sources of traffic signal interference are:
same-cell interference energy from the non-orthogonal component of the other channels transmitted from the same site from which the traffic signal originates other-cell interference energy transmitted from all channels of other sites mobile receivers thermal noise energy from external or foreign sources
Because the signal is spread over the full bandwidth, the Eb/No benefits from the spreading (processing) gain.
Controlling interference
Effective power control decreases the interference across the network. Forward link power control ensures the traffic power meets the mobiles Eb/No requirement, without using excessive power. If the traffic power is excessive, capacity-limiting interference occurs on other traffic and pilot signals. Likewise, on the reverse link, inadequate power control can
538
lead to interference on the network if the mobile is using excessive power to communicate with the site. As more users are added to a network, the received noise level at the site increases. In order for the mobile to maintain an acceptable Eb/No, it needs to increase the transmitted power. If the user is moving closer to the site, and/or comes out of a shadowed area, the received signal at the site will increase quickly. This improves the voice quality of the signal but also greatly increases the interference experienced by other users and, in turn, reduces their voice quality. To prevent the increase in interference, very fast mobile traffic power control is required. cdma2000 technology achieves this fast power control by having the site measure the uplink Eb/No value and assess the quality of service for every user to which it is connected, many hundreds of times a second. With each measurement, two situations can arise:
the measured Eb/No is too high, in which case the site commands the mobile to decrease the power it transmits the measured Eb/No is too low, in which case the site commands the mobile to increase the power it transmits
If a mobile is in soft handoff, there are two or more servers in its active set. The mobile decreases the power it transmits if any of the servers commands, but only increases the power if all the servers command it. This difference gives rise to the soft handoff gain, which is described in more detail in the next section. If a user moves behind a building, for example, the mobile must power up in order to continue to stay connected. Likewise, if a user moves close to a site, the mobile must power down in order to reduce the interference it creates. Power control signals are transmitted up to 1.5kHz on both the forward link and reverse link. The ability of the network to fully realize the benefit of the power control is dependent on the response time of both inner and outer loop power controls. Outer loop power control is the more restrictive of the two, because it depends on the frame duration and interleaving of data between frames. Due to these response time considerations, the power level needed to achieve the required Eb/No will not be exactly maintained. To accommodate the power delays, it is desirable to model the power control error statistically.
Slow fading
The phenomenon of slow fading impacts both the behavior and design of the network in a number of ways, including slow fading margin and soft handoff gain.
539
How slow fading is modeled

Slow fading is the change in signal strength due to shadowing and unexpected obstructions. You can statistically model the effects of slow fading and include this data in the analysis of your network. In addition to the implicit effects above, you can explicitly model the statistical effects of slow fading in the analysis of your network. Explicit slow fading is only modeled as part of the Monte Carlo analysis for pixels that contain subscribers. The same slow fading values can be used for both the forward link and reverse link, and are correlated between the different sectors with path loss values at that location.
Using a correlation model to model slow fading

This section describes the calculations used by Mentum Planet to model slow fading using the angular correlation model.
Angular correlation model equation
Unlike non-angular correlation models, which use a correlation factor for co-site sectors and another correlation factor for non co-site sectors, angular correlation models use a correlation factor for each pair of signals received by the mobile from different sectors. Equation D.1 enables you to determine the correlation factors for angular correlation models.
ij = ( 0 B ) e ij + Be ij
0 ij 180
Equation D.1 Angular correlation model equation1 Where
0 is the correlation factor at 0o

is the steepness of the curve for angles less than approximately 20o
B
is the value of the second term in Equation D.1 at 0o
is the steepness of the curve for angles greater than 20o ij is the angle between the sites
In this equation, the correlation factor ij decreases from 0 at 0o to approximately zero at 180o. The rate of decrease is controlled by the parameters and .
1.Cochannel Measurements for Interference Limited Small-Cell Planning, J. Van Rees, AEii, vol. 41, pp318-320, 1987.
540
Example
Figure D.1 displays an example of the correlation factor as a function of the angle between two sites. The data is from urban and suburban macrocells.
Figure D.1 The vertical axis represents the correlation factor, and the horizontal axis represents the opening angle in degrees.
Table D.1 describes the values used for each parameter in Figure D.1.
Table D.1 Values used in the correlation function parameters Parameter Value 0.83 5o 0.6 70o
Determining the mean correlation factor
Assuming uniformly distributed angles, the mean correlation factor is provided in Equation D.2.
541
= [ ( 0 B ) ( 1 e Equation D.2 Mean correlation factor
180
) + B( 1 e
180
) ] 180
Using the parameter values in Table D.1, the mean correlation factor is 0.22.
Slow fading margin

The fade margin defines the amount of additional power required for the transmitted signal to overcome obstacles in the environment and provide the service quality and reliability required. It has no impact on the average amount of power required in the uplink or downlink to achieve the desired performance. Its primary impact is to reduce the extent of the coverage. In determining the forward link and reverse link power levels required to provide service to a user at some specified location (bin), an average power calculation is computed based upon the average path loss associated with the bin. Coverage is not guaranteed if the required average powers are close to the maximum mobile power limit. The mobile may not have enough fade margin to allow for power fluctuations, due to local shadowing. This is where coverage probability affects the required fade margin. A high coverage probability produces a relatively high fade margin suitable for speech services and vehicular users of all services. Reducing the coverage probability for mobile users with the ability to move their position to find the best reception reduces the fade margin. The fade margin requirement increases as the signal variability (standard deviation) increases. Its requirement will be reduced significantly in regions of the network where soft handoff gain exists. This occurs because the shadowing of the two sites is not correlated. This implies that fade margin requirements are minimized where the nominal signal levels from the sites in soft handoff are nearly equal.
Soft handoff gains

Macro-diversity soft handoff gain occurs when a user is receiving a signal from more than one site. In this particular case, the variability of the path loss can have a significant impact on the power requirements. As a result of the variability in the received signals caused by the significant shadowing that can accompany these signals, a signal which might normally be greater from one site (e.g., Site_1) may, over some locations in the same general vicinity, be less than that from a different site (e.g., Site_2). In these situations, the user will be served primarily from Site_2, which will provide the required signal strength at the mobile using a lower transmitted power level than that which would have originated from Site_1. The impact of this is to realize a gain, thus reducing the required power and the interference in the network.
542
The impact of this macro-diversity gain increases as the signal variability increases (i.e., the standard deviation increases), and as the difference between the nominal signal levels from each site decreases (the strength of the signals become more equal) as illustrated in Figure D.2.
Figure D.2 The impact of macro-diversity gain
The macro-diversity soft handoff gain is fully realized only if the signals coming from the two sites are uncorrelated. Where a mobile is in soft handoff with two or three sites with very limited angular separation there is an increased correlation and, hence, a decreased macro-diversity gain. It is also possible to consider the effects of additional gain due to signal combining at the mobile. This is made possible due to the rake receiver in the mobile, and, therefore, impacts only the forward link. It is uncertain what the net impact (if any) of this gain will be, since the signals from these two different sites are generally uncorrelated. Therefore, the possible gain associated with this type of signal combining is not implemented.
Penetration losses
Path loss is calculated using models that are calibrated to give path loss predictions that are appropriate for outdoor services. Generally, surveys are conducted to test the accuracy
543
of the prediction model and these values are invariably outdoor measurements. Not all users of services are outdoors. It is therefore necessary to address this discrepancy. Within a bin, some users may be outdoors, some users may be indoors near windows, and some users may be located at the center of buildings where higher penetration losses occur. Some users of these services will be able to move about and use services where signals are stronger. Because of the large variability of signal levels within a bin, it may be possible for some users using some services to have coverage, while other users of the same services may not have coverage due to the higher penetration losses in other locations within the same bin. To deal with how and where a user uses a service, Mentum Planet allows different proportions of users to be allocated to the following environments, each with different penetration loss, in each clutter:

Outdoor Vehicular Indoor Deep Indoor
544
E.
Column Snapshot Subscriber_Number SubCategory Block_Reason Best_Server Achieved_Downlink_Rate Achieved_Uplink_Rate
Appendix E: cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format
cdma2000 Discrete Subscriber Table Format
This appendix describes the fields in the discrete subscriber table that is generated when you collect information about the drop status of discrete subscribers during a Monte Carlo simulation. For some subscribers, many of the columns will be null. For more information about collecting information about discrete subscribers, see Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399.
Type Integer Description Count of total snapshots taken during Monte Carlo simulation. This value is the same for all entries in one snapshot file. Number of the discrete subscriber Name of subscriber category, including the subscriber type, service type, quality type, and environment Served or reason for not serving subscriber Site/Sector for serving sector or best failure Maximum achieved data rate on the downlink. Maximum achieved data rate on the uplink.
Integer Character (128)
Character (40) Character (51)
545
Appendix E CDMA User Guide Column Negotiation_State Type Description Five possible negotiation states: non-negotiated

forward negotiated reverse negotiated negotiated not served
See Table 19.1 on page 406 Carrier Uplink_Transmit_Power (Reverse link) Uplink_Coverage_Probability (Reverse link) Downlink_Transmit_Power (Forward link) Downlink_Supplemental_Transmit Downlink_Coverage_Probability (Forward link) X Y Size Second_Best_Server Third_Best_Server Fourth_Best_Server Fifth_Best_Server Sixth_Best_Server Seventh_Best_Server Float Float Float Float Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (51) Character (32) Float Float Float Serving or preferred carrier. 0 indicates no carrier is defined. Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm Probability of coverage Transmit power corresponding to 50% probability or minimum if greater in dBm Downlink transmit power on the supplemental channel. Probability of coverage Latitude Longitude The DEM resolution Site/sector when in two way handoff Site/sector when in three way handoff Site/sector when in four way handoff Site/sector when in five way handoff Site/sector when in six way handoff Site/sector when in seven way handoff
546
F.
System variables
Table F.1 System variables Column RUNS_MADE RANDOM_SEED POWER_CONTROL_SEED SLOW_FADING_SEED
Appendix F: cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format
cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format
This appendix describes the set of operating points that are created when you generate a Monte Carlo simulation. For more information, see Chapter 19: Generating Monte Carlo Analyses for cdma2000 on page 399.
The following table describes the system variables at the beginning of the operating points file.
Type Integer
Description Number of runs in the Monte Carlo simulation up to this point in time For internal use only For internal use only For internal use only
547
Appendix F CDMA User Guide
Sub-category operating points

The following table describes the operating points related to the usage types defined for the subscriber types included in the analysis. Usage types consist of a service type, quality type, and environments.
Table F.2 Sub-category operating points Column SUB_CATEGORY UNSERVED NOT_IN_HO SOFTER_HO SOFT_HO SOFT_SOFTER_HO SOFTER_SOFT_HO SOFT_SOFT_HO SOFTER_SOFTER_HO FOUR_SERVER_HO FIVE_SERVER_HO SIX_SERVER_HO SEVEN_SERVER_HO SERVED Type String Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Description Usage to which the following operating points apply Number of subscribers not served for any reason Number of subscribers not in handoff Number of subscribers in softer handoff number of subscribers in soft handoff Number of subscribers in soft-softer handoff Number of subscribers in softer-soft handoff Number of subscribers in soft-soft handoff Number of subscribers in softersofter handoff Number of subscribers in four-server handoff Number of subscribers in five-server handoff Number of subscribers in six-server handoff Number of subscribers in sevenserver handover Total number of subscribers who have been served in any handoff type
548
cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table F.2 Sub-category operating points (continued) Column RVS_PA_LIMIT Type Integer Description Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient mobile ERP to achieve their Eb/No target on the forward link Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum load being reached at one or more sectors. A subscriber will not be served if its signal pushes any sector over its noise rise (load) limit. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel elements. This field applies to both the forward link and the reverse link. The Monte Carlo simulation uses the greatest number of channel elements required by the subscriber when determining if there are sufficient channel elements to take the call. Number of subscribers not served due to the maximum subscriber limit being reached on the attempted sector. This field applies to the forward link. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the forward link Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient power amplifier (PA) power available at the serving sector. Insufficient PA power can cause either the voice or pilot to have insufficient signal strength to meet the subscribers target.
RVS_LOAD
Integer
RVS_CE_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_USER_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT
Integer
FWD_PA_LIMIT
Integer
549
Appendix F CDMA User Guide Table F.2 Sub-category operating points (continued) Column FWD_PILOT_LIMIT Type Integer Description Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient pilot power on the reverse link. The pilot power is caused by the maximum pilot power/ fixed pilot power being insufficient to meet the Ec/Io target of the mobile. Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient voice power on the reverse link to meet the subscribers Eb/No target Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient codes on the reverse link Number of subscribers on the forward link not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell Number of subscribers not served because the throughput limit for the site was exceeded.
FWD_VOICE_LIMIT
Integer
FWD_DUE_TO_CODE_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT
Integer
RVS_CLUTTER_TYPE_SPEED_LIMIT
Integer
FWD_DUE_TO_THROUGHPUT_LIMIT
Integer
Per-sector operating points

The following table describes the per-sector operating points that are common to all subscriber types.
Table F.3 Per-sector operating points Column SECTOR CARRIER TIME_SLOT_INDEX Type String String Description Sector ID Carrier ID Not used
550
cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table F.3 Per-sector operating points (continued) Column PREV_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW Type Float Description Power received on previous iteration of the simulation. This is used to determine the received power from subscribers. The previous run noise is used to determine the subscribers output powers. Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise. Power received from subscribers within the cell on the final iteration of the simulation Output power of the pilot channel Output power of the sync channel Output power of the paging channel
CURRENT_TOTAL_RCV_POWER_MW
Float
TOTAL_IN_CELL_POWER_MW
Float
PILOT_POWER_MW SYNC_POWER_MW PAGING_POWER_MW
Float Float Float
Per-subscriber type operating points

The following table describes the operating points that are per-subscriber type.
Table F.4 Per-subscriber type operating points Column SUB_CATEGORY NUM_USERS Type String Integer Description Subscriber category to which the following operating points apply Number of subscribers on the reverse link captured by this sector Number of subscribers served by a repeater on this sector Number of subscribers served in handoff with a repeater on this sector
NUM_RPT_USERS NUM_HANDOFF_RPT_USERS
Integer Integer
551
Appendix F CDMA User Guide Table F.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column FWD_NUM_USERS Type Integer Description Number of subscribers on the forward link captured by this sector Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This is the actual receive power used to determine noise. In-cell power attenuated by the uplink orthogonality factor Power received on the final iteration of the simulation. This field is used to determine frequency reuse efficiency. Number of subscribers not served due to the noise rise (load) limit on the forward link Number of subscribers not served due to the limit on the maximum number of subscribers served by a sector Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient primary channel elements Not used Number of subscribers blocked on a cell because the required mobile ERP exceeds the maximum ERP Number of subscribers not served because they are outside the maximum cell radius Number of subscribers not served because they exceed the speed limit for the cell
CURRENT_RCV_POWER_MW
Float
ATTENUATED_POWER_MW IN_CELL_POWER_MW
Float Float
DROPPED_BY_RVS_LOAD
Integer
REFUSED_BY_USER_LIMIT
Integer
REFUSED_BY_RVS_CE_LIMIT
Integer
DROPPED_DUE_TO_RVS_CODE_LIMIT DROPPED_DUE_TO_MOBILE_PA_LIMIT
Integer Integer
DROPPED_DUE_TO_CELL_RADIUS_LIMIT
Integer
DROPPED_DUE_TO_SPEED_LIMIT
Integer
552
cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table F.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column TOTAL_VOICE_POWER_MW Type Float Description Total power of all best server voice channels. This value includes the Voice Activity Factor. Average power of a single voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor. Minimum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor. Maximum power of the best server voice channel. This value does not include the Voice Activity Factor. Number of forward channel elements that would be required to serve all served subscribers and those refused due to insufficient channel elements. Forward throughput for EV-DO Number of forward channel elements used Number of subscribers not served at this sector for any reason Number of channels not in handoff Number of channels in soft handoff Number of channels in softer handoff Number of channels in soft-softer handoff
AVERAGE_VOICE_POWER_MW
Float
MIN_VOICE_POWER_MW
Float
MAX_VOICE_POWER_MW
Float
REQUIRED_FWD_CE
Integer
EVDO_FWD_THROUGHPUT USER_FWD_CE UNSERVED_AT_SECTOR
Float Integer Integer
NOT_IN_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFT_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR
Integer Integer Integer Integer
553
Appendix F CDMA User Guide Table F.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column SOFTER_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFT_SOFT_HO_AT_SECTOR SOFTER_SOFTER_HO_AT_SECTOR FOUR_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR FIVE_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR SIX_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR SEVEN_SERVER_HO_AT_SECTOR DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_PILOT Type Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Integer Description Number of channels in softer-soft handoff Number of channels in soft-soft handoff Number of channels in softer-softer handoff Number of channels in fourserver handoff Number of channels in fiveserver handoff Number of channels in six-server handoff Number of channels in sevenserver handoff Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient pilot Ec/Io from the best server Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient voice power Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient PA power at the best server Number of subscribers not served on the forward link due to insufficient throughput at the best server Number of subscribers not served due to insufficient channel codes at the best server Number of handoff connections refused during reverse link analysis due to insufficient handoff channel elements
DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_VOICE
Integer
PRIMARY_DROPPED_BY_PA
Integer
DROPPED_BY_PRIMARY_THROUGHPUT
Integer
PRIMARY_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE
Integer
DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_CE
Integer
554
cdma2000 Operating Points Table Format CDMA User Guide Table F.4 Per-subscriber type operating points (continued) Column DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_VOICE Type Integer Description Number of handoff connections refused during reverse link analysis due to insufficient voice power Number of handoff connections refused during reverse link analysis due to insufficient PA power Number of handoff connections refused due to insufficient channel codes Number of handoff connections refused due to insufficient throughput
HANDOFF_DROPPED_BY_PA
Integer
HANDOFF_DROPPED_DUE_TO_CODE
Integer
DROPPED_BY_HANDOFF_THROUGHPUT
Integer
555
Appendix F CDMA User Guide
556
Index
Index
overview 15 Adding Analysis layers cdma2000 repeaters 366 cdma2000 395 PN offset plan to project 476 calculating statistics 505 W-CDMA repeaters 117 defining 421, 440 Allocating defining defaults for 422 PN offsets 470 EV-DO 456 spectrum forward link interference 413 cdma2000 276 handoff 415 W-CDMA 30 path balance 417 Analyses pilot 409 cdma2000 prediction view files 380 creating Monte Carlo 422 rapid planning 380 creating rapid planning 384 reverse link interference 414 defining layers 421, 440 viewing 396, 443 defining Monte Carlo settings 424 W-CDMA 146 defining rapid planning settings 386 calculating statistics 250 deleting 396, 445 CPICH 159 discrete subscriber settings 433 defining 170, 188 generating 442 defining defaults for 170 generating Monte Carlo 435 downlink interference 162 generating rapid pilot 395 handover 164 modifying settings 439 HSDPA 204 overview 261 path balance 166 W-CDMA prediction view files 132 creating Monte Carlo 171 rapid planning 132 creating rapid planning 136 uplink interference 163 defining layers 170, 188 viewing 147, 191 defining Monte Carlo settings 172 Analysis settings defining rapid planning settings 138 cdma2000 deleting 148, 193 defining Monte Carlo 422 discrete subscriber settings 181 defining rapid planning 384 generating 190 modifying 439 generating Monte Carlo 183 W-CDMA generating rapid pilot 146 defining Monte Carlo 171 modifying settings 187 defining rapid planning 136
A
557
Index CDMA User Guide
modifying 187 Analyzing PN offset plans 477 Antennas cdma2000 repeater donor settings 371 repeater service settings 369 W-CDMA repeater donor settings 123 repeater service settings 121 Applying, PN offsets to sectors 482
B
Best Serving Sector Recolor tool cdma2000 444 W-CDMA 192

C
Bands cdma2000 defining 278 maximum number 277 W-CDMA defining 32 maximum number 31 Base station link budgets cdma2000 calculating power 333 global edit 339 W-CDMA calculating power 87 global edit 93 Bearers cdma2000 defining 301 editing 307 W-CDMA defining 58 editing 61 Best server analysis layers cdma2000 forward link 413 reverse link 414 W-CDMA downlink 162 uplink 163
Carrier In-Map Display tool cdma2000 358 W-CDMA 110 Carrier settings cdma2000 281 W-CDMA 35 Carriers cdma2000 creating 277 defining 276 defining sector settings 347 W-CDMA creating 31 defining 30 defining sector settings 99 Circuit-switched service types, defining cdma2000 316 W-CDMA 71 Clutter types cdma2000 assigning clutter classes 300 defining 296 editing 300 W-CDMA assigning clutter classes 56 defining 52 editing 56 Configuration files custom default settings cdma2000 270 W-CDMA 24 Configuring sites cdma2000 331 W-CDMA 85
558
Controlling interference cdma2000 538 W-CDMA 516 Convergence, overview cdma2000 404 W-CDMA 154 Copying sites cdma2000 358 W-CDMA 110 Copying, PN offset plan 475 Correlation models cdma2000 overview 280 settings 283 W-CDMA overview 34 settings 38 CPICH analysis layers 159 interference 515 Creating interference matrices 468 Monte Carlo analyses cdma2000 422 W-CDMA 171 neighbor lists 468 PN offset plans 469, 470 rapid planning analyses cdma2000 384 W-CDMA 136
D
W-CDMA 148, 193 PN offset plans 476 sites cdma2000 358 W-CDMA 110 Discrete subscribers cdma2000 settings 433, 434 table format 545 viewing information 436 W-CDMA settings 181, 182 table format 523 viewing information 184 Donor antennas cdma2000 repeaters 371 W-CDMA repeaters 123 Downlink interference analysis cdma2000 413 W-CDMA 162 Downlink traffic interference cdma2000 538 W-CDMA 516
E
Data rate negotiation 156, 406 Default settings files cdma2000 270 W-CDMA 24 Deleting analyses cdma2000 396, 445
Eb/No analysis layers cdma2000 413 W-CDMA 162 viewing with Pixel Info tool cdma2000 446 W-CDMA 194 Editing bearers cdma2000 307 W-CDMA 61 clutter types cdma2000 300
559
W-CDMA 56 PN offset search window settings 345 PN offsets in a plan 476 properties of PN offset plan 475 quality types cdma2000 316 W-CDMA 70 repeaters cdma2000 377 W-CDMA 129 service types cdma2000 319, 323 W-CDMA 73, 77 session types cdma2000 314 W-CDMA 68 subscriber equipment bands cdma2000 311 W-CDMA 65 subscriber types cdma2000 326 W-CDMA 80 EV-DO analysis layers 204, 456 Exporting PN offset assignments 477 reports cdma2000 502 W-CDMA 247
F
Frequency ranges cdma2000 276 W-CDMA 30

G
Generating analysis layers cdma2000 442 W-CDMA 190 Monte Carlo analyses cdma2000 435 W-CDMA 183 PN offset assignments 470 rapid pilot analyses cdma2000 395 W-CDMA 146 reports cdma2000 504 W-CDMA 249 using flags cdma2000 395 W-CDMA 146 Global edit basestation link budgets cdma2000 339 W-CDMA 93 sector settings cdma2000 355 W-CDMA 107
H
Fade margin cdma2000 542 W-CDMA 520 FER analysis layer cdma2000 413 W-CDMA 162 Flags using to generate analysis layers cdma2000 395 W-CDMA 146
Handoff analysis layers 415 soft handoff gains 542 status 416 Handover analysis layers 164 soft handover gains 520 status 165
560
Hardware sector settings cdma2000 348 W-CDMA 99 Help accessing 6 getting technical support 4 Home operator cdma2000 275 W-CDMA 29 HSDPA analysis layers 204
I
Importing PN offset assignments 477 Interference controlling cdma2000 538 W-CDMA 516 CPICH 515 downlink 513 forward link 535 pilot 537 reverse link 537 uplink 515 Interference analysis layers cdma2000 414 W-CDMA 163 Interference matrices for PN offset planning 468
L
Layer statistics cdma2000 505 PN offset analysis plans 480 W-CDMA 250 Locating cdma2000 repeaters 378 W-CDMA repeaters 130
Mobile equipment types, defining cdma2000 309 W-CDMA 63 Mobile Technology projects cdma2000 266 W-CDMA 20 Monte Carlo analyses cdma2000 analysis area settings 431 appending runs 439 convergence method 404 discrete subscriber settings 434 generating 424 number of runs 403 runtime parameter settings 429 Simulation Area settings 427 subscriber types 427 system settings 424 W-CDMA analysis area settings 179 appending runs 187 convergence method 154 discrete subscriber settings 182 generating 172 number of runs 153 runtime parameter settings 177 Simulation Area settings 175 subscriber types 175 system settings 172 Multi-band networks cdma2000 330 W-CDMA 84
N
Neighbor lists for PN offset planning 468 Network operators cdma2000 275 W-CDMA 29
561
Network settings cdma2000 carrier 286 correlation model 283 general 282 power control 285 W-CDMA carrier 286 correlation model 38 general 36 power control 39 Network settings files, creating cdma2000 270 W-CDMA 24 Network technologies, defining cdma2000 275 W-CDMA 29 Networks multi-band cdma2000 330 W-CDMA 84 Nominal subscribers cdma2000 389 W-CDMA 142
O
table format 525 Operating points files cdma2000 401 W-CDMA 151 Operators allocating spectrum cdma2000 278 W-CDMA 32 network cdma2000 275 W-CDMA 29
P
Online Help 6 Opening Project Settings dialog box cdma2000 269 W-CDMA 24 projects cdma2000 269 W-CDMA 24 Operating points cdma2000 overview 401 table format 547 W-CDMA overview 151
Packet-switched service types, defining cdma2000 319 W-CDMA 73 Path balance analysis cdma2000 417 W-CDMA 166 Penetration losses cdma2000 543 W-CDMA 521 Pilot analysis layers 409 interference 537 Pixel Info tool cdma2000 445 W-CDMA 193 Planet products 1 PN Offset Plan Analysis tool analyzing plans 477 displaying reports 480 viewing analysis layers 480
562
PN offset plans adding existing plan to project 476 adding interference matrix 468 analyzing 477 applying to sectors 482 copying 475 creating 469, 470 deleting 476 displaying reports 480 managing 475 viewing properties of 475 PN offsets editing in a plan 476 editing search window settings 345 importing and exporting assignments 477 index, displaying 476 overview 466 search window sizes 345 sector settings 351 Power base station link budgets cdma2000 333 W-CDMA 87 global edit cdma2000 339 W-CDMA 93 repeaters cdma2000 364 W-CDMA 116 sector settings cdma2000 353 W-CDMA 105 Power control cdma2000 overview 281 settings 285 W-CDMA overview 35 settings 39
Project settings accessing cdma2000 269 W-CDMA 24 creating default settings files cdma2000 270 W-CDMA 24 Projects, creating cdma2000 267 W-CDMA 21
Q
Quality sector settings cdma2000 352 W-CDMA 104 Quality types, editing cdma2000 316 W-CDMA 70
R
Rapid planning cdma2000 analysis area settings 393 analysis layers 380 generating 386 nominal subscriber 389 overview 380 sector settings 351 subscriber types 388 system settings 386 W-CDMA analysis area settings 145 analysis layers 132 generating 138 nominal subscriber 142 overview 132 sector settings 103 subscriber types 140 system settings 138
563
Re-parenting repeaters cdma2000 378 W-CDMA 130 Repeaters cdma2000 adding to sectors 366 carrier settings 377 donor antenna settings 371 editing 377 link settings 375 locating in a Map window 378 overview 364 prediction settings 373 re-parenting 378 service antenna settings 369 W-CDMA adding to sectors 117 carrier settings 129 donor antenna settings 123 editing 129 link settings 127 locating in a Map window 130 overview 116 prediction settings 125 re-parenting 130 service antenna settings 121 Reports cdma2000 adding layer statistics 509 deleting 504 designing 497 generating 504 output 502 overview 262 pixel information 445 predefined 486 saving 503 types of data 484 displaying PN offsets 480 W-CDMA
adding layer statistics 255 deleting 249 designing 243 generating 249 output 247 overview 16 pixel information 193 predefined 230 saving 249 types of data 228 Resources sector settings cdma2000 349 W-CDMA 101 Reverse link interference 537 interference analysis layers 414
S
Saving, reports cdma2000 503 W-CDMA 249 Scrambling codes creating plans 219 defining exceptions 222 general settings 220 modifying indexes 224 overview 218 saving 225 viewing statistics 225 Sector settings cdma2000 base station link budgets 333 carriers 347 defining 343 globally editing 355 hardware 348 implementation 351 PN offset 351 power 353 quality 352
564
rapid planning 351 resources 349 W-CDMA base station link budgets 87 carriers 99 defining 96 globally editing 107 hardware 99 implementation 103 power 105 quality 104 rapid planning 103 resources 101 scrambling codes 103 Sectors cdma2000 adding repeaters 366 W-CDMA adding repeaters 117 Service antennas cdma2000 repeaters 369 W-CDMA repeaters 121 Service types cdma2000 defining circuit-switched 316 defining packet-switched 319 editing 319, 323 overview 316 W-CDMA defining circuit-switched 71 defining packet-switched 73 editing 73, 77 overview 70 Session types cdma2000 defining 311 editing 314 W-CDMA defining 66 editing 68
Sites cdma2000 copying, pasting, or deleting 358 editing 355 overview 330 W-CDMA copying, pasting, or deleting 110 editing 107 overview 84 Slow fading, modeling cdma2000 425 W-CDMA 174 Soft handoff 542 Soft handover 520 Spectrum allocation cdma2000 276 W-CDMA 30 Subscriber equipment bands, editing cdma2000 311 W-CDMA 65 Subscriber types, editing cdma2000 326 W-CDMA 80 Subscribers cdma2000 and rapid planning 293 clutter types 296 mobile equipment types 309 nominal subscriber 389 overview 292 service types 316 session types 311 subscriber types 323 unserved 185, 437 W-CDMA and rapid planning 49 clutter types 52 mobile equipment types 63 nominal subscriber 142 overview 48
565
service types 70 session types 66 subscriber types 77 System settings, defining cdma2000 386 W-CDMA 138
T
Technical support 4 Traffic maps of unserved subscribers 185, 437

U
Unserved subscribers 185, 437 Uplink interference 515 interference analysis layers 163 Usage types, defining cdma2000 327 W-CDMA 81
V
Viewing carrier assignment information cdma2000 358 W-CDMA 110 discrete subscriber information cdma2000 436 W-CDMA 184 PN offset plan properties 475 PN offset reports 480
566

Planet CDMA User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Planet CDMA User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cover Page

CDMA User Guide

Copyright 2008 Mentum S.A. All rights reserved.

CHAPTER 2 Creating a Mobile Technology Project for WCDMA

Contents CDMA User Guide

CHAPTER 4 Defining W-CDMA Subscribers

Contents CDMA User Guide

64 66 67 69 69 70 71 73 77 78 81 84 84 85 85 85 87 87 89 93 93 96 97 97 97 98 99 99 99 101 103 104 105

Contents CDMA User Guide

CHAPTER 7 Generating Rapid Planning Analyses for WCDMA

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

CHAPTER 13 Creating a Mobile Technology Project for cdma2000

CHAPTER 14 Defining a cdma2000 Network Configuration

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

CHAPTER 21 Generating PN Offset Plans

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

Contents CDMA User Guide

This chapter contains the following section:

Chapter iii CDMA User Guide

CDMAW-CDMA (UMTS, including HSPA), cdma2000 (including IS-95, 1xRTT, EV-DO)

Getting technical support Send us your comments

Chapter iv CDMA User Guide

Getting technical support

Send us your comments

This chapter contains the following sections:

Using this documentation Organization of this user guide

Chapter v CDMA User Guide

Using this documentation

Introduction CDMA User Guide

You have two basic options for printing documents:

Whats This? Help provides detailed explanations of all dialog boxes.

Chapter v CDMA User Guide

Document Mentum Planet User Guide Grid Analysis User Guide

Data Manager Server Administrator Guide

Installation Guide Glossary Release Note

bright blue text

Chapter v CDMA User Guide

Organization of this user guide

Chapter 1: Overview of W-CDMA

Chapter 1 CDMA User Guide

Understanding W-CDMA networks

Multi-technology planning features

Overview of W-CDMA CDMA User Guide

Monte Carlo rapid planning

Chapter 1 CDMA User Guide

Scrambling code planning

Workflow for W-CDMA network planning

Overview of W-CDMA CDMA User Guide

Chapter 1 CDMA User Guide

Chapter 2: Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA

Creating a Mobile Technology Project for W-CDMA

Chapter 2 CDMA User Guide

Understanding Mobile Technology projects

Workflow for creating a Mobile Technology project